LSR NXT3 C

Manual Update Notice
The following manual has been revised.
Manual title: NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

Manual number (updated edition): SYS-NXT3c-013E0
Manual number (previous edition): SYS-NXT3c-012E0
Date of issue: April 30, 2018
The main changes are shown below.
Chapter, Section Details of change

4.10.3 Nozzle list Added descriptions for the BP04CL
camera.
7.9 Information command
Other minor changes and corrections have

been made throughout the manual.
To obtain a printed copy of the manual, contact your Fuji sales representative or send an
e-mail request to the address below.
E-mail address: intnetqst@fuji.co.jp

Fuji Scalable Placement Platform
NXT III/NXT IIIc
System Reference
Original Instructions
SYS-NXT3C-013E0
CAUTION !
Contact Fuji or a Fuji representative before
transporting this product to a foreign location within
your company or selling it to a third party within
your country or a different country.
If this product is sold or transported to a different
country without contacting Fuji, it may not be
possible for us to supply spare parts or provide
maintenance.
Fuji Scalable Placement Platform
NXT III/NXT IIIc

System Reference
SYS-NXT3C-013E0
FUJI CORPORATION
Copyright
All rights regarding the manual are reserved by FUJI CORPORATION. This manual may not, in whole or in
part, be reproduced or reused in any way without the prior written permission of FUJI CORPORATION.
Trademarks
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows 7 Professional Edition and Windows 7
Ultimate Edition, Windows 8.1 Professional Edition, Internet Explorer 11 are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Oracle Database 11g and Oracle Database 11g Express Edition (XE) are trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
SQL Server 2014 is trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
Warranty and liability

FUJI CORPORATION accepts no responsibility for the effects of the following: operating the machine with
non-genuine Fuji parts such as third party parts; usage with incorrect settings or in the improper
environment either intentionally or due to the fault of the user.
Notice
• The contents of this manual may be changed without notice.
• Every effort has been made to ensure that this manual is correct. However, please contact Fuji in
the unlikely event that errors or omissions are detected.
• FUJI CORPORATION accepts no liability for damages that may arise as a result of this manual
(except for problems caused by defective products).
SYS-NXT3C-013E0 Contents
Contents
1. Safety guidelines ....................................................................................................1
1.1 About symbols ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Degree of Hazards ................................................................................................ 1
1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols...................................................................................... 1
1.2 Safety rules for all machine types........................................................................................ 2
1.3 Safety rules for machine...................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 NXT-3 .................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.2 NXT-3c ................................................................................................................ 17
1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC ................................................................................................. 28
1.3.4 Tray Unit-M.......................................................................................................... 30
1.4 Safety labels ...................................................................................................................... 31
1.4.1 M3 type module................................................................................................... 31
1.4.2 M6 type module................................................................................................... 33
1.4.3 4M type base....................................................................................................... 35
1.4.4 2M type base....................................................................................................... 36
1.4.5 Other ................................................................................................................... 37
1.4.6 Machine safety label explanations ...................................................................... 39
1.5 Other safety rules .............................................................................................................. 40
1.5.1 Safety rules related to handling the machine ...................................................... 40
1.5.2 Disposal of linear motor magnets........................................................................ 41
1.6 The EMERGENCY STOP button....................................................................................... 42
1.6.1 NXT-3 .................................................................................................................. 42
1.6.2 NXT-3c ................................................................................................................ 43
1.7 Locking System ................................................................................................................. 44
1.7.1 Lockout Procedure .............................................................................................. 44
1.7.2 Unlocking Procedure........................................................................................... 46
2. Machine components and functions.....................................................................47

2.1 Machine components ........................................................................................................ 47
2.1.1 NXT-3 .................................................................................................................. 47
2.1.2 NXT-3c ................................................................................................................ 48
2.2 Module components .......................................................................................................... 49
2.2.1 M3-3, M3-3S modules......................................................................................... 49
2.2.2 M6 type module................................................................................................... 50
2.2.3 M3-3c modules.................................................................................................... 51
2.2.4 M6-3c modules.................................................................................................... 52
2.3 Conveyor ........................................................................................................................... 53
2.4 Operation panel ................................................................................................................. 54
NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference i

Contents SYS-NXT3C-013E0
2.4.1 Operation panel buttons ...................................................................................... 54

2.4.2 Operation screen................................................................................................. 55
2.5 Signal tower ....................................................................................................................... 59
2.5.1 The signal tower display and module condition................................................... 59
2.5.2 Changing the signal tower settings ..................................................................... 60
2.6 Feeder pallet buttons and LEDs ........................................................................................ 61
2.7 Pallet change unit .............................................................................................................. 62
2.7.1 PCU-2.................................................................................................................. 62
2.7.2 PCU-2c................................................................................................................ 63
3. Basic operation .................................................................................................... 65

3.1 Turning ON/OFF the machine ........................................................................................... 65
3.1.1 Turning on the machine....................................................................................... 65
3.1.2 Waking modules.................................................................................................. 66
3.1.3 Changing a module to sleep mode...................................................................... 67
3.1.4 Turning off the machine power ............................................................................ 67
3.2 Using the operation panel.................................................................................................. 68
3.2.1 Pressing buttons.................................................................................................. 68
3.2.2 Scrolling lists ....................................................................................................... 69
3.3 Displaying the manual mode screen.................................................................................. 70
3.4 Displaying the changeover information screen.................................................................. 70
3.5 Displaying the image monitor screen................................................................................. 71
3.6 Opening the front door....................................................................................................... 72
3.7 Stopping the buzzer........................................................................................................... 73
3.8 Setting feeders on feeder pallets ....................................................................................... 74
3.9 Removing feeders from the feeder pallet........................................................................... 77
4. Preparing production ........................................................................................... 79

4.1 Transmitting jobs ............................................................................................................... 80
4.2 Displaying exchange guidance for each unit ..................................................................... 81
4.2.1 Exchange guidance after transmitting the job ..................................................... 81
4.2.2 Exchange guidance after calibration ................................................................... 82
4.2.3 Selectable exchange guidance in the changeover information screen ............... 83
4.3 Changing the job................................................................................................................ 85
4.3.1 Job changeover guidance ................................................................................... 85
4.3.2 Job changeover procedures................................................................................ 85
4.4 Feeder batch exchange ..................................................................................................... 87
4.4.1 Feeder batch exchange guidance screen ........................................................... 88
4.4.2 How to perform feeder batch exchange .............................................................. 88
4.5 Replacing feeders.............................................................................................................. 94
4.5.1 Feeder replacement guidance screen................................................................. 94
ii NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

4.5.2 Removing and attaching feeders ........................................................................ 95

4.5.3 Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC ................................... 97
4.5.4 Operation when using the free allocation function .............................................. 98
4.6 Setting trays on a Tray Unit-LT ........................................................................................ 100
4.6.1 Tray setting guidance screens .......................................................................... 100
4.6.2 Setting trays ...................................................................................................... 102
4.6.3 Changing magazines ........................................................................................ 106
4.6.4 Setting the pickup position .................................................................................111
4.6.5 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-LT .............................................113
4.6.6 Tray height error guidance .................................................................................113
4.6.7 Important points when using parts taller than 25.4 mm .....................................114
4.7 Setting trays on a Tray Unit-LTC.......................................................................................115
4.7.1 Tray setting guidance screens ...........................................................................115
4.7.2 Setting trays .......................................................................................................117
4.7.3 Changing magazines ........................................................................................ 121
4.7.4 Setting the pickup position ................................................................................ 126
4.7.5 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-LTC.......................................... 128
4.7.6 Tray height error guidance ................................................................................ 128
4.8 Setting trays on a Tray Unit-M ......................................................................................... 129
4.8.1 Tray setting guidance screen ............................................................................ 129
4.8.2 Setting trays (when using Fujitrax Verifier)........................................................ 131
4.8.3 Setting the pickup position ................................................................................ 135
4.8.4 Cautions when inserting trays ........................................................................... 136
4.9 Replacing backup plates ................................................................................................. 137
4.9.1 Important point when replacing backup plates.................................................. 137
4.9.2 Backup plate replacement guidance screen ..................................................... 138
4.9.3 Removing and attaching backup plates ............................................................ 138
4.9.4 Areas in which backup pins can be placed ....................................................... 139
4.9.5 Cautions when allocating backup pins .............................................................. 143
4.9.6 Cautions when using the optional soft backup pins .......................................... 143
4.10 Replacing nozzles ........................................................................................................... 146
4.10.1 Nozzle replacement guidance screen ............................................................... 146
4.10.2 Removing and attaching nozzles ...................................................................... 147
4.10.3 Nozzle list.......................................................................................................... 149
4.10.4 Nozzle station list .............................................................................................. 155
4.10.5 When Performing hybrid calibration .................................................................. 156
4.11 Replacing the Placing Head ............................................................................................ 157
4.11.1 Cautions when exchanging heads .................................................................... 157
4.11.2 Head replacement guidance screen ................................................................. 158
4.11.3 Removing and attaching the placing head ........................................................ 158
NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference iii

4.11.4 Moving the head to the exchange position........................................................ 164

4.11.5 Before setting an H02F head ............................................................................ 166
4.12 Setting Auto-tools For DX Head....................................................................................... 168
4.13 Other changeover ............................................................................................................ 169
4.13.1 Device type changeover.................................................................................... 169
4.13.2 Parts camera type changeover ......................................................................... 170
5. Production.......................................................................................................... 171
5.1 Starting production........................................................................................................... 171
5.2 Stopping operation........................................................................................................... 172
5.2.1 Cycle stop.......................................................................................................... 172
5.2.2 Finishing and unloading the current panels
(Stop after production of one board)................................................................. 172
5.2.3 Emergency stop ................................................................................................ 173
5.2.4 Using the interval stop function ......................................................................... 174
5.3 Restarting production....................................................................................................... 175
5.3.1 Restarting after cycle stop or after finishing and unloading current panels....... 175
5.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop .................................................................. 175
5.4 Supplying feeder parts..................................................................................................... 176
5.4.1 Splicing parts..................................................................................................... 176
5.4.2 Replacing feeders ............................................................................................. 182
5.4.3 Replacing feeders (Tray unit-LT/LTC) ............................................................... 185
5.4.4 Using dynamic alternate feeders....................................................................... 187
5.4.5 Feeder changeover using the automatic changeover function.......................... 189
5.4.6 Exchanging feeders when using the free allocation function ............................ 191
5.5 Replenishing trays on a Tray Unit-LT............................................................................... 192
5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ........................ 192
5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier) .................. 197
5.5.3 Guidance display and procedure (when supplying parts to supply magazine)... 202
5.5.4 Guidance display and procedure (for dynamic alternate tray resupply) ............ 207
5.5.5 When using the supply reservation function...................................................... 214
5.6 Replenishing trays on a Tray Unit-LTC ............................................................................ 215
5.6.3 Guidance display and procedure (when supplying parts to supply magazine)... 225
5.6.4 Guidance display and procedure (for dynamic alternate tray resupply) ............ 230
5.6.5 When using the supply reservation function...................................................... 231
5.7 Replenishing trays on a Tray Unit-M................................................................................ 232
5.7.3 When parts run out for both position A and position B ...................................... 242
iv NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

5.7.4 Using the SUPPLY button ................................................................................. 243

5.8 Clearing errors................................................................................................................. 244
5.9 Saving trace data............................................................................................................. 245
6. Machine operations ............................................................................................247

6.1 Conveyor only (breakdown) function ............................................................................... 247
6.1.1 Preparation procedures..................................................................................... 247
6.1.2 Conveyor only (breakdown) operation .............................................................. 248
6.2 Pair module production.................................................................................................... 249
6.2.1 Conditions for pair module production .............................................................. 249
6.2.2 Waking paired modules..................................................................................... 250
6.3 Blocking feeders .............................................................................................................. 251
6.3.1 Feeder exchange guidance displayed .............................................................. 251
6.3.2 Replacing feeders ............................................................................................. 251
6.4 Automatic changeover function ....................................................................................... 252
6.4.1 Barcode ID mode .............................................................................................. 253
6.4.2 Handy scanner mode ........................................................................................ 253
6.4.3 Automatic changeover usage precautions ........................................................ 254
6.5 Panel position correction function.................................................................................... 256
6.5.1 Attaching felt paper plate .................................................................................. 256
6.5.2 Regarding errors when using the panel position correction function ................ 257
6.5.3 Important point .................................................................................................. 259
6.6 Automatic backup pin function......................................................................................... 260
6.6.1 Using automatic backup pins ............................................................................ 260
6.6.2 Errors during operation ..................................................................................... 261
6.6.3 Important point .................................................................................................. 267
6.7 Device statistical warnings and error stop is supported .................................................. 268
6.7.1 Device statistical warning screen ...................................................................... 268
6.7.2 Statistical error stop screen............................................................................... 269
6.8 Changing nozzles due to statistical warnings.................................................................. 270
6.8.1 Screen for changing nozzles due to statistical warnings................................... 270
6.8.2 Exchanging nozzles .......................................................................................... 270
6.8.3 Clearing error stops........................................................................................... 273
6.9 Network error detection function...................................................................................... 274
6.9.1 Duplicate IP address detection function ............................................................ 274
6.9.2 Line Monitor disconnection ............................................................................... 275
6.9.3 Multiple connections to the Fujitrax Profiler server ........................................... 276
6.9.4 Repeated connections and disconnections with host ....................................... 277
6.10 Interval stop function ....................................................................................................... 278
6.10.1 Guidance for starting and stopping the interval stop function ........................... 278
6.10.2 Important point .................................................................................................. 279
NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference v

6.11 Simple periodic nozzle changeover function ................................................................... 280

6.11.1 Operation when using simple periodic nozzle changeover ............................... 280
6.11.2 Important point .................................................................................................. 284
6.12 Backup pin allocation check function............................................................................... 285
6.12.1 Procedure to change to backup pin allocation check mode .............................. 285
6.12.2 Using backup pin allocation check mode .......................................................... 286
6.12.3 Important point .................................................................................................. 289
6.13 Nozzle changeover error detection function .................................................................... 290
6.13.1 Clearing nozzle changeover errors ................................................................... 290
6.13.2 Clearing errors when using H01 and H02(F) heads.......................................... 290
6.13.3 Error guidance and clearance method for
H04(S), H08(Q), H12HS(Q), H24 (G, S, A), and V12 heads ............................ 291
6.13.4 Clearing nozzle changeover errors in Accessory Software ............................... 291
6.13.5 Important point .................................................................................................. 291
6.14 Hybrid calibration support ................................................................................................ 292
6.14.1 Handling the jig parts......................................................................................... 292
6.14.2 Starting measurement ....................................................................................... 293
6.14.3 Regarding errors when measuring .................................................................... 294
6.14.4 Dedicated jig cleaning method .......................................................................... 296
6.14.5 Clearing an error when measuring from Accessory Software ........................... 297
6.15 Automatic nozzle cleaning function ................................................................................. 298
6.15.1 Using the automatic nozzle cleaning function ................................................... 298
6.15.2 Regarding errors when using the automatic nozzle cleaning function .............. 299
6.16 Separated reject parts box support.................................................................................. 300
6.16.1 Setting the separated reject parts box............................................................... 300
6.16.2 Using the separated reject parts box................................................................. 301
6.17 Energy saving mode ........................................................................................................ 304
6.17.1 Operating using energy saving mode................................................................ 304
6.17.2 Important point .................................................................................................. 305
6.18 Reducing auto calibration time when exchanging heads................................................. 306
6.18.1 Operating while reducing calibration time when exchanging heads.................. 306
6.18.2 Important point .................................................................................................. 306
6.18.3 Clearing auto calibration results ........................................................................ 307
6.18.4 When errors occur............................................................................................. 308
6.19 Waste tape box cleaning guidance support..................................................................... 312
6.19.1 Waste tape box cleaning guidance ................................................................... 312
6.19.2 Cleaning the waste tape box ............................................................................. 312
6.20 Panel height detection function........................................................................................ 313
6.20.1 Operating using the panel height detection function ......................................... 313
6.20.2 When errors occur............................................................................................. 314
vi NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

6.20.3 Outputting panel height measurement results to a file...................................... 315

6.21 Predictive maintenance ................................................................................................... 318
6.21.1 When a low CPU box battery is detected.......................................................... 318
6.21.2 When a high temperature is detected in the CPU box ...................................... 319
6.21.3 When there is a CPU box battery life error ....................................................... 320
6.21.4 When there is a CPU box high temperature error ............................................. 321
6.22 Operation when IPS is broken......................................................................................... 322
6.22.1 Operation using operation when IPS is broken ................................................. 322
6.22.2 Clearing the mode for when IPS is broken........................................................ 322
6.22.3 Clearing auto calibration results........................................................................ 323
6.23 Any side production ......................................................................................................... 324
6.23.1 Any side production operation........................................................................... 324
6.23.2 Important point .................................................................................................. 325
6.24 Stacked part supply ......................................................................................................... 327
6.24.1 Using stacked part supply ................................................................................. 327
6.24.2 Important point ................................................................................................. 327
6.25 Part ID traceability ........................................................................................................... 329
6.25.1 Using part ID traceability ................................................................................... 329
6.25.2 When 2D code reading errors occur ................................................................. 331
6.25.3 Important point ................................................................................................. 332
6.26 Placed part deviation check............................................................................................. 333
6.26.1 Using placed part deviation check .................................................................... 333
6.26.2 When a placing deviation is detected................................................................ 333
6.26.3 Important point ................................................................................................. 334
6.27 Reading panel IDs again using a handy scanner ............................................................ 335
6.27.1 Re-reading panel IDs with a handy scanner ..................................................... 335
6.27.2 When panel ID reading errors occur ................................................................. 335
6.27.3 Important point ................................................................................................. 337
7. Using manual commands...................................................................................339

7.1 Items displayed in the manual commands menu ............................................................ 339
7.2 Clean command .............................................................................................................. 340
7.3 Position head command .................................................................................................. 341
7.4 Manage production command ......................................................................................... 343
7.4.1 Pickup position check (device offset) ................................................................ 344
7.4.2 Clearing the quantity of produced panels.......................................................... 350
7.4.3 Clearing the number of panels loaded .............................................................. 351
7.5 Diagnostics command ..................................................................................................... 352
7.6 Remove panels command............................................................................................... 353
7.7 Exchange command........................................................................................................ 355
7.7.1 Device unit command........................................................................................ 356
NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference vii

7.7.2 Nozzles command............................................................................................. 357

7.7.3 Head command ................................................................................................. 358
7.7.4 Backup plates command ................................................................................... 360
7.7.5 Backup plates (lane2 forward) command.......................................................... 362
7.8 Adjust command .............................................................................................................. 364
7.8.1 Remove air command ....................................................................................... 365
7.8.2 Measure needle offset command ...................................................................... 365
7.8.3 Check applied gue command............................................................................ 366
7.8.4 Clean head nozzles command .......................................................................... 366
7.8.5 Clean All Nozzles Command............................................................................. 367
7.8.6 Adjust IH Command .......................................................................................... 368
7.8.7 Remove jig parts command............................................................................... 369
7.9 Information command ...................................................................................................... 372
8. Accessory software............................................................................................ 375

8.1 Functions ......................................................................................................................... 375
8.2 Starting accessory software............................................................................................. 375
8.3 Floor monitor.................................................................................................................... 376
8.3.1 Floor Monitor fields and their meanings ............................................................ 376
8.4 Vision processing error analysis ...................................................................................... 379
8.4.1 Information displayed in the vision processing error analysis screen ............... 379
8.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring settings .......................................... 380
8.5 Warnings.......................................................................................................................... 382
8.5.1 Displaying warnings .......................................................................................... 382
8.5.2 Warning information .......................................................................................... 382
8.5.3 Displaying current warnings .............................................................................. 383
8.5.4 Displaying warning details................................................................................. 383
8.5.5 Displaying the warnings log list ......................................................................... 384
8.5.6 Setting the success rate .................................................................................... 384
8.6 Messages ........................................................................................................................ 385
8.6.1 Displaying messages ........................................................................................ 385
8.6.2 Adding messages.............................................................................................. 386
8.6.3 Editing messages .............................................................................................. 386
8.7 Error search ..................................................................................................................... 387
8.8 Service list ....................................................................................................................... 388
8.8.1 Displaying the services...................................................................................... 388
8.8.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer service installer .......................... 389
8.9 Acquiring machine trace data automatically .................................................................... 390
8.9.1 Displaying the auto trace data screen ............................................................... 390
8.9.2 Auto trace data screen items and their meanings ............................................. 390
8.9.3 Specifying automatic trace data acquisition ...................................................... 391
viii NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

8.9.4 The machine during automatic trace acquisition............................................... 391

8.9.5 Downloading trace data .................................................................................... 392
9. Settings and management .................................................................................393

9.1 Starting machine accessories.......................................................................................... 393
9.2 Making machine configuration settings ........................................................................... 394
9.2.1 Tray pickup start point and movement direction settings .................................. 396
9.2.2 Specifying the reference position for the tray pickup start point........................ 400
9.2.3 Specifying automatic changeover settings (barcode ID mode) ......................... 401
9.2.4 Specifying automatic changeover settings (handy scanner mode) ................... 403
9.2.5 Specifying panel position correction function settings....................................... 404
9.2.6 Specifying resupply settings for the tray unit-LT/LTC ........................................ 406
9.2.7 Dynamic alternate tray supply settings ............................................................. 408
9.2.8 Panel unloading order settings.......................................................................... 413
9.2.9 Performing dual production with different width panels..................................... 414
9.2.10 Settings for the pitch between conveyors ......................................................... 415
9.2.11 Function to prevent nozzle collisions from using the feeder buttons................. 416
9.2.12 Check the remaining part quantities when changing alternate feeders ............ 417
9.2.13 Specifying the setting for feeder exchange guidance for giving
the priority to cycle time.................................................................................... 418
9.2.14 Specifying whether to use nozzle length offset ................................................. 419
9.2.15 Module buzzer setting ....................................................................................... 419
9.2.16 One CycleStop Switch ON/OFF settings .......................................................... 420
9.3 Making module configuration settings ............................................................................. 421
9.3.1 Nozzle statistical error settings ......................................................................... 423
9.3.2 Breakdown operation settings........................................................................... 423
9.3.3 Hybrid calibration settings ................................................................................. 424
9.3.4 Interval stop setting ........................................................................................... 424
9.3.5 Simple periodic nozzle changeover settings ..................................................... 425
9.3.6 Settings for using operation when IPS is broken .............................................. 425
9.3.7 Monitor ionizer for removing static charge setting............................................. 426
9.3.8 LCR check settings ........................................................................................... 427
9.3.9 Specifying nozzle defect detection.................................................................... 428
9.3.10 Part presence check ......................................................................................... 429
9.4 Data acquisition ............................................................................................................... 430
9.4.1 Acquiring trace data .......................................................................................... 430
9.4.2 Acquiring images............................................................................................... 430
9.5 Calibration ....................................................................................................................... 431
9.5.1 Matrix measurement ......................................................................................... 431
9.6 Remote operation ............................................................................................................ 434
9.6.1 Updating software on the machine.................................................................... 434
NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference ix

9.6.2 Updating machine control software ................................................................... 434

9.6.3 Unclamping a module........................................................................................ 434
9.6.4 Clamping a module ........................................................................................... 435
9.6.5 Specifying a production mode ........................................................................... 436
9.6.6 Conveyor calibration.......................................................................................... 437
9.6.7 Completing nozzle maintenance ....................................................................... 438
9.6.8 Check backup pin position ................................................................................ 438
9.6.9 Forcibly clearing errors...................................................................................... 439
9.6.10 Clearing separated reject box information......................................................... 440
9.6.11 Specifying IPS brightness adjustment............................................................... 441
9.6.12 Clearing the number of panels produced .......................................................... 442
10. Using software tools .......................................................................................... 443

10.1 Image Viewer................................................................................................................... 445
10.1.1 Checking images with Image Viewer ................................................................ 445
10.1.2 Checking images with Image Viewer ................................................................ 445
10.2 NetworkSetting ................................................................................................................ 446
10.3 VersionUp ........................................................................................................................ 447
10.4 AsciiToBin ........................................................................................................................ 448
10.5 EmergencyInstaller .......................................................................................................... 449
10.5.1 Preparing to use ................................................................................................ 450
10.5.2 Recovering a CPU............................................................................................. 451
10.5.3 Specifying TCP/IP settings................................................................................ 454
10.6 cfRepair ........................................................................................................................... 456
10.6.1 Preparation procedures..................................................................................... 456
10.6.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................... 456
10.6.3 Important point .................................................................................................. 459
10.7 Motion Adjustment Tool.................................................................................................... 460
10.7.1 Installing Motion Adjustment Tool ...................................................................... 460
10.7.2 Starting Motion Adjustment Tool........................................................................ 460
10.7.3 Operating status view functions ........................................................................ 462
10.7.4 Operating adjustment functions......................................................................... 464
10.8 Equipment Check ............................................................................................................ 465
10.8.1 Installing Equipment Check............................................................................... 465
10.8.2 Checking modules on a production line ............................................................ 466
10.8.3 Checking modules not on a production line ...................................................... 466
10.8.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors .................................................... 467
10.8.5 Checking the operation of units......................................................................... 469
10.8.6 Setting tray unit-LT/LTC calibration values ........................................................ 471
10.8.7 Tray unit-LT/LTC command list.......................................................................... 472
10.8.8 Tray unit operation check command list ............................................................ 474
x NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

10.8.9 Conveyor command list..................................................................................... 478

10.8.10 Checking unit configuration............................................................................... 479
10.9 MEdit ............................................................................................................................... 483
10.10 IPS Viewer ....................................................................................................................... 484
10.10.1 Installing IPS Viewer ......................................................................................... 484
10.10.2 IPS Viewer window elements ............................................................................ 485
10.10.3 Basic IPS Viewer operation............................................................................... 485
10.10.4 Reading the displayed results ........................................................................... 488
11. Upgrading software ............................................................................................497

11.1 Upgrading machine control software ............................................................................... 497
11.1.1 Using accessory software ................................................................................. 497
11.1.2 Using VersionUp from the NXT tools................................................................. 499
11.1.3 When unable to upgrade................................................................................... 502
11.2 Upgrading unit software................................................................................................... 504
12. Troubleshooting..................................................................................................507
12.1 Troubleshooting points .................................................................................................... 507
12.2 Checking error codes ...................................................................................................... 507
12.3 Troubleshooting common machine issues ...................................................................... 508
12.3.1 Mark vision processing errors ........................................................................... 508
12.3.2 Part vision processing errors............................................................................. 510
12.3.3 Pickup errors ......................................................................................................511
12.3.4 Poor placing accuracy....................................................................................... 513
12.3.5 Panel conveyance errors .................................................................................. 515
12.3.6 If there are missing parts................................................................................... 516
12.3.7 An error occurs that the XS-axis is in an unknown position. ............................. 517
12.3.8 Panel detection error between modules............................................................ 517
12.3.9 An encoder backup error occurs ....................................................................... 518
12.3.10 If there is computer system trouble ................................................................... 519
12.4 Troubleshooting common Fuji Flexa and Fujitrax related issues..................................... 526
12.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors .................................................................................... 526
12.4.2 Fujitrax related errors ........................................................................................ 526
12.5 Major machine issues...................................................................................................... 528
12.6 Acquiring trace data......................................................................................................... 529
12.6.1 Acquiring data using the on-machine save function.......................................... 529
12.6.2 Acquiring after operating system errors ............................................................ 529
NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference xi

xii NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 Introduction
Introduction
Provided Manuals
The following manuals are available for this machine.
NXT III
• NXT III Setup Manual
• NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference
• NXT III Mechanical Reference
• NXT series Programming Manual for Nexim
• NXT series Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa
NXT IIIc
• NXT IIIc Setup Manual
• NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference
• NXT IIIc Mechanical Reference
• NXT series Programming Manual for Nexim
• NXT series Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa
NXT III Setup Manual/NXT IIIc Setup Manual

This manual is used for setting up new machines or for moving machines in your factory. This manual
provides instructions from setting up the machine and units to making software settings.
NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference

This manual provides instructions and settings for using the machine in the most efficient manner for
production and changeover. This manual mostly covers software and systems items.
NXT III Mechanical Reference/NXT IIIc Mechanical Reference

This manual provides instructions for mechanical aspects of the machine such as adjusting sensors,
preventive maintenance and replacing parts. Refer to this manual when performing maintenance on the
machine such as cleaning, lubrication and adjustments.
NXT series Programming Manual for Nexim

This manual provides the instructions for programming the machine that are unique for the NXT series.
Refer to this manual when creating jobs or part data in Nexim, transmitting jobs, or editing jobs on the
machine.
NXT series Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa

This manual provides the instructions for programming the machine that are unique for the NXT series.
Refer to this manual when creating jobs or part data in Fuji Flexa, transmitting jobs, or editing jobs on the
machine.
NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference xiii

Introduction SYS-NXT3C-013E0
Others
Some of the machine names used in this manual are not the formal machine names.
NXT III
Formal name Names used in this manual
NXT III NXT-3
M3 III module M3-3 module
M3 IIIS module M3-3S module
M6 III module M6-3 module
M6 IIIL module M6-3L module
2M III base 2M-3 base
4M III base 4M-3 base
PCU II PCU-2
NXT IIIc
Formal name Names used in this manual
NXT IIIc NXT-3c
M3 IIIc module M3-3c module
M6 IIIc module M6-3c module
2M IIIc base 2M-3c base
4M IIIc base 4M-3c base
PCU IIc PCU-2c
xiv NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 1. Safety guidelines
1. Safety guidelines
Fuji machines are designed and produced with safety as one of our main considerations. However, even
a perfectly designed machine can be damaged, or someone can still be injured, if the user does not follow
the safety rules. It is the responsibility of the user to make sure that all safety rules are followed at all times.
Be sure to read the safety rules before operating the machine and always use the machine in accordance
with these safety rules.
1.1 About symbols

This section provides an explanation of the relevant safety precautions to be adhered to by all people who
use or work on this machine. An explanation of the warning labels attached to the machine is also provided.
This manual employs the use of descriptive symbols and provides details of the level of danger involved in
certain operations to accompany the explanations of machine warning labels and safety related items. Be
sure you understand the meanings of these symbols before reading the manual.
1.1.1 Degree of Hazards
Symbol Definition
Failure to observe this hazard warning will lead to severe injury or death.
DANGER
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to severe injury or death.
WARNING
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to personal injury or damage
CAUTION to the machine.
1.1.2 Examples of the Symbols
Symbol Explanation
Hazard
A triangle is used to draw your attention to a hazard. The symbol inside the triangle
indicates the nature of the hazard (in this case, electrical shock).
Prohibition
A circle with a diagonal line is used to draw your attention to an operation that is
prohibited. The symbol inside the circle indicates the nature of the operation (in this
case, “Do not touch”).
A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to a mandatory

action. In other words, you are required to carefully perform the given instructions.
NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference 1

1. Safety guidelines SYS-NXT3C-013E0
1.2 Safety rules for all machine types
DANGER
Do not go near movable parts during automatic or manual operation.
• Body parts or clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the conveyor inlets.
• Body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in injury.
• If using a single machine independently, install safety covers or interlock sensors at

the conveyor openings, in accordance with your local safety regulations, to prevent
injuries.
Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors open.
• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or clothing may get caught
in the machine, resulting in personal injury.
• When maintenance work is completed, return the safety covers and doors to their
original (closed) position.
Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons before operating the
machine.
• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons so that they
can be pushed quickly in case of an emergency.
Check the safety functions before starting operation.
• Before starting the machine, check the operation of the EMERGENCY STOP
buttons, the safety switches on the covers and doors, and all other machine safety
features.
• Contact a Fuji serviceman immediately if any of the safety functions fail and do not
use the machine.
Do not remove safety switches or disable safety functions.
• Do not short or remove the machine’s safety switches or disable any safety
functions. Persons working on the machine may be seriously injured if operation
commands are issued by mistake.
2 NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference

WARNING
Ensure that there is nobody inside the machine when working on the machine with
two people or more.
• Verify that nobody is in or near the machine before operating the machine.
Operating the machine may result in injury to people who are in or near the
machine.
Do not go near a machine that has stopped moving.
• There are times during automatic operation when the machine may appear to have
stopped, such as while it is waiting for a panel, waiting for the next machine, reading
marks, or transmitting data. In such cases, once certain conditions are fulfilled, the
machine will begin moving again automatically, so care should be taken. Only go
near the machine after the EMERGENCY STOP button has been pushed.
• When the “production screen” is displayed on the operation panel, the machine will
begin to move once certain conditions are satisfied. Be aware that the machine will
begin to move regardless of whether these conditions are satisfied intentionally or
inadvertently.
Do not place hands near the main conveyor.
• Hands or other body parts may get caught in the machine.
Always turn off power to the machine before performing maintenance.
• Failure to observe this is extremely dangerous and may result in sudden machine
movements or electric shock.
Do not insert or remove connectors while power is being supplied to the machine.
• Removing or inserting connectors while power is being supplied to the machine may
not only cause damage to the machine, but may also cause electric shock.
Stay clear from the machine when it is being lifted.
• Never put hands or feet under the machine when the machine is being raised by
means of a jack or other device for leveling or transport.
Do not wear gloves made of cloth when operating the machine.
• Rubber gloves will tear when caught by the machine and prevent hands from being
drawn into the machine. Gloves made of cotton or similarly strong material may
cause hands to be drawn into the machine.

WARNING
Long hair should be tied back.
• Long hair may get caught in machines that are operating.

Hair should be kept short or tied back so that it does not get caught in the machine.
Turn off the air supply when removing items such as cylinders, valves, or filters.
• Removing cylinders, valves, or filters without turning the air supply off may cause
parts or particles to be propelled into the eyes.
• Be sure to turn off the air supply when removing cylinders, valves, or filters.
Wear protective glasses when removing parts from the machine.
• Be sure to wear protective glasses when removing or exchanging parts.
Check the machine operation panel and the target axes while manually operating the
machine.
• When operating the machine, carefully follow the instructions that are displayed on
the operation panel.
• Operating the machine without looking at the operation panel may lead to operating
errors or result in damage to the machine or products.
Do not touch the servo amp power terminal for at least five minutes after turning off
the power.
• The servo amp retains a high voltage even after the power has been turned off.
• Always wait at least five minutes, and ensure that the CHARGE lamp is off, before
performing any work that may result in contact with the servo amp terminal.
CAUTION
Confirm the operational status from the messages on the operation panel for
machines that support automatic changeover.
• On machines equipped with an automatic changeover system, it is difficult to

determine the changeover status from the front of the machine during production.
Follow the instructions on the operation panel.

CAUTION
Use the handle when opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers.
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers without using the handle may
result in injury.
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers with too much force may
result in damage to the machine.
Always wear headgear when working in or under machines.
• Failure to do so could result in head injuries.
Be careful of edge sections when touching covers, plates, and metal items.
Body parts may be cut by edge sections.

1.3 Safety rules for machine
1.3.1 NXT-3
1
2
3 01MEC-1548
WARNING Related
sections
1 When pushing a module onto the base, check that no one is 4.8
behind the module. 4.11
6.11
• A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if 6.12
caught between the base and module. 6.13
2 When pushing in a module, do not insert hands between the 6.16
seamless cover support and module. 7.2
7.6
• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in serious 7.7
injury.
3 When pushing in a module, do not insert hands between the

module lower front cover and base.
• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in serious

injury.
4 When working on a module in an opening with the cover off,

ensure that no one pushes in or pulls out the module.

injury.

0.15
0.15
＊ＣＤ３ＦＡ１２３４５６＊
5
6
01MEC-1549
WARNING Related
sections
5 When changing the conveyor width with the module pulled -
forward, do not insert hands into the area near the conveyor.
• Body parts may get pinched or caught in the movable conveyor

rail, resulting in serious injury.
6 There is a limit to the number of modules that can be pulled out -

safely at the same time. (Maximum: Two M3 type modules on a
4M type base.)
• If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall over

to the front, possibly resulting in serious injury. This is
especially true when the front leveling bolts have not been
adjusted.

01MEC-1550
WARNING Related
sections
7 Do not insert hands or other body parts into the machine in the -
spaces between feeders, especially when there are only a few
feeders present on the feeder pallet.
• Failure to do so could result in injury due to contact with the

head.
8 When pulling out or pushing in a module, do not insert hands or 4.8, 4.11
other body parts in between modules. 6.11, 6.12
6.13, 6.16
• If caught between modules, fingers or other body parts could 7.2, 7.6
be cut or severed. 7.7
9 When working on a base in the opening above the waste tape -

box, ensure that no one pulls out a module.

injury.

M/N.
ST748A-880PF
SO/N.
C/N.
0201978-00
KK579-309PF
10
11
12
01MEC-1553
WARNING Related
sections
10 When working on a base in an opening with the cover off, ensure -
that no one pushes in or pulls out the module.

injury.
11 Do not release the module stopper mechanism on the base or -

remove the module without mounting an MCU first.
• The module could fall from the base, resulting in serious injury
or death.
12 Stay off of the base. -
• Failure to do so could result in injury.

13
14
15
01MEC-1551
16
WARNING Related
sections
13 When mounting an MCU, ensure that no one is between the -
MCU and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if

caught between the MCU and base.
14 Do not rotate the module lock knob to [UNLOCK] when a module -

is loaded on the MCU.
• If the module moves on the MCU, it could pinch and sever body
parts, and if it falls from the MCU it could result in serious injury
or death.
15 When handling the MCU, watch out for corners and protrusions. -
16 Always be ready to apply the caster brake when handling the -

MCU.
• Always use the caster brake when stopping an MCU loaded

with a module.

17 18 19
17 18 19
01MEC-1857
WARNING Related
sections
17 Do not touch linear motors immediately after operation is 4.9
stopped. 4.11
• Contact with the shaft or coil section could cause burns. The
shaft and coil section of linear motors remain very hot even
after production is stopped.
18 People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of linear

motors (do not come within 400 mm).
• A strong magnetic field is generated by the linear motor in

modules. Exercise extreme caution, because pacemakers
may malfunction due to the magnetic field.
19 Do not disassemble linear motors. -
• Never disassemble the linear motor coil and shaft parts. Injury
and/or machine damage may occur by magnetic parts
shooting out due to the strong force of the magnets.

21 22
20
23 24 25 01MEC-1557
WARNING Related
sections
20 Do not look directly into the vision processing light or the panel
conveyance check sensor light. Wear tinted protective glasses.
• Eye damage may be caused by looking directly into the light.
21 When lifting a backup plate, be careful not to put your hands in 4.9
the areas between the plate, width-changing ball screw, and
hexagonal shaft. Also, be careful not to cut your hands on the
corners of the conveyor rails.
22 Do not lift a backup plate if you are not strong enough, and 4.9
maintain correct lifting posture if you do lift a backup plate.
• Because the backup plates are very heavy, lifting them

incorrectly could result in back or other injuries.
23 Do not insert hands or other body parts into the duct of the waste
tape processing unit.
• There is a very sharp cutter blade inside the unit. Exercise

extreme caution, especially when carrying the unit.
24 Use two or more people to carry the waste tape processing unit.
• Maintenance of the waste tape processing unit is usually

accompanied by removing the unit from the machine. Use two
or more people to carry the unit because it is very heavy.
25 Ensure that the work bench where the waste tape processing
unit is placed is flat.
• The unit may fall to the ground if the work bench is tilted,
resulting in personal injury and/or machine damage.

WARNING Related
sections
26 When using remote operation for machines in MEdit or -
Management Monitor, machines may start to move even though
there are no people around them.
Do not insert hands or other body parts into machines that are in
a state in which it is possible to start operation.
• The machine may start to operate by remote operation and

hands or other body parts may get caught, resulting in serious
injury. When working inside a machine, be sure to push one of
the EMERGENCY STOP buttons.

27
29
28
01MEC-1555-b
CAUTION Related
sections
27 Be careful not to pinch your hands when opening and closing the 3.6
front covers, side covers, or maintenance doors.
28 Do not insert fingers or other body parts into the gap between -
the machine side cover and base.
29 Be careful of metal edge sections when exchanging part reels. -
Body parts may be cut by edge sections.

32
33
ＰＫ
31
30
01MEC-1554-b
CAUTION Related
sections
30 When working in front of the base, ensure that clothing or arms -
are not caught on the guide pins on the top of the base.
31 When there is no module on the base, do not block the module -

position confirmation sensor or module seating confirmation
sensor that activate the air cylinder.
• The air cylinder may activate and move the lever or clamper,
resulting in injury.
32 Do not put your hands underneath the nozzle station when 4.10
loading it in the machine. 7.7
33 Place the waste tape processing unit upside down on the work -
bench.
• The duct may deform under the weight of the unit if it is not
placed upside down.

34 35
34 35
01MEC-1858-a
CAUTION Related
sections
34 When working close to a linear motor (within 55 mm) do not 4.9
use ordinary metal tools. Use only non-magentic tools. 4.11
• The magnetic force can pull metal objects and result in injury
(by trapping fingers or other body parts).
35 Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches, and other precision

machines away from linear motors (do not bring within 55 mm).
• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field

generated by a linear motor.

1.3.2 NXT-3c
01MEC-1750
WARNING Related
sections
1 When pushing a module onto the base, check that no one is 4.8
behind the module. 4.11
6.11
• A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if 6.12
caught between the base and module. 6.13
6.16
2 When pushing in a module, do not insert hands between the
7.2
seamless cover support and module.
7.6
• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in serious 7.7
injury.
3 Do not insert hands or other body parts between the lower front
section of the module and base or into the opening of the waste
tape box when pulling out a module.

injury.
4 When working on a module in an opening with the cover off,

ensure that no one pushes in or pulls out the module.

injury.

6
01MEC-1751
WARNING Related
sections
5 When changing the conveyor width with the module pulled -
forward, do not insert hands into the area near the conveyor.
• Body parts may get pinched or caught in the movable conveyor

rail, resulting in serious injury.
6 There is a limit to the number of modules that can be pulled out -

safely at the same time. (Maximum: Two M3 type modules on a
4M type base.)
• If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall over

to the front, possibly resulting in serious injury. This is
especially true when the front leveling bolts have not been
adjusted.

9
01MEC-1752
WARNING Related
sections
7 Do not insert hands or other body parts into the machine in the -
spaces between feeders, especially when there are only a few
feeders present on the feeder pallet.
• Failure to do so could result in injury due to contact with the

head.
8 When pulling out or pushing in a module, do not insert hands or 4.8, 4.11
other body parts in between modules. 6.11, 6.12
6.13, 6.16
• If caught between modules, fingers or other body parts could 7.2, 7.6
be cut or severed. 7.7
9 When working on a base in the opening above the waste tape -

box, ensure that no one pulls out a module.

injury.

10
11
12
01MEC-1753
WARNING Related
sections
10 When working on a base in an opening with the cover off, ensure -
that no one pushes in or pulls out the module.

injury.
11 Do not release the module stopper mechanism on the base or -

remove the module without mounting an MCU-2c first.
• The module could fall from the base, resulting in serious injury
or death.
12 Stay off of the base. -

13
SAFE
FREE LOCK 14
15
16
01MEC-1756
WARNING Related
sections
13 When mounting an MCU-2c, ensure that no one is between the -
MCU-2c and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if

caught between the MCU-2c and base.
14 Do not rotate the module lock knob to [UNLOCK] when a module -

is loaded on the MCU-2c.
• If the module moves on the MCU-2c, it could pinch and sever

body parts, and if it falls from the MCU-2c it could result in
serious injury or death.
15 When handling the MCU-2c, watch out for corners and -

protrusions.
16 Always be ready to apply the caster brake when handling the -

MCU-2c.
• Always use the caster brake when stopping an MCU-2c loaded

with a module.

17 18 19
01MEC-1552
WARNING Related
sections
17 Do not touch linear motors immediately after production is 4.9
stopped. 4.11
• Contact with the shaft or coil section could cause burns. The
shaft and coil section of linear motors remain very hot even
after production is stopped.
18 People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the Y-axis

linear motor in modules (do not come within 400 mm).
• A strong magnetic field is generated by the Y-axis linear motor

in modules. Exercise extreme caution, because pacemakers
may malfunction due to the magnetic field.
19 Do not disassemble linear motors. -
• Never disassemble the linear motor coil and shaft parts. Injury
and/or machine damage may occur by magnetic parts
shooting out due to the strong force of the magnets.

21 22
20
23 24 25 01MEC-1775
WARNING Related
sections
20 Do not look directly into the vision processing light or the panel -
conveyance check sensor light. Wear tinted protective glasses.
• Eye damage may be caused by looking directly into the light.
21 When lifting a backup plate, be careful not to put your hands in 4.9
the areas between the plate, width-changing ball screw, and
hexagonal shaft. Also, be careful not to cut your hands on the
corners of the conveyor rails.
22 Do not lift a backup plate if you are not strong enough, and 4.9
maintain correct lifting posture if you do lift a backup plate.
• Because the backup plates are very heavy, lifting them

incorrectly could result in back or other injuries.
23 Do not insert hands or other body parts into the duct of the waste -
tape processing unit.
• There is a very sharp cutter blade inside the unit. Exercise

extreme caution, especially when carrying the unit.
24 Use two or more people to carry the waste tape processing unit. -
• Maintenance of the waste tape processing unit is usually

accompanied by removing the unit from the machine. Use two
or more people to carry the unit because it is very heavy.
25 Ensure that the work bench where the waste tape processing -
unit is placed is flat.
• The unit may fall to the ground if the work bench is tilted,
resulting in personal injury and/or machine damage.

WARNING Related
sections
26 When using remote operation for machines in MEdit or -
Management Monitor, machines may start to move even though
there are no people around them.
Do not insert hands or other body parts into machines that are in
a state in which it is possible to start operation.
• The machine may start to operate by remote operation and

hands or other body parts may get caught, resulting in serious
injury. When working inside a machine, be sure to push one of
the EMERGENCY STOP buttons.

27
29
28
30 01MEC-1755-b
CAUTION Related
sections
27 Be careful not to pinch your hands when opening and closing the 3.6
front covers, side covers, or maintenance doors.
• Body parts may be cut by edge sections.
30 Be careful not to hit your foot or any other body parts against the 3.1
feeder pallet or waste tape box when they are protruding from 3.6
the module and base. 3.8
3.9

31
32
01MEC-1754-b
CAUTION Related
sections
31 When there is no module on the base, do not block the module -
position confirmation sensor or module seating confirmation
sensor that activate the air cylinder.
• The air cylinder may activate and move the lever or clamper,
resulting in injury.
32 Do not put your hands underneath the nozzle station when 4.10
loading it in the machine. 7.7

33 34
01MEC-1810-b
CAUTION Related
sections
33 When working close to a linear motor (within 55 mm) do not use 4.9
ordinary metal tools. Use only non-magentic tools. 4.11
• The magnetic force can pull metal objects and result in injury
(by trapping fingers or other body parts).
34 Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches, and other precision

machines away from linear motors (do not bring within 55 mm).
• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field

generated by a linear motor.

1.3.3 Tray Unit-LT/LTC
3 1
6
2
5 01MEC-01558-a
WARNING Related
sections
1 When pushing a tray unit-LT/LTC into the machine, ensure that -
no one is between the tray unit-LT/LTC and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or crushed to death if

caught between the tray unit-LT/LTC and machine.
2 Lock the caster brake whenever the tray unit-LT/LTC is removed -

from the machine.
• Depending on the slope and condition of the floor, the tray unit-
LT/LTC could roll unexpectedly, possibly resulting in injury.
3 Securely grip the magazine rack when lifting, carrying, or 4.6

positioning it. 4.7
• The magazine rack is heavy and injury could result if dropped.

CAUTION Related
sections
4 Be careful not to pinch body parts when opening or closing the 4.6
tray unit-LT doors or covers. Do not leave the doors or covers 4.7
open while the tray unit-LT/LTC is unattended. 5.5
5.6
• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in injury.
5 When using the handle that adjusts the height of the tray unit-LT/ -
LTC, make sure that body parts are not caught between the
handle and cover.
6 Do not insert body parts through the bottom of the tray unit-LT/ -
LTC into the inner section where mechanical parts are located.

1.3.4 Tray Unit-M
01MEC-01559-a
WARNING Related
sections
1 Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between the -
tray unit-M and the feeder pallet when attaching or removing the
tray unit-M.
2 Use two or more people to lift, carry, or position the tray unit-M. -
• The tray unit-M is extremely heavy and injury could result if

dropped.
3 Do not insert hands or other body parts in the side spaces -

between the machine and the tray unit-M during automatic
operation.
CAUTION Related
sections
4 Be careful not to pinch body parts in the tray unit-M door when 4.8
opening and closing it. Do not leave the door open while the tray 5.7
unit-M is unattended.
• Body parts may be pinched or caught, resulting in injury.

1.4 Safety labels

To warn the operator of hazards, safety labels are attached to the machine at the positions indicated in the
figure below.
Familiarize yourself with each label and its message before operating the machine.
1.4.1 M3 type module
M3-3, M3-3S
*1
01SYS-0634

M3-3c
*1
01MEC-1761

M6-3, M6-3L
*1
*1
01SYS-0633
*1
M6-3L 01MEC-1856

M6-3c
*1
*1
01MEC-1760

1.4.3 4M type base
4M-3
*1
㹐㸿㹒㹇㹌㹅㹑ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹋㸿㹁㹆㹇㹌㹃㹄㹳㹨㹧㹑㹡㹟㹪㹟㹠㹪㹣㹎㹪㹟㹡㹣㹫㹣㹬㹲㹎㹪㹟㹲㹤㹭㹰㹫㹒㹗㹎㹃㹌㹖㹒Ϫ
㹑㹓㹎㹎㹊㹗ࠉ㹔㹍㹊㹒㸿㹅㹃㸿㹁㸰㸮㸮㹔㸫㸰㸱㸮㹔㹄㹐㹃㹏㸬㸳㸮㸭㸴㸮㹆㹸
㹄㹓㹊㹊ࠉ㹊㹍㸿㹂ࠉ㸿㹋㹎㸬㸱㸮㸿㹎㹆㸿㹑㹃㸱
㹑㹆㹍㹐㹒㸫㹁㹇㹐㹁㹓㹇㹒㸳㹩㸿㹃㹌㹁㹊㹍㹑㹓㹐㹃ࠉ㹐㸿㹒㹇㹌㹅㹇㹎㸰㸰
㹁㹓㹐㹐㹃㹌㹒㸫㹐㸿㹒㹇㹌㹅㹰㹫㹱㹑㹃㹐㹇㸿㹊ࠉ㹌㹭㸬 ὀ㸶
㹑㹆㹍㹐㹒㸫㹁㹇㹐㹁㹓㹇㹒㹂㸿㹒㹃 ὀ㸷
㹀㹐㹃㸿㹉㹇㹌㹅ࠉ㹁㸿㹎㸿㹁㹇㹒㹗㸯㸮㹩㸿
㹄㹓㹈㹇ࠉ㹋㸿㹁㹆㹇㹌㹃ࠉ㹋㹄㹅㸬㹁㹍㸬㸪㹊㹒㹂㸬㹒㹃㹊㸸㸩㸶㸯㸦㸳㸴㸴㸧㸶㸯㸫㸰㸯㸯㸮
㸯㸷ࠉ㹁㹦㹟㹳㹱㹳㹷㹟㹫㹟ࠉ㹗㹟㹫㹟㹫㹟㹡㹦㹧ࠉ㹁㹦㹧㹰㹷㹳㸪㸿㹧㹡㹦㹧㸪㹈㹟㹮㹟㹬㸪㸲㸵㸰㸫㸶㸴㸶㸴㹋㸿㹂㹃ࠉ㹇㹌ࠉ㹈㸿㹎㸿㹌
㹇㹌㹒㹃㹐㹌㸿㹊ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹂㹓㹁㹒㹍㹐ࠉ㸿㹋㹎㸿㹁㹇㹒㹗
㹁㹭㹬㹢㹳㹡㹲㹭㹰ࠉ㹑㹧㹸㹣㸿㹫㹮㹟㹡㹧㹲㹷
㸿㹕㹅ࠉ㹭㹰ࠉ㹋㹁㹋㸦㹫㹫ࠉ㸧
㸰
㹧㹬ࠉ㹃㹬㹡㹪㹭㹱㹳㹰㹣㸦㸿㸧
㸯㸲㸦㸰㸬㸯㸧㸰㸮
㸯㸰㸦㸱㸬㸱㸧㸰㸳
㸯㸮㸦㸳㸬㸱㸧㸲㸮
ࠉ㸶㸦㸶㸬㸲㸧㸴㸮
㸴㸮㸭㸵㸳Υࠉ㹤㹧㹣㹪㹢ࠉ㹧㹬㹱㹲㹟㹪㹪㹣㹢
㹡㹭㹮㹮㹣㹰ࠉ㹡㹭㹬㹢㹳㹡㹲㹭㹰㹱ࠉ㹟㹰㹣ࠉ㹰㹣㹯㹳㹧㹰㹣㹢
*2
01SYS-0635-a
4M-3c
*1
㹐㸿㹒㹇㹌㹅㹑ࠉ㹍㹄ࠉ㹋㸿㹁㹆㹇㹌㹃㹄㹳㹨㹧㹑㹡㹟㹪㹟㹠㹪㹣㹎㹪㹟㹡㹣㹫㹣㹬㹲㹎㹪㹟㹲㹤㹭㹰㹫㹒㹗㹎㹃㹌㹖㹒ϪF
㸰
*2
01MEC-1764

1.4.4 2M type base
2M-3
*1
㸰
*2
01SYS-0636-a
2M-3c
*1
㸰
*2
01MEC-1765

1.4.5 Other
For NXT-3
MSU Engineering panel stand
WARNING
㆙࿌
Head Cleaner
Tray unit-LT
Tray unit-LTC
*1
*1 Tray unit-M
*1
Seamless cover
Side cover
01SYS-0637E

For NXT-3c
MSU-2c Engineering panel stand

WARNING
㆙࿌
Head Cleaner
Tray unit-M Tray unit-LT Tray unit-LTC
*1
*1
*1
Seamless cover
Side cover
01MEC-1763-E

1.4.6 Machine safety label explanations
Symbol Explanation
Warning: Pinching danger
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between adjacent modules.
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection

Direct exposure to the lighting unit may result in damage to the eyes. Ensure to
use light protection eyewear when necessary.
Caution, Warning: Shock danger

*1: High voltage! Contact may cause electric shock. Turn off the power prior to
servicing.
*2: Connect a 200 - 230V AC +/-10% 50/60Hz primary power supply to the
machine.
Caution, Warning: Cutting danger

An automatic tape cutter is positioned behind this frame. Exercise extreme caution
when performing maintenance.
Warning: Do not step

Do not step or stand on this area.
Caution, Warning: Moving parts

Do not insert hands or other body parts.
Moving parts may cause injury. Turn off the power before inserting any body parts.
Warning: High Temperature

Contacting with the main body and shaft of the linear motor could result in burns.
They are high temperature.
Warning: Magnetic Field

Heart pacemakers and other precision equipment could be affected by the
magnetic field. Always keep a distance of 400 mm or more.
Warning: Disassembly prohibited

Do not disassemble the linear motor shaft. Injury may occur by parts shooting out
due to the strong force of the magnets.
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection

Wear eye protection such as protective glasses while performing this procedure.
There is a danger of foreign objects such as dust getting in your eyes.

1.5 Other safety rules
1.5.1 Safety rules related to handling the machine
CAUTION
Do not operate the machine with sensors removed or disabled.
• Removing or disabling sensors will disarm the interlock, resulting in collisions and
damage to the machine.
Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when working with circuit boards.
• Failure to do so may result in board damage.
• Ensure that the wrist strap is connected to the earth bonding point.
Do not push or pull on the mark camera unit when moving the placing head.
• The position of the mark camera may be shifted, which negatively affects the
placing accuracy of the machine.
When pulling forward or returning a module, move the module slowly and gently so it
does not strike the stopper.
• It is possible that the machine position may move if the module strikes the stopper.
Connect a 200 to 230 V AC +/-10%, 50/60 Hz power supply to the machine primary
power supply side.
• The machine may not function properly or be damaged if a power supply other than
that above is used.

1.5.2 Disposal of linear motor magnets

Extremely powerful magnets are used on the stator of the linear motor. It is extremely important to follow
the caution points below when disposing of the linear motor. If disposal is done by a third party, be sure to
instruct them that demagnetization is necessary before disposal.
• Before removing the stator, be sure to turn off the machine.
• Before removing the stator, prepare a space with no magnetic materials in which to put it.
• After removing the stator, cover it with non-magnetic material such as paper or wood to a thickness
of at least 55 mm.
• Do not disassemble the stator under any circumstances.
• Heat the stator to at least 330 degrees Celsius for at least 1 hour (demagnetization processing).
Upon cooling, the stator can be disposed of along with normal industrial waste.

1.6 The EMERGENCY STOP button

In the event of an emergency, press any of the red EMERGENCY STOP buttons located on the machine
at the positions indicated in the figure below.
1.6.1 NXT-3
01SYS-0638

1.6.2 NXT-3c
01MEC-1762

1.7 Locking System

When performing maintenance or service on the machine, all personnel who service the machine should
use locks to prevent others from turning on the machine power or air. This procedure is referred to as a
lockout.
To prevent accidents, especially those caused by mistakes when multiple operators are present, all related
personnel should have thorough knowledge of lockout procedures.
1.7.1 Lockout Procedure

Prepare 2 commercially available padlocks, and require all service personnel to carry lockout nametags.
1. Switch off the machine power.
2. Rotate the main switch on the base to the OFF position.

OFF
01SYS-0630
3. Lock the main switch with a padlock.

All personnel working on the machine should attach their lockout nametags to the padlock.
OFF
01SYS-0632
Note
The presence of a nametag on the padlock signals that the machine is being serviced and that the lock is not to be removed.
Note
When using an MCU on a module with a padlock attached, position the padlock as shown in the figure below so that it does not protrude from
the front of the base. If the padlock is protruding, it may interfere with the MCU and cause damage to the machine.

4. In the same manner, rotate the air valve handle to the OFF position and lock with the second padlock.
All personnel working on the machine should attach their nametags to the padlock.
NXTSAF005
5. The lockout is complete.

1.7.2 Unlocking Procedure

When finished servicing the machine, all personnel should remove their lockout nametags from the
padlocks.
1. Confirm that all personnel are clear of the machine.
2. Confirm that the machine is in a safe condition. Remove the padlock from the air valve and rotate the
handle to the ON position.
NXTSAF007
3. Remove the padlock from the main switch and rotate it to the ON position.
ON
01SYS-0631
4. This concludes the unlocking procedure.

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 2. Machine components and functions
2. Machine components and functions

This chapter explains the names of components on the machine, the details displayed at the operation
panel, and functions associated with the operation buttons.
2.1 Machine components

The names of some main machine items are given below.
2.1.1 NXT-3
01SYS-0652
1 Main switch
2 Base
3 Module

2. Machine components and functions SYS-NXT3C-013E0
2.1.2 NXT-3c
01SYS-0945
1 Main switch
2 Base
3 Module

2.2 Module components

The names of items on modules are given below.
2.2.1 M3-3, M3-3S modules
4 7
1 8
10
11
01SYS-0639
1 Front door
2 Handle
3 Operation panel
4 Nozzle station
5 Placing head
6 Signal lamp
7 XY-robot
8 Mark camera
9 Conveyor
10 Parts camera
11 Feeder pallet


M6-3, M6-3L
1
8
10
11
01SYS-0640
1 Front door
2 Handle
3 Operation panel
4 Nozzle station
5 Placing head
6 Signal lamp
7 XY-robot
8 Mark camera
9 Conveyor
10 Parts camera
11 Feeder pallet

2.2.3 M3-3c modules
4
7
1 8
9
10
11
01SYS-0959
1 Front door
2 Handle
3 Operation panel
4 Nozzle station
5 Placing head
6 Signal lamp
7 XY-robot
8 Mark camera
9 Conveyor
10 Parts camera
11 Feeder pallet

2.2.4 M6-3c modules
1
8
10
11
01SYS-0960
1 Front door
2 Handle
3 Operation panel
4 Nozzle station
5 Placing head
6 Signal lamp
7 XY-robot
8 Mark camera
9 Conveyor
10 Parts camera
11 Feeder pallet

2.3 Conveyor
The names of items on the conveyor are given below.
3
2
5
2
01SYS-0923
1 Reference rail (lane 1)

2 Adjustable rail (lane 1)
3 Reference rail (lane 2)
4 Adjustable rail (lane 2)
5 Backup plate
Note
The figures above show a double conveyor and single conveyor for an M3-3 module. The configuration and names of items are the same for
M6-3, M6-3L, M3-3S, M3-3c and M6-3c modules.

2.4 Operation panel

This section explains each button on the operation panel and the operation screen.
2.4.1 Operation panel buttons
6 5 4 3 2 1
01SYS-0641
1 POWER
2 READY ON
3 START
4 GROUP
5 CYCLE STOP
6 EMERGENCY

2.4.2 Operation screen

The machine automatically determines the operations required for production and uses the operation
screen to help guide the operator.
Operation screen areas

The operation screen is divided into the following areas.
C
A
01SYS-0642
A. Status display area

This area displays the module number, production status, and module status.
Pictogram Description
Perform single lane production
Perform dual lane production
Pass mode for lanes 1 and 2
Perform production in lane 1. Pass mode for lane 2.
The interval stoppage function is enabled.
The nozzle statistical warning function / simple regular nozzle changeover function is
enabled.
The board skip function is enabled.
Note
The pictograms shown are an example. Refer to the table of pictograms in the NXT III/NXT IIIc Quick Reference Basic Operation manual for
details on other pictograms.

B: Switch screen buttons / standard settings button area

Various buttons are available to switch the screen being displayed. There are also shared command
buttons.
Pictogram Description
The is the production button. Press this to change the machine to production mode.
This is the changeover information button. Press this button to display the
changeover menu.
This is the manual command button. Press this button to display the manual
commands.
This is the camera button. Press this button to display the image from the camera on
the operation panel.
Note
1. Buttons with a light blue background are currently active.
2. The pictograms shown are an example. Refer to the table of pictograms in the NXT III/NXT IIIc Quick Reference Basic Operation manual
for details on other pictograms.
C. Guidance area
Operating status, requests for operator actions, changeover notices, and maintenance guidance displays
here.
Pictograms are used for guidance. The background color of the pictograms depends on the type of
guidance.
1 2 3
01SYS-0925
1 Blue Operator work is required.

2 Gray This indicates the machine status is displayed.
3 Yellow This is warning guidance. The location for which the
warning applies is shown in the red dotted box.

E. Job display area

The name of the job(s) in the machine display here. The upper line is for lane 2 and the lower line is for lane
1. This section also indicates the number of panels produced and whether or not a panel is present.
1 2 3 4 01SYS-0924
1 Job changeover guidance

2 Presence of panel on conveyor
3 Job name
4 Number of panels produced
The presence of panels can be judged from the color.
Color Status
White No panel is present on the conveyor.
Light green A panel that is currently being produced is present on the conveyor.
Dark green A panel for which production is completed is present on the conveyor.
Operation screen guidance

Operators are guided to perform work by the following screens. The background color indicates the machine
status.
a. Production mode screen
JobNameLane2_T_00
JobNameLane1_T_00 01SYS-0643

b. Changeover information screen
c. Manual command mode screen
JobNameLane2_T_00
d. Error clearance guidance screen
01SYS-0645

2.5 Signal tower
01SYS-0646
2.5.1 The signal tower display and module condition

It is possible to determine the condition of a module by checking which of the three color lights are on, off,
and flashing on the signal tower for that module.
Action Signal Tower Display Machine Conditions

Priority
1 Machine error Error for which self recovery is not possible
2 Awaiting operator setup Part setup guidance is displayed.
Pair module START enabled.
3 Production stopped Recovery up due to a parts out
condition.Recovery up due to a vision processing
error.Remove empty trays from the removal
area.Reject parts conveyor is full.
4 Awaiting operation START enabled.
Awaiting changeover by operator.
5 Production will stop soon A parts out warning has occurred.
A part cannot be supplied.
Non-stop tray supply guidance is displayed.
6 Message for operator during production A parts out warning has occurred.
7 Throughput dropping Warning from host is displayed.
8 Preparing for production Auto calibration in progress.
Automatic changeover in progress.
9 Producing Panel conveyance & production in progress.
10 Waiting on previous/next stage Waiting on previous or next stage.
11 Manual mode Maintenance in progress in manual mode.
Performing a manual command.
PAM in progress.

2.5.2 Changing the signal tower settings

Use the Accessory Software to specify the color and buzzer settings for the different signal tower statuses.
For more details, refer to the Accessory Software online manual.
Click this to toggle the setting between ON and OFF.
Machine Status Red Yellow Bule Buzzer Enable

Machine error
Awaiting operator setup
Awaiting operation
Preparing for production
Production
Manual mode
Settings for Machine Conditions During Production (Option)
Enable
Production stopped Disable
Enable
Production will stop soon
During's Disable
Producing Enable
Throughput dropping Disable
Enable
Waiting on previous/next stage
Disable
This displays the lighting condition for the signal

tower in the various conditions.
If a condition is "disabled", the signal
Click a color area to toggle the setting
tower will not indicate that condition.
(on - flashing - off) for that color.
NXTOPE159-E

2.6 Feeder pallet buttons and LEDs

The figure below shows items on the feeder pallet display.
1
2
3 01SYS-0667
1 Slot number
2 LED
3 Feeder set button
The meaning of the colored LEDs is explained below.
LED display Slot status

Red LED on Parts are no longer being picked from the feeder at this slot due to
some problem such as parts running out, a pickup error, or a vision
processing error. The feeder at this slot can be removed even during
production
Green or yellow LED on The feeder at this slot is supplying parts. Do not remove the feeder.
Green and yellow LEDs on The feeder at this slot is specified as an alternate feeder when using
the dynamic alternate feeder function and will be used to supply parts
once the original feeder runs out of parts. Do not remove the feeder.
All three colors are lit This is a slot specified for a part push sequence when using the
function to push placed parts.
Parts are not picked up from this slot.

2.7 Pallet change unit

The supported PCU (Pallet change unit) differs depending on the machine.
a. NXT-3: PCU-2
b. NXT-3c: PCU-2c
2.7.1 PCU-2
The names of items on the PCU-2 are given below.
a. For standard feeders
1
2
3 01SYS-0668
1 Handle
2 Slide lock release lever
3 Foot pedal
4 Height adjusting lever
b. For bucket type feeders
1
2
4
3 01SYS-0669
1 Handle
3 Foot pedal

2.7.2 PCU-2c
The names of items on the PCU-2c are given below.
a. For standard feeders
1
2
4
3 01SYS-0961
1 Handle
3 Foot pedal
b. For bucket type feeders
1
2
4
3
01SYS-0962
1 Handle
3 Foot pedal


SYS-NXT3C-013E0 3. Basic operation
3. Basic operation
This chapter explains basic operations such as how to turn power on and off to the machine and how to
switch between different screens of the operation panel.
3.1 Turning ON/OFF the machine
Power OFF
Main switch ON Main switch OFF
Sleep
Press POWER button Hold down POWER button
Awake NXTOPE043
Power OFF: The power supply to the machine is cut completely.

Sleep: Power is being supplied to the control PCB, but not to the module hardware.
Power can be supplied to the module hardware quickly.
Awake: Both the hardware and software are booted up.
3.1.1 Turning on the machine
1. Turn the main switch.
ON
01SYS-0647

3. Basic operation SYS-NXT3C-013E0
2. From this point, power is supplied to the base and modules. The modules will automatically perform
an initial boot up. Once the initial boot up is completed, the modules automatically enter sleep
(standby) mode.
01SYS-0648
3.1.2 Waking modules

Modules can be easily woken up. Once woken, modules will download the last job through Fuji Flexa. Once
the job information has been downloaded, the machine can enter production mode.
1. Confirm that the STANDBY LED on the operation panel is illuminated.
01SYS-0650
2. Push the POWER button. The main screen displays when the job has finished downloading.
01SYS-0651
Note
By pushing and holding GROUP and then pushing POWER, all of the modules in the line set up in Fuji Flexa are woken.

3.1.3 Changing a module to sleep mode

When the machine is not in production mode, push and hold the POWER button for longer than four
seconds and then release. The module should then enter sleep mode.
4 seconds 01SYS-0654
Note
1. By pushing and holding GROUP and then pushing POWER, all of the modules for the base enter sleep mode.
2. Sleep mode cannot be used if there is a panel being produced still inside the module.
3.1.4 Turning off the machine power

Turn off the power before performing maintenance or when not using the machine for long periods.
1. Ensure that all modules are in the following state.
• Production or any type of processing is not being performed
• The main screen is displayed or the module is in sleep mode
Note
Do not disconnect the power to the machine while upgrading. Refer to "11.1 Upgrading machine control software" for details.
2. Turn the main switch off. Power to the machine is cut.

OFF
01SYS-0649

3.2 Using the operation panel

As well as guidance for operators, various functions and command buttons display on the operation panel.
The screen is a touch screen. Use a finger to touch it to perform operations.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the touch panel with wet hands. This may result in damage.
• Do not use pointed or sharp items to touch the touch panel.
• Do not disassemble or modify the touch panel. This may result in damage.
• Use a clean dry cloth to wipe off any grime on the touch panel. Do not use items such as alcohol
and benzene.
• If it cannot be cleaned with a clean dry cloth, apply an appropriate amount of neutral detergent to
the cloth and gently wipe off the grime. When doing this, be sure to not get any of the detergent on
any other items.
3.2.1 Pressing buttons

Pictograms with a white border are buttons which can be pressed. Press inside the white border.
01SYS-0927
The background color of buttons depends on the condition of the machine.
1 2 3 4
01SYS-0928
1 White The button is selected.

2 Gray The button can be pressed.
3 Blue The button can be pressed. This guides operators to perform work.
4 Dark gray The button cannot be pressed.

3.2.2 Scrolling lists

Lists can be scrolled when the scroll bar is displayed. Slide your finger up or down across the screen.
01SYS-0929

3.3 Displaying the manual mode screen

Press the [Manual] button on the operation panel from the main screen to display the manual mode screen.
Manual mode is used to perform actions other than production such as maintenance.
01SYS-0656
If the [Production] button is pressed while the manual mode screen is displayed, the operation panel returns
to the main screen.
Refer to "7. Using Manual Commands" for details on manual mode.
3.4 Displaying the changeover information screen

Press the [Changeover information] button on the operation panel from the main screen to display the
manual mode screen. The setup menu is used for operations such as job changeover, unit exchange, and
production preparation.
01SYS-0657
If the [Production] button is pressed while the changeover information screen is displayed, the operation
panel returns to the main screen.
Refer to "4. Preparing Production" for details on changeover.

3.5 Displaying the image monitor screen

The image monitor allows operators to check the results of vision processing and vision processing
operations with the parts camera and mark camera.
Caution
The machine operates with the trace mode ON when image monitor is displayed. When trace mode is ON, the placing cycle time will
increase by approximately 20% due to a drop in the vision processing speed.
Note
The buttons on the operation panel are disabled when the image monitor screen is displayed. When it is necessary to use the buttons on the
operation panel, change back to the production mode screen to use them.
Press the [Camera] button while the production screen is displayed to display the image monitor.
Image
01SYS-0658
Press anywhere on the screen while an image is being displayed to return to the production screen.

3.6 Opening the front door

Open the front door for a module when performing work such as attaching or removing a placing head or
nozzle station.
1. Ensure that the machine is stopped.
2. Lift up the front door.
01SYS-0659
CAUTION
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to any body parts in the machine
if the door is not completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come
back down and injure any body parts in the way.

3.7 Stopping the buzzer

The operator can determine that there is a problem at the machine when the buzzer sounds.
The buzzer sound is produced from the speaker on the operation panel. Press the screen to stop the
buzzer. You can press anywhere on the screen except for command buttons.
01SYS-0660
Note
Settings for the buzzer sound can be changed in Accessory Software. Refer to the Fuji Accessory Software Operation Manual (online manual)
for details.

3.8 Setting feeders on feeder pallets

This section explains how to set feeders on feeder pallets.
Note
Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for details on how to set part reels on feeders.
1. Place the feeder guide into the slot on the feeder pallet.
01SYS-0661
CAUTION
• Ensure that the guide at the base of the feeder is set correctly into the slot. If it is not inserted
correctly, there is the danger of the feeder colliding with the placing head.
Guide
Slot 01NST-0379-E
2. Slide the feeder forward.
01SYS-0662

3. Lift up the lever, slide the feeder forward until the connector on the end of the feeder connects with
the feeder pallet, then insert fully.
01SYS-0663
4. Lever the lower. Check that the “PWR” LED turns on.
01SYS-0664
Note
If the feeder is not set correctly, power is not supplied and the PWR LED does not turn on.

5. When using W8, W04b(c), W8b(c/f) feeders with 7 inch reel holders, ensure that the reel holders of
every second feeder are extended downwards. It does not matter whether the reel holders of odd-
numbered slots or even-numbered slots are extended downwards.
01SYS-0665
6. When the feeder is set in position, press the set button for the number of that slot and if the feeder is
the correct type with the right pitch and set properly, the set LED will turn green.
01SYS-0666
Note
The operation above is not necessary when Fujitrax Verifier is used.

3.9 Removing feeders from the feeder pallet

This section explains how to remove feeders from feeder pallets. During automatic operation, feeders in
slots for which the red LED on the front cover is lit can be removed.
01SYS-0670
Caution
Do not remove feeders from slots where green or yellow LEDs are lit. The feeder may collide with the nozzle during pickup and damage
it.
1. Lift up the lever and pull the feeder out.
01-SYS-0671
Caution
If the feeder is removed forcibly without raising the lever, the board inside the feeder may be damaged.

2. Grip the handle firmly and remove the feeder.
Caution
Be sure to firmly grip the handle to prevent the feeder from dropping.
01-SYS-0672

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 4. Preparing production
4. Preparing production
The following preparations are necessary to start production.
a. Transmit the job to be used in production to the machine.
b. Set the units and parts required for production on the machine.
c. Specify machine settings in Accessory Software.
NXT-3/NXT-3c Fuji Flexa Accessory Software
Start machine Create job Specify settings
Turn power on Job Builder Machine configuration

settings
Set units Module configuration

settings
Heads
Nozzles Transmit job
Backup pins
Director
MFU-65, tray units
Set parts
Feeders
Trays
01SYS-0673Ea
Note
To use the parts verification function, part master and part data must be registered in Fujitrax Verifier and barcode labels must be printed.
This section explains how to set units on the machine. Also refer to this section for how to perform
changeover when a job is changed.
Refer to " 9. Settings and management "or the Accessory Software Operation Manual for details on
specifying settings in Accessory Software.

4. Preparing production SYS-NXT3C-013E0
4.1 Transmitting jobs

A job contains the data required to produce the panel.
When Fuji Flexa transmits the job, the machine should be in the job waiting status.
1. Ensure that the operation panel at all modules in the line display one of the following screens.
A B C 01SYS-0674
A Waiting for START to be pushed.

B The current job does not exist in the module, however, the next job does.
C Neither the current or next job exists in the module.
2. Transmit the job using Fuji Flexa. The screen below displays during transmission. (Refer to the NXT
series Programming Manual for further details on transmission.)
Note
The following pictogram displays while transmission if being performed.
01SYS-0676
3. The job name on the modules changes when transmission is complete.
01SYS 0675
Note
The different jobs have been sent to lane 1 and lane 2 in the screen shown above.

4.2 Displaying exchange guidance for each unit

Set the units required for the job onto the machine. Perform the exchange work as directed by the guidance
on the operation panel.
01SYS-0677
4.2.1 Exchange guidance after transmitting the job

Exchange guidance displays if the units set on the machine do not match those required in the job.
Camera exchange
Device unit exchange
30SYS-0678E
When more than one unit needs to be exchanged, guidance for the next unit to exchange is displayed once
procedures for the current unit are complete.

4.2.2 Exchange guidance after calibration

Calibration starts when the START button is pushed. If production preparations have not been completed,
guidance displays on the operation panel to set units and parts.
Backup plate exchange
Nozzle exchange
Tray parts exchange (TU-LT)
Feeder parts exchange
Tray parts exchange (TU-M)
Head exchange
01SYS-0679E
Note
If production preparations are complete, the machine starts production.
When more than one unit needs to be exchanged, guidance for the next unit to exchange is displayed once
procedures for the current unit are complete.
When all changeover operations have been completed, the machine returns to the main screen.

4.2.3 Selectable exchange guidance in the changeover

information screen
The operator can select items in the changeover menu to display exchange guidance for that item.
To do this, switch from the main screen to the changeover information screen. Refer to " 3.4 Displaying the
changeover information screen "for details on changing screens.
Changing the job
Feeder batch exchange
Replacing nozzles
Replacing backup plates
Replacing feeders
Replacing the placing head
Setting trays
01SYS-0680E

Procedures how to display the menu screen

1. Use the arrow keys to select menu items. The currently selected item is displayed with a green
background.
01SYS-0681
2. Push OK on the operation panel. If changeover is required, guidance is displayed. If changeover is

not required, information showing the current status of that item is displayed.
A B 01SYS-0682
A Exchange guidance screen

B Set information screen
Note
The example screens shown above are for the nozzle replacement menu item.
If changeover work is required, following the guidance that displays.

4.3 Changing the job

In order to change the current job, another job must have already been sent to the background of the
machine. For details on sending a job to the machine, refer to the NXT series Programming Manual.
4.3.1 Job changeover guidance
Name of the background job
01SYS-0683E
• The name of the background job for lane 1 is displayed in the lower row. The name of the
background job for lane 2 is displayed in the upper row.
• Press either the [Changeover information] button or the [Production] button to cancel the
changeover.
4.3.2 Job changeover procedures
1. Press the [change jobs] button.
01SYS-0684

2. Job changeover guidance is displayed. Press the [change jobs] button.
01SYS-0685
3. The job in the background is changed to the foreground.
01SYS-0675

4.4 Feeder batch exchange

Replace feeder pallets to perform a batch feeder change. If spare feeder pallets are available, these can be
loaded with the feeders for the next job and then switched with the current feeder pallets by using the PCU-
2/PCU-2c.
For standard feeders For bucket type feeders
PCU-2
(NXT-3)
PCU-2c
(NXT-3c)
01SYS-0963-E
Note
Attach a PCU guide to the base when using a PCU-2/PCU-2c. Refer to "4. Basic Operation" in the Mechanical Reference for details.
PCU guide
01SYS-0448E

4.4.1 Feeder batch exchange guidance screen
Procedures
01SYS-0686E
4.4.2 How to perform feeder batch exchange
1. Press the [batch feeder change] button.
01SYS-0687
2. Exchange guidance is displayed at the screen. Exchange the feeder pallet by following the
instructions in the guidance.

How to adjust the PCU-2/PCU-2c

Adjust the PCU-2/PCU-2c to match the panel conveyance height.
1. Check the color of the sticker used to indicate panel conveyance height that is affixed to the front of
the base.
2. Connect the lever to the height adjustment lever. Move the height adjustment lever to the position with
the same color as the sticker.
3. Return the lever to its original position.
Lever
Blue Green Orange

895~ 910~ 925~
(mm)
Height adjusting lever 01SYS-0432E
Removing the feeder pallet

This section explains operation for an M3-3 module. The removal procedure is the same for M6-3, M6-3L,
M3-3S, M3-3c, and M6-3c modules.
1. Gently insert the front rollers on the PCU-2(c) into the grooves in the PCU guide.
Rollers PCU guide groove
01SYS-0449E

2. Gently slide the PCU-2(c) forward so the guides are inserted into the holes on the base.
01SYS-0450E
Guides
3. When the guides are inserted correctly into the base holes, the guides are automatically locked into
position.
01SYS-0451
4. Press the [Remove feeder pallet] button. The feeder pallet is unclamped.
01SYS-0688

5. Pull the feeder pallet forward and set it on the PCU-2(c).
Note
Pull the feeder pallet forward until it locks into the PCU-2(c).
01SYS-1001
6. Squeeze the lever and gently pull the PCU-2(c).
Lever
01SYS-0453E

Loading a feeder pallet

This section explains operation for an M3-3 module. The setting procedure is the same for M6-3, M6-3L,
M3-3S, M3-3c, and M6-3c modules.
1. Gently insert the front rollers on the PCU-2(c) into the grooves in the PCU guide.
Rollers PCU guide groove
01SYS-0449E
2. Gently slide the PCU-2(c) forward so the guides are inserted into the holes on the base.
01SYS-0458E
Guides
3. When the guides are inserted correctly into the base holes, the guides are automatically locked into
position.
01SYS-0454

4. Press the foot pedal and slide the feeder pallet onto the module.
Note
The feeder pallet will be clamped automatically.
Foot pedal 01SYS-0455E
5. Squeeze the lever and gently pull the PCU-2(c).
Lever
01SYS-0456E
6. Push the set button for the slots at which feeders are set.
01SYS-0666
Note
Push all buttons that are lit with a red LED.

4.5 Replacing feeders

Set the part tape on feeders in advance. Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for details on how to set
part tape on feeders.
4.5.1 Feeder replacement guidance screen

It is possible to switch the display between feeder setup guidance and a feeder allocation list in the feeder
exchange guidance screen. Switch the display between the feeder setup guidance and the feeder allocation
list by pressing the change screen button.
• Feeder setup guidance
Screen change guidance
Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
01SYS-0689E
• Feeder allocation list
Slot information
Stage number
Slot number
Pitch
Width
Device comment
01SYS-0690E
The feeder setup guidance screen displays the feeders which are required for changeover.
The feeder allocation list screen displays the slots at which feeders need to be set. If many feeders are
displayed, you can scroll down the list by pressing the screen.
Note
Follow the procedures displayed on the guidance screen to perform feeder changeover. It is also possible to perform feeder changeover during
production. Procedures for loading and unloading tape feeders are shown in this section. The same procedures can be used for stick feeders.

4.5.2 Removing and attaching feeders

When using Fujitrax Verifier, it is necessary to create a relationship between the feeder and the parts reel.
For details, refer to Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
Enable operation at the side to perform feeder exchange and then follow the procedure below.
1. The feeders that need to be replaced or checked are located in the slot positions where the LEDs are
red.
01SYS-0670
2. Remove the feeder. Refer to " 3.9 Removing feeders from the feeder pallet "for details on removing
feeders.
01-SYS-0672
3. Set the feeder with new parts into the slot. Refer to " 3.8 Setting feeders on feeder pallets "for details
on setting feeders.
01SYS-0661

4. When the feeder is set in position, press the set button for the number of that slot and if the feeder is
the correct type with the right pitch and set properly, the set LED will turn green.
01SYS-0666
Note
The operation above is not necessary when Fujitrax Verifier is used.
After the feeder has been set and the set button has been pushed, information for the feeder is displayed
at the feeder set guidance. If the set button is pushed again, information for the feeder is cleared.
Set information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
01SYS-0691E

4.5.3 Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC

On a module with a tray unit-LT, if parts for feeders and trays must be supplied at the same time, the
guidance for supplying tray parts is displayed first.
In this case, complete setting trays or change to feeder set guidance by pressing the [Set feeder] button.
01SYS-0729
If tray supply is completed for one magazine and production can be performed, a pictogram to indicate that
feeder supply should be performed first is displayed. In this case too, change to feeder set guidance by
pressing the [Set feeder] button.
01SYS-0730
Pressing the [Set tray] button while the feeder set guidance is displayed returns to the tray replenishment
guidance.
The method for setting feeders is the same as setting on feeder pallets. Correctly insert the feeders into the
feeder slots for the tray unit-LT/LTC.
Note
After setting feeders, if the tray unit-LT/LTC is removed from the module, feeders are also removed from the module at the same time because
they are attached to the tray unit-LT/LTC. Due to this, it is necessary to push the feeder set OK buttons for the feeders set on the module after
the tray unit-LT/LTC is set back into the module (when verification is not being used).

4.5.4 Operation when using the free allocation function

This section contains information about removing and inserting feeders when using the free allocation
function.
Parts out conditions that occur during production can be checked at either of the screens listed below.
Check the parts out condition at the screen which is most convenient (this will vary depending on whether
or not Kit Handy is used and the location of the computer).
a. the machine operation panel
b. Kit Handy
c. Kit Manager
Note
Check the machine operation panel if it is not necessary to perform quick verification (for example, when a feeder for which parts reel information
has been created is already prepared). Check the screen at Kit Handy or Kit Manager if it is necessary to perform quick verification while setting
the feeder.
The feeder exchange guidance displayed at the machine operation panel is the same as when the free
allocation function is not being used. Also, if a feeder is already set in the slot which is specified in the job,
then an asterisk (*) is displayed in the [Slot] column.
01SYS-0692
Note
If a feeder is not already set in the slot which is specified in the job, then a slot number is displayed. In the screen shown above, slot 9 is
displayed, but the feeder can be set in any slot.
When using Kit Handy, check the [Status] column at the part status list screen (shown below). An asterisk
(*) is displayed in the location column of the slots which require feeders to be set. When using Kit Manager,
check for an asterisk (*) at the list view.
Slot without feeder
1-1-11-0
Slot number
01SYS-0192E
Note
In the screen shown above, guidance for setting the feeder which is specified for slot 11 in the job is displayed.

Procedure for inserting and removing feeders

1. If any of the units used below are used in production, they must be set in the slot which is specified in
the job.
a. Reject parts conveyor
b. Flux unit
c. Glue check unit
2. Check the appropriate screen at either Kit Handy or Kit Manager. Select the slot(s) for which [No
Feeder] is displayed and perform quick verification. If quick verification has already been performed,
check the machine operation panel.
3. Set the new feeder into any slot. For details on setting the feeder, refer to section " 4.5.2 Removing
and attaching feeders ".
Note
If no empty slots exist, remove a feeder that is not used in production. Feeders which are not being used can be identified by checking the LED
above the feeders on the front cover of the module. The LED is not lit for slots at which feeders are not being used.
4. Ensure that the LED on the front cover of the machine is green for the feeder which was set.
5. Repeat the procedures above until all necessary feeders have been set.
Note
Due to the difference in the number of slots occupied by different feeders, there are cases when it is not possible to set all feeders depending
on the allocation. When using a job that requires several different feeder types, set the narrowest feeders (the feeders occupying the fewest
number of slots) in the lowest possible slot numbers (slot 1, 2, ....).

4.6 Setting trays on a Tray Unit-LT

Set trays parts as indicated in the guidance.
4.6.1 Tray setting guidance screens

The guidance that displays depends on whether Fujitrax Verifier is being used or not.
When using Fujitrax Verifier

Screen change buttons
Work guidance/device information
Slot
Slot
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
Select slots by pressing the up/down arrows. 1 to 12 shown here are the slot numbers.
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting trays in a slot is completed,
the red mark changes to green.
Original device Position from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate feeder Tray parts already set

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.
The slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"A-2-1" represents upper magazine, slot 2, subslot 1.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are displayed for the currently
selected slot.
The estimated remaining time (minutes) for parts to run out is displayed.
Screen change buttons Set tray parts (magazine A)

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B) 01SYS-0732E

When not using Fujitrax Verifier

Slot
Slot

selected slot.
Set feeder parts
Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B)
01SYS-0731E

4.6.2 Setting trays
Removing tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT. There are two front doors on the tray unit-LT. Open the door
for the area that you are supplying trays.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0733E
2. Check the slots to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition, the LED for
the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen is flashing.
LED 01SYS-0246
3. Use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237
CAUTION
• If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper, the tray drawer and magazine
may be damaged.
Note
With the tray drawer stopper lowered, tray drawers can be pulled out about halfway. This is designed so that the operators can check the part
condition. When supplying parts, be sure to raise the tray drawer stopper.

4. Remove the tray drawer from the slot to be resupplied.
01SYS-0719
Verifying tray parts

This work is only required when using Fujitrax Verifier.
1. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.
Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
a. At Kit Handy or Kit Manager, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID. If tray verification with
position check is being used, scan the FIDL (tray drawer) and the DID (tray).
Note
For details on verifying trays refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
2. You can specify the first part to pick up using Kit Handy. Refer to"4.6.4 Setting the pickup position" for
details.

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray(s) in the tray drawer.
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
2. Gently set the tray drawer in the appropriate slot.
01SYS-0239
Caution
When setting the tray drawer in the slot, set it gently so as to not jar the trays.
Note
If you wish to change the display to supply trays for other slots, press the button for selecting slots, change the selected slot and then set trays.
3. Specify the first part to pick up here. Refer to" 4.6.4 Setting the pickup position " for details.
4. Press the [Set tray] button with the slot to be supplied selected.
Note
Steps 3 and 4 are not required if using Fujitrax Verifier.
01SYS-0735

5. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all necessary
trays have been set.
6. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.
01SYS-0734
7. Use the knob on the drawer stopper to lower the stopper.
Knob
01SYS-0240
8. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is started.
01SYS-0241
Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LT.

4.6.3 Changing magazines

It is possible to remove the upper and lower magazines in the tray unit-LT. It is possible to reduce
changeover time by changing the previous job magazines with magazines that already have the trays set
in them during changeover on the tray unit-LT.
01SYS-0693
CAUTION
• When changing magazines, be very careful to not drop a magazine. Personal injury and machine
damage could result if a magazine is dropped.
• When handling a magazine with trays loaded in it, handle it gently so the tray parts are not
scattered.
Removing magazines
1. Push the MAGAZINE CLAMP button. There are two magazines, a top magazine and a bottom
magazine. Push the button for the magazine you want to change.
Note
The magazine clamp in the tray unit-LT is released.
MAGAZINE CLAMP button (top)
MAGAZINE CLAMP button (bottom)
01SYS-0242E

2. Open the front door to the magazine you want to change.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0733E
3. Remove the magazine from the tray unit-LT by following the sub steps below.
a. Slide the magazine stopper over.
Magazine stopper 01SYS-0243
b. Slowly pull forward the plate that the magazine is set on until it is locked into position.
Magazine
Plate
01SYS-0244E
c. Slide the magazine forward a short distance, and then remove it from the tray unit-LT.
Magazine
01SYS-0245E

Attaching magazines
1. Load the magazine that has the trays set in it in the tray unit-LT by following the sub steps below.
a. Confirm that the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons are not lit.
MAGAZINE CLAMP
button (upper)
MAGAZINE CLAMP
button (lower)
01SYS-0354E
Note
With the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons lit, even if a magazine is set, clamping will not operate correctly. Also, if magazines are set with power to
the tray unit-LT off, it is necessary to check by eye the position of the magazine side clamper.
Confirm that the side clamper

sticks out.
01SYS-0355-E
b. Set the magazine on the plate and slide it back until the magazine position is set by the positioning
pins.
Positioning pins
Magazine
Plate 01SYS-0247

c. Move the lever to unlock the plate and gently push in the magazine.
Magazine
Lever
01SYS-0248
d. Slide back the magazine stopper to lock the magazine.
Magazine stopper 01SYS-0249
2. Check all the parts that are set in the magazine to ensure that they are correct by following the sub
steps below.
a. Check the parts of slots for which the LED is flashing, and if correct press the [Set tray] button.
LED 01SYS-0246
b. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, specify it at this time. Refer to section " 4.6.4 Setting
the pickup position "for details.
c. While checking the operation panel, repeat steps a and b for all slots that require trays.

d. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when all of the trays have been checked.
01SYS-0734
3. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. When exchanging the other magazine, repeat
these procedures up to this step.
01SYS-0241
Note

4.6.4 Setting the pickup position

It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray unit-LT from Kit Handy
or the operation panel on the machine.
Specifying the pickup position on the machine

The pickup point setting screen at the machine is accessed from the tray exchange guidance screen.
1. While tray exchange guidance is displayed, press the pictogram for the first pickup point.
01SYS-0747
2. The pickup position settings screen is displayed.Change the X and Y values by scrolling.
01SYS-0737
• The default values for pickup position settings are the current pickup position.
3. Press [OK] when finished.

Specifying the pickup position from Kit Handy

Perform the following steps on a Kit Handy.
1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit-LT.
2. Specify the column (X) and row (Y) for the first pickup cavity in Kit Handy.
Note
• If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.
• The specification for the part supply direction is different depending on the direction of the tray set in the drawer even if the same tray is
used.
Direction 0 Direction 90
(X, Y) = (4, 4)
(X, Y) = (1, 4)
(X, Y) = (4, 3)
(X, Y) = (3, 1)
01SYS-0176E
3. Tap [OK].

4.6.5 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-LT
1. The tray drawer has direction. When setting trays in the drawer and loading the drawers in the Tray
unit-LT, be careful to use the correct direction.
2. The yellow lines on the drawer indicate the positions checked by the tray height sensors. Be careful
not to place any tall items such as magnets on these yellow lines.
3. Do not insert tray drawers in a tilted manner.
4. Gently open and close the doors so not to jar parts. For safety reasons, the doors are automatically
locked and cannot be opened. Do not try to open the doors when they are locked.
4.6.6 Tray height error guidance

When a tray height error occurs for a set tray, tray height error guidance is displayed at the machine.
a. Height error
01SYS-0738
b. Adjacent height error
01SYS-0739
Remove the set tray and press the [Set tray] button.

4.6.7 Important points when using parts taller than 25.4 mm
1. A dedicated tray unit-LT (1.5 inch compatible) is required. When attaching a standard tray unit-LT to
a machine, changeover guidance displays after completing calibration.
01SYS-1019
2. One tray occupies four slots in the magazine. When using dynamic alternate trays, supply trays
considering leaving four empty slots.
4slots
4slots
01SYS-1020

4.7 Setting trays on a Tray Unit-LTC

4.7.1 Tray setting guidance screens

Slot
Slot

"A-2" represents the tray in upper magazine, slot 2.
selected slot.
Set feeder parts
01SYS-0741E

Slot
Slot

selected slot.
Set feeder parts
01SYS-0740E

4.7.2 Setting trays

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTC. There are two front doors on the tray unit-LTC. Open the
door for the area that you are supplying trays.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0742E
LED 01SYS-0246
Knob
CAUTION
may be damaged.
Note

01SYS-0696

Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
Note
2. You can specify the first part to pick up using Kit Handy. Refer to" 4.6.4 Setting the pickup position "
for details.


1. Set the tray in the tray drawer.
Tray
Tray drawer 01SYS-0287E
Caution
Note
3. Specify the first part to pick up here. Refer to" 4.7.4 Setting the pickup position " for details.
Note
01SYS-0743

01SYS-0744
Knob
01SYS-0290E
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E
Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTC.

4.7.3 Changing magazines

It is possible to remove the upper and lower magazines in the tray unit-LTC. It is possible to reduce
changeover time by changing the previous job magazines with magazines that already have the trays set
in them during changeover on the tray unit-LTC.
01SYS-0745
CAUTION
• When changing magazines, be very careful to not drop a magazine. Personal injury and machine
damage could result if a magazine is dropped.
• When handling a magazine with trays loaded in it, handle it gently so the tray parts are not
scattered.
Removing magazines
1. Push the MAGAZINE CLAMP button. There are two magazines, a top magazine and a bottom
magazine. Push the button for the magazine you want to change.
Note
The magazine clamp in the tray unit-LTC is released.
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(upper level)
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(lower level) 01SYS-0299E

2. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTC. Open the door to the magazine you want to change.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0742E
3. Remove the magazine from the tray unit-LTC by following the sub steps below.
a. Turn the lever and then pull it out. Then flip forward the magazine stopper.
Lever Magazine stopper 01SYS-0300E
b. Slowly pull forward the plate that the magazine is set on until it is locked into position.
Magazine
Plate
01SYS-0301E
c. Slide the magazine forward a short distance, and then remove it from the tray unit-LTC.
Magazine
01SYS-0302E

Attaching magazines
1. Load the magazine that has the trays set in it in the tray unit-LTC by following the sub steps below.
a. Confirm that the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons are not lit.
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(upper level)
MAGAZINE
CLAMP button
(lower level) 01SYS-0299E
Note
With the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons lit, even if a magazine is set, clamping will not operate correctly. Also, if magazines are set with power to
the tray unit-LTC off, it is necessary to check by eye the position of the magazine side clamper.
Check that the side clamp

is protruding.
01SYS-0414E
b. Set the magazine on the plate. Slide it back until the magazine position is set by the positioning pins.
Positioning pins
Magazine
Plate
01SYS-0303E

c. Move the lever to unlock the plate and gently push in the magazine.
Magazine
Lever
01SYS-0304E
d. Push the magazine stopper from below so that it is vertical against the magazine. Push the lever
towards the tray unit and then turn clock-wise to lock the magazine.
Lever Magazine stopper
01SYS-0305E
2. Check all the parts that are set in the magazine to ensure that they are correct by following the sub
steps below.
a. Check the parts of slots for which the LED is flashing, and if correct press the [Set tray] button.
LED 01SYS-0246
b. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, specify it at this time. Refer to section " 4.7.4 Setting
the pickup position "for details.
c. While checking the operation panel, repeat steps a and b for all slots that require trays.

d. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when checking the trays is complete.
01SYS-0746
3. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. When exchanging the other magazine, repeat
these procedures up to this step.
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E
Note


It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray unit-LTC from Kit
Handy or the operation panel on the machine.

01SYS-0736
2. The pickup position settings screen is displayed. Change the X and Y values by scrolling.
01SYS-0748
• The default values for pickup position settings are the current pickup position.


Perform the following steps using a Kit Handy.
1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit-M.
Note
• If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.
• The specification for the part supply direction is different depending on the direction of the tray set in the drawer even if the same tray is
used.
(X, Y) = (4, 4)
(X, Y) = (1, 4)
(X, Y) = (4, 3)
(X, Y) = (3, 1)
01SYS-0176E
3. Tap [OK].

4.7.5 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-LTC
1. The tray drawer has direction. When setting trays in the drawer and loading the drawers in the Tray
unit-LTC, be careful to use the correct direction.
2. The yellow lines on the drawer indicate the positions checked by the tray height sensors. Be careful
not to place any tall items such as magnets on these yellow lines.
3. Do not insert tray drawers in a tilted manner.
4. Gently open and close the doors so not to jar parts. For safety reasons, the doors are automatically
locked and cannot be opened. Do not try to open the doors when they are locked.
4.7.6 Tray height error guidance

When a tray height error occurs for a set tray, tray height error guidance is displayed at the machine.
01SYS-0749
Remove the set tray and press the [Set tray] button.

4.8 Setting trays on a Tray Unit-M

4.8.1 Tray setting guidance screen

Slot
Slot
"A", "B" represent the set positions of the tray unit-M. (A: left, B: right)
Select slots by pressing the up/down arrows.1 to 10 shown here are the slot numbers.



"A-1" is slot 1 of the tray unit set on the left.
selected slot.
Set feeder parts

Screen change buttons Set tray parts (position A)
Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (position B)
01SYS-0751E

Slot
Slot



selected slot.
Set feeder parts

01SYS-0750E

4.8.2 Setting trays (when using Fujitrax Verifier)
Removing trays
1. Open the tray unit-M door.
Front door
NXTOPE220aE
2. Raise the tray stopper.
Tray stopper
NXTOPE221-E
3. Remove trays from slots which require resupply.
01SYS-0694


Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID.
Note

1. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed at the machine operation panel.
01SYS-0695
Caution
Gently set the tray into the tray unit to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.
Note
2. Specify the first part to pick up here. For more details, refer to " 4.8.3 Setting the pickup position ".

Note
01SYS-0752
5. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when all of the trays have been checked.
01SYS-0744
6. Lower the tray stopper.
Tray stopper
NXTOPE224-E

7. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225-E
Note
Gently close the door to prevent parts in the tray unit from becoming dislodged.


It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray unit-M from Kit Handy
or on the machine from the pickup position screen.

01SYS-0754
2. Specify the new pickup position for X (columns) and Y (rows). Change the X and Y values by scrolling.
01SYS-0755
• When this guidance is first displayed, the current pickup point is automatically specified.


Perform the fo llowing steps using a Kit Handy.
1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit-M.
Caution
If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.
3. Tap [OK].
4.8.4 Cautions when inserting trays
1. The tray has direction. When setting trays in the tray unit-M, be careful to use the correct direction.
2. Gently open and close the door so not to jar parts. If parts are jarred, they can become dislodged from
the tray cavities. For safety reasons, the door is automatically locked and cannot be opened. Do not
try to open the door when it is locked.
3. Do not use trays that have cutouts in the upper right corner.
Cutout
NXTMTU070-E

4.9 Replacing backup plates

Set the backup plate and conveyor width to match the width of the panel being produced.
4.9.1 Important point when replacing backup plates

When exchanging backup plates, wait until the linear motor shaft cools to room temperature and then attach
the protective covers to the shaft.
Linear motor
Linear scale
coil
Linear motor shaft
Protective covers 01MEC-1383E
CAUTION
• Be careful of the magnetic attraction when using tools near the linear motor. • Keep magnetic cards,
wristwatches and other precision machines away from the linear motor. They may be damaged by
the strong magnetic field.
WARNING
• Do not touch the Y-axis linear motor immediately after production is stopped. • People with a heart
pacemaker should stay clear of the Y-axis. A heart pacemaker could malfunction due to the strong
magnetic field generated by the linear motor for the Y-axis in a module.

4.9.2 Backup plate replacement guidance screen
Exchange guidance
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The type of back-up plate required for exchange is displayed.
Auto Indicates back-up plates which support automatic back-up pin allocation.
The back-up plate exchange guidance screen shown above is displayed when dual lane production
is being performed. When single lane production is being performed, only lane 1 is displayed.
Procedures
The pictograms indicate required work. Start with the work on the left. 01SYS-0756E
Note
There are times when backup plate replacement is required when changing from single to dual lane use or vice versa, or when changing the
conveyor width. Conveyor width adjustment is performed automatically by the machine based on the panel width in the next job.
Note
Guidance for removing the tray unit is displayed at modules which have a tray unit attached. Follow the guidance to remove the tray unit.
4.9.3 Removing and attaching backup plates
1. Pull the module forward.
a. Ensure that there are no obstructions in front of the module, then press the button to unclamp the
module.
b. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently pull the module
forward until the module hits the stopper.
2. Remove the current backup plates. Remove any backup pins on the backup plates before removing
them.
Note
Refer to “4. Basic Operation” of the Mechanical Reference for details regarding the removal of backup plates.
3. Attach the new backup plate used in the next job.
Note
Refer to “4. Basic Operation” of the Mechanical Reference for details regarding the installation of backup plates.

4. Set the necessary backup pins on the backup plates. If using the automatic backup pin allocation
function, then set the auto backup pins in the stocker.
Stocker
Backup pin
01SYS-0280E
5. Press the operation button for the procedure step being displayed.
6. If the head or nozzles need to be changed, then do these operations at this time.
7. Return the module.
a. Ensure that the XS-axis (on M3-3 modules) or any other items are not protruding from the module
before returning the module.
b. Grip the handle for the module and squeeze to release the module brake and gently push the module
back.
c. Stop pushing when the module cannot be pushed back more. At this point, the machine will
automatically clamp the module. If no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped,
gently pull the module forward a short distance and then push back into position.
Note
Guidance for attaching the tray unit is displayed at modules which had a tray unit removed. Follow the guidance to attach the tray unit.
8. Specify conveyor width settings in Accessory Software to match the size of the backup plate you
inserted.
4.9.4 Areas in which backup pins can be placed

The areas in which backup pins can be placed are given below.
• The areas where backup pins can be allocated are the same for both double conveyor machines
and single conveyor machines.
• Backup pins cannot be allocated in the area 2 mm from the panel edge.
• The center position of the panel moves according to the value specified for [Panel Stopping Position
Offset] in the machine configuration settings in Job Builder. Consider the set value when allocating
backup pins.
• If positions of backup pins are specified outside the range shown in the figure above, an error is
displayed during a data check.

M6 type module
M6-3, M6-3L
244.5 252.0
Unit: mm
Panel
Possible placing area Module center Panel center

for backup pins
18.0
19.0
Panel size -33

A
A
48 to 280 mmspecifications㸸291.5
15.0
㻔standard type)
48 to 165 mmspecifications㸸197.5 2.0 2.0
Panel Stopping Position Offset. 01SYS-1014-E
M3-3, M3-3S module

104.5 104.5
Unit: mm
Panel
for backup pins
18.0
19.0
Panel size -33

A
A
㻔standard type)
15.0
2.0 2.0

M3-3 Pair Module

Unit: mm Module boundary
209.0 36.5 36.5 209.0
Panel
18.0
19.0
基板サイズ-33
ᑍἲA
291.5
15.0
2.0 21.5 21.5 2.0
282.0 282.0
Panel size (Y) A Size
Possible placing area
for backup pins 50 mm or more 120 mm or less 8 mm
More than120 mm 200 mm or less 88 mm
More than 200 mm 280 mm or less 168 mm
01SYS-1016-E

M6-3c module
244.5 252.0
Unit: mm
Panel

for backup pins
18.0
21.0
Panel size -34

A
A
16.0
㻔standard type)
2.0 2.0
M3-3c module
103.5 103.5
Unit: mm
Panel
Module Panel
Possible placing area center center
for backup pins
18.0
21.0
Panel size -34

A
A
16.0
㻔standard type)
2.0 2.0

4.9.5 Cautions when allocating backup pins

When allocating backup pins to the backup plate, be sure to take into consideration the position of
premounted parts on the bottom side of the panel. Allocate backup pins so that they do not collide with
premounted parts.
01SYS-0518
4.9.6 Cautions when using the optional soft backup pins

Note the following three points when using the soft backup pins.
a. Deviations in the panel position
b. Restrictions for pre-mounted parts
c. Possible positioning range
Deviations in the panel position

If the height of a pre-mounted part on the panel is large, there are instances when the panel position can
deviate when it comes into contact with the ascending soft backup pins before the panel is clamped.
(Depending on the shape of the part and the weight of the panel, different conditions occur.)
The panel is lifted up, causing

Pre-mounted part a deviation in the position.
Clamp direction NXTBAS233-E
Change the position of the backup pin so that it does not come into contact with the pre-mounted part.
Another option is to cut off the pin that comes into contact with the pre-mounted part.
Cut pin
Block moved
NXTBAS234-E

Restrictions for pre-mounted parts

The height of a pre-mounted part on the lower surface of the panel must be less than 13 mm. When a pre-
mounted part exceeds 13 mm in height, it is longer than the soft backup pins, thus the part collides with the
base of the backup pin block and the panel cannot be clamped.
Panel
Position with the panel clamped
Pre-mounted part
13 mm or less
Block
NXTBAS235-E
Possible positioning range

There are two different sizes for the soft backup pins. By using these for different positions, it is possible to
support many sizes of panels.
W=30 mm
W=42 mm
If the panel width is less than 65 mm,

then use the 30 mm wide soft backup pins.
01SYS-0250E
Note
1. Set the soft backup pins on the backup plate ensuring that they do not protrude from the end of the plate.
2. Soft backup pins for the NXT-3c are different in shape to the pins used with the NXT-3.
3. Soft backup pins for the NXT-3 can be used at M6-3c modules. Set them on the backup plate and ensure they do not protrude from the
end of the plate.
NXT-3c NXT-3
01SYS-0964

The possible positioning range

The possible positioning range for the soft backup pins for the backup plates is provided below.
M3 type module 112.5 112.5 Possible positioning range
13
Possible positioning range = A
Rail interval range = C

Panel width (w) = B
Backup plate size
(mm)
Backup plate All sizes
size A B C
200 180 200 201
280 260 280 281
360 340 360 361
7
Plate size = 225 510 490 510 511

Panel length = 250 625 590 610 611
Possible positioning range = 252
Possible positioning
M6 type module 252.5 252.5 range
13
Possible positioning range = A
Rail interval range = C

Panel width (w) = B
Backup plate size
Plate size = 512.5

14 Panel length = 506 14
Possible positioning range = 534 01SYS-0251E

4.10 Replacing nozzles

Set the nozzles specified in the job in the nozzle station.
4.10.1 Nozzle replacement guidance screen
Exchange guidance Set Condition Nozzle List
Procedure
Exchange guidance
It is necessary to exchange to the nozzle station type displayed.
If the nozzle station does not need to be exchanged, only the type attached displays.
Set Condition
The nozzles shown in the pockets here are given as an example only.
The background color of the pocket number indicates the nozzle status.
1 Blue: Nozzle used in production
30 Black: Nozzle for production does not need to be set.

Set a jig nozzle.
1 Red: Reading the 2D code on the nozzle failed or a nozzle statistical error occurred.
Clean the nozzle or replace it with a nozzle of the same type.
Nozzle List
The set nozzle list displays the nozzle nicknames.
The colored circle is the nozzle identifier. This is printed on the surface of the nozzle flange.
The nozzle list can be checked by scrolling.
Procedure
Note
If all nozzles required for production are not set in the nozzle station, nozzle types that need to be set are displayed at the nozzle exchange
guidance screen. Follow the guidance and set the required nozzle types into the nozzle station.
Note

4.10.2 Removing and attaching nozzles
module.
01SYS-0926
2. Remove the nozzle station by pulling the level towards the front of the module and lifting the front half
of the nozzle station upwards.
Nozzle station
(2)
(1)
Lever NXTNZC002-Eb
3. Prepare the nozzle station to set in the module.
4. Slide the plate over as shown below and insert the required nozzles as shown on the guidance screen.
Plate
Nozzle
NXTNZS004-E
CAUTION
• When setting nozzles in the nozzle station, align the cutout on the nozzle with the alignment pin in
the nozzle station and make sure that the pin goes into the cutout. If they are not aligned, nozzle
exchange errors occur.
Socket
Cutout Pin NXTNZC028-Ea

5. Return the station by moving the red lever on the left side of the nozzle station towards the front of the
module and then insert the rear part of the station first and then push down on the front end of the
station.
Nozzle station
(3)
(1)
Lever
(2)
NXTNZC003-Ec
CAUTION
• Be careful to not put your hands underneath the nozzle station when loading it in the machine.
6. Return the lever back to its original position.
7. Confirm that the nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer base.
8. If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.
before returning the module. If the axis is protruding, move the axis to a safe position before returning
the module.
back.
c. When the limit of the movement is reached, release the handle and the module will be automatically
locked into position. If no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped, gently pull the
module forward a short distance and then push back into position.
Note
10. This completes the replacement work for nozzles. When storing nozzles, store them in an
environment where the humidity is 30% or less.

4.10.3 Nozzle list

Useable nozzles are listed below. Nozzles can be distinguished by a color circle on the flange surface.
Color circle
Color circle
NXTNZC022-E
H01/H02(F) heads
Nozzle size (mm) Color H01 / H02(F) nozzle (ID)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA0ASxx (L13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA68Xxx (L14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA0MZxx (L34)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA0HLxx (L15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA11Rxx (L35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA0HMxx (L16)
Dia. 2. 5 MELF Orange AA0MLxx (L36)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA084xx (L56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA0HNxx (L17)
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA085xx (L57)
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple AA0HRxx (L18)
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA072xx (L58)
Dia. 7.0 Medium purple AA080xx (L19)
Dia. 7.0 G Dark red AA073xx (L59)
Dia. 10.0 G Navy AA074xx (L60)
Dia. 15.0 G White AA075xx (L61)
Dia. 20.0 G Gray AA076xx (L62)
Jig AA05Zxx (J03)
Jig (for angle correction) AA50Sxx (J08)
Jig (for HBC glass parts) AA78Exx (J11)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA78Fxx (J12)
Note
• HBC stands for hybrid calibration.
• The presence of parts cannot be checked when using nozzles with rubber pads (such as 2.5G, 5.0G).

H04, H04S(F) heads

Nozzle size (mm) Color H04 nozzle (ID) H04S(F) nozzle (ID)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA06Wxx (T13) AA8WTxx (Y13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA06Xxx (T14) AA8TExx (Y14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange - AA9NZxx (Y84)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA06Yxx (T15) AA8WWxx (Y15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange - AA9RAxx (Y85)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA06Zxx (T16) AA8WXxx (Y16)
Dia. 2. 5 MELF Orange - 2AGKNY0014xx (Y86)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA07Fxx (T56) AA8XAxx (Y56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA07Axx (T17) AA93Wxx (Y17)
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA07Gxx (T57) AA8XBxx (Y57)
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple AA07Bxx (T18) AA93Xxx (Y18)
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA07Hxx (T58) AA8XCxx (Y58)
Dia. 7.0 Medium purple AA07Cxx (T19) AA93Yxx (Y19)
Dia. 7.0 G Dark red AA07Kxx (T59) AA8XDxx (Y59)
Dia. 10.0 Medium purple AA07Dxx (T20) AA8WYxx (Y20)
Dia. 10.0 G Navy AA07Lxx (T60) AA8XExx (Y60)
Dia. 15.0 Medium purple AA07Exx (T21) AA8WZxx (Y21)
Dia. 15.0 G White AA07Mxx (T61) AA8XFxx (Y61)
Jig AA0EXxx (J02) AA0EXxx (J02)
Jig (for angle correction) AA4ZMxx (J07) AA4ZMxx (J07)
Jig (for HBC glass parts) AA7AHxx (J17) AA8XHxx (J24)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA7AKxx (J18) AA8XGxx (J25)
Note

H08M(Q) head
Nozzle size (mm) Color H08M(Q)
nozzle (ID)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow AA8LSxx (K11)
Dia. 0.7 Blue AA8DXxx (K12)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA8LTxx (K13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA8DYxx (K14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA8MNxx (K34)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA8LWxx (K15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA8MRxx (K35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA8LXxx (K16)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange AA8MSxx (K36)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA8MExx (K56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA8LYxx (K17)
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA8MFxx (K57)
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple AA8LZxx (K18)
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA8MGxx (K58)
Dia. 7.0 Medium purple AA8MAxx (K19)
Dia. 7.0 G Dark red AA8MHxx (K59)
Dia. 10.0 Medium purple AA8MBxx (K20)
Dia. 10.0 G Navy AA8MKxx (K60)
Dia. 15.0 Medium purple AA8MCxx (K21)
Dia. 15.0 G White AA8MLxx (K61)
Dia. 20.0 Medium purple AA8MDxx (K22)
Dia. 20.0 G Gray AA8MMxx (K62)
Jig AA8KKxx (J23)
Jig (for angle correction) -
Jig (for HBC glass parts) AA9CExx (J27)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA9CFxx (J28)
Note

H08(Q)/H12HS(Q), V12 heads

Nozzle size (mm) Color H08(Q)/H12HS(Q) V12 nozzle (ID)
nozzle (ID)
Dia. 0.3 Gray AA1ATxx (S10)
Dia. 0.35 Navy 2AGKNG0049xx (S61)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow AA056xx (S11)
Dia. 0.5 Dark red 2AGKNG0041xx (S60)
Dia. 0.5 C Dark red 2AGKNG0149xx (S63)
Dia. 0.5 CS Dark red 2AGKNG0208xx (S60)
Dia. 0.7 Blue AA057xx (S12)
Dia. 0.8 White 2AGKNG0097xx (S62)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA058xx (S13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA20Axx (S14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA064xx (S34)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA20Bxx (S15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA19Gxx (S35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA20Cxx (S16)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange AA065xx (S36)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA0WTxx (S56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA20Dxx (S17)
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA18Cxx (S57)
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple AA20Exx (S18)
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA063xx (S58)
Wide range nozzle (S) 2AGKNG0216xx (H65)
Wide range nozzle (M) 2AGKNG0217xx (H66)
Wide range nozzle (L) 2AGKNG0218xx (H67)
Jig AA06Axx (J01)
Jig (for angle correction) AA4ZLxx (J06)
Jig (for HBC glass parts) -
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA7AGxx (J16)
Note

H24 (G, S, A) heads

Nozzle size (mm) Color H24 (G,S,A ) nozzles (ID)
Dia. 0.2 Crimson 2AGKNX0051xx (H28)
Dia. 0.3 Gray 2AGKNX0052xx (H29)
Dia. 0.35 Navy 2AGKNX0053xx (H30)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow 2AGKNX0054xx (H31)
Dia. 0.5 Dark red 2AGKNX0055xx (H32)
Dia. 0.7 Blue 2AGKNX0031xx (H15)
Dia. 0.8 White 2AGKNX0063xx (H33)
Dia. 1.0 Pink 2AGKNX0035xx (H16)
Dia. 1.3 Green 2AGKNX0017xx (H17)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange 2AGKNX0040xx (H22)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua 2AGKNX0037xx (H18)
Dia. 2.5 Purple 2AGKNX0039xx (H19)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple 2AGKNX0014xx (H25)
Jig 2AGKNX0004xx (J34)
2AGKNX0223xx (J67)*
Wide range nozzle (S) 2AGKNX0075xx (H35)
Wide range nozzle (M) 2AGKNX0076xx (H36)
Wide range nozzle (L) 2AGKNX0077xx (H37)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) 2AGKNX0045xx (J44)
Note
• *J67 is a jig nozzle for BP04CL cameras.

H12L head
Nozzle size (mm) Color H12L nozzles (ID)
Dia. 0.3 Gray 2AGTNT0022xx (SA1)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow 2AGTNT0025xx (SA5)
Dia. 0.7 Blue 2AGTNT0023xx (SA2)
Dia. 1.0 Pink 2AGTNT0026xx (SA8)
Dia. 1.3 Green 2AGTNT0027xx (SA9)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua 2AGTNT0028xx (SAA)
Dia. 2.5 Purple 2AGTNT0024xx (SA3)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green 2AGTNT0029xx (SAB)
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple 2AGTNT0030xx (SAC)
Jig 2AGTNT0021xx (J61)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) 2AGTNT0031xx (J63)
Note

4.10.4 Nozzle station list

The useable nozzle stations are listed below.
Identification
Identification code Identification
code code
01SYS-0377-E
Identification Applicable heads Note

code
(cavity quantity)
NC03B (3) H01/H02(F)
NC08B (8) M6-3(c)
NC8LB (8) Tray unit-L, Tray unit-LT/LTC
NCPTA (16) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC
NCFTA (6) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC, With coplanarity
NCKTA (11) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC
NCETA (5) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC, With coplanarity
NE18A (18) H04/H04S(F)
NE12A (12) Tray unit-L, Tray unit-LT/LTC
NEXTA (24) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC
NERTA (18) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC, With coplanarity
ND32C (32) H08(Q)/H12HS(Q)
ND36A (36) V12
NL30A (30) H08M(Q) M6-3(c), Tray unit-M x1

NL16A (16) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC, Tray unit-M x2
NL17A (17) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC, Tray unit-M x2
NL18A (18) M6-3(c), Tray unit-LT/LTC, With coplanarity
NA74A (74) H24 (G,S,A) M3-3S is not supported
NA74B (74) H24(G,S,A)
NQ36A (36) H12L M6-3L
NF08A (12) OF M6-3(c), Tray unit-M x1
NF07A (24) M6-3(c), Tray unit-L, Tray unit-LT/LTC
NF05A (18) M6-3(c), Tray unit-M x2

4.10.5 When Performing hybrid calibration

The following checks must be performed when performing hybrid calibration.
Checking the jig parts

When setting nozzle jigs, it is recommended to also check the jig parts set in the hybrid calibration stand. If
the jig parts or stand marks are dirty, clean them with a clean dry cloth.
Chip jig part

Glass jig part
Hybrid calibration
stand
01SYS-0273-Ea
Note
1. When using H08(Q), H12HS(Q), V12, or H24 (G,S,A) heads, do not set the glass jig part in the module (this part is not used by these heads).
2. When setting the glass jig part in the hybrid calibration stand, set the part with the printed side face down.
CAUTION
• Be careful to not lose the jig parts by dropping them in the module.
Important point when using an H02(F) head and an NC03B nozzle

station
4 jig nozzles are used for the H02(F) head.
Nozzle jigs
(J03: Autocalibration)
Nozzle jig
(J11: For glass jig part)
Nozzle station
(NC03B)
Nozzle jig
(J12: For chip jig part) 01SYS-0272E
However, it is not possible to set four nozzles in the NC03B nozzle station at the same time. First, set the
normal nozzle jigs in the station and perform autocalibration. When autocalibration is completed, then set
the hybrid calibration nozzle jigs. Measurement and compensation is performed in two stages.

4.11 Replacing the Placing Head

Set the heads required for production on the XY robots.
4.11.1 Cautions when exchanging heads

Pay attention to the following points when exchanging heads.
CAUTION
• The head or shaft can be damaged by the magnetic field generated by the linear motor in the Y-
axis. Keep the head away from the shaft of the Y-axis. Also, the head should always be in the
exchange position (away from the linear motor) when attaching or removing the head.
• Do not strike the linear scale with foreign objects or damage it in any way when exchanging heads
or performing maintenance. If the linear scale is damaged, errors will occur and production will not
be able to be performed. When this occurs, the linear scale must be replaced.
Linear scale Linear motor

coil section
Linear motor shaft

01MEC-1374E
CAUTION
• Do not exchange heads with a panel inside the machine. If a panel is still inside the machine,
remove it before exchanging heads.

4.11.2 Head replacement guidance screen
Exchange guidance
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The head type which is needed for exchange is displayed.
Picker Indicates heads which are equipped with a backup pin picker.
Part Sensor Indicates heads which are equipped with a parts presence check sensor.
Procedures
The pictograms indicate required work. Start with the work on the left.
01SYS-0698E
Note
4.11.3 Removing and attaching the placing head

Display the guidance for exchanging heads and perform the following work.
Removing the head

module.
01SYS-0926
2. Check the conveyor width when removing heads with the part side recognition function (such as V12,
H08Q and H24(G,S,A) heads).
a. If the conveyor width is wider than 230 mm, proceed to the next step.

b. If the conveyor width is 230 mm or less, move the head to the correct exchange position. Refer to "
4.11.4 Moving the head to the exchange position "for details.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the head.
a. Heads other than the V12 head
Connectors
NXTPHD002-Eb
b. V12 head
Connector 3
1
2
Connector 1 3
Connector 2
01SYS-0434E

4. Raise the lever and push to the left. Holding the handle, gently remove the head as shown in the
illustration below. Be sure to not hit anything with the head.
Lever
Placing head
NXTPHD003-Eb
Note
After removal, always ensure to set the head in the optional head maintenance stand or place the head down on its side in order to avoid
damage to the nozzles.

Attaching the head

1. Check the conveyor width when attaching heads with the part side recognition function (such as V12,
H08Q, and H24(G,S,A) heads).
a. If the conveyor width is wider than 230 mm, proceed to the next step.
b. If the conveyor width is 230 mm or less, move the XY-slider to the correct exchange position. Refer
to " 4.11.4 Moving the head to the exchange position "for details.
Caution
Do not set V12 heads on modules equipped with a sidelight camera. The V12 head may collide with the sidelight camera during
production.
2. Set the clamp part on the X-axis robot, and while holding the lever down to the left, push the head into
position and release the lever.
Lever
Placing head
NXTPHD004-Ea
3. Reconnect the connectors.
a. Heads other than the V12 head
Connectors
NXTPHD005-Eb

b. V12 head
Connector 3
3
2
Connector 1
1
Connector 2
01SYS-0435E
Caution
If the handle for the head is a strap-type, ensure that the strap is flat against the head. Interference or damage to the machine will
occur if the strap is not flat against the head when the head is attached.
Strap-type handle
01SYS-0187E
4. Prepare a nozzle station that supports the head.
5. Set the appropriate nozzle jigs in a nozzle station and set the station in the module. Refer to section
" 4.10.2 Removing and attaching nozzles "for more details.
Note
Nozzle jigs are required when the head is exchanged because it is necessary to perform autocalibration. Set the nozzle jigs at the same time
as putting on the head. Even if the same head type is put on the machine autocalibration is still required because the serial number is different.
The only time it is not necessary to set nozzle jigs is if the same head is put back on the module.
6. If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.

7. Push the module back into position.
before returning the module. If the axis is protruding, move the axis to a safe position before returning
the module.
back.
c. Stop pushing when the module cannot be pushed back more. At this point, the machine will
automatically clamp the module. If no error occurs and the module is not automatically clamped,
gently pull the module forward a short distance and then push back into position.
Note

4.11.4 Moving the head to the exchange position

When using a head with the part side recognition function (such as V12, H08Q, and H24 (G,S,A) heads)
and operating with a conveyor with a maximum width of 230 mm or less, the head may interfere with the
conveyor rail when it is being removed or attached.
In this case, follow the procedure below to move the head to the correct exchange position before removing
or attaching it.
1. Remove the nozzle station.
2. Move the XY-slider by hand so that the head is above the nozzle changer.
Caution
Do not pull the placing head or the handle on the placing head.
XY slide
01NST-0275E
Note
As a rough indicator, move the head so that the mark camera edge aligns with the conveyor rail edge.
Mark camera
Conveyor rail
01NST-0414E

3. Place an item such as a cushion or air mat on top of the nozzle changer.
Cushion
01NST-0415E
Note
Cushions or air mats are not supplied with the machine. When removing or attaching the head, prepare a suitably sized cushion so that the
head, when tilted during removal or attachment process, does not hit the nozzle changer. Remove the cushion after the head has been removed
or attached.

4.11.5 Before setting an H02F head

A plate must be exchanged as shown below depending on the machine type on which the H02F head is to
be set.
No backup pin picker With backup pin picker
AIMEX-3
AIMEX-3c
NXT-3
NXT-3c 5 5
0.19 Nm 0.19 Nm
1 2
AIMEX
AIMEX-2
AIMEX-2S
NXT-2 5 5
NXT-2c 0.19 Nm 0.19 Nm
3 4
01SYS-0942-Ea
No. Part name (drawing number) Notes

1 Plate (2MGTHH0004xx) For NXT-3, NXT-3c, AIMEX-3,
2 Plate (2MGTHH0010xx) AIMEX-3c
3 Plate (2MGTHH0017xx) For AIMEX, AIMEX-2, AIMEX-2S,

4 Plate (2MGTHH0022xx) NXT-2, NXT-2c
5 Screw (2MGTHH0021xx) 4
Check the plate before setting the H02F head. If it is not a plate for the NXT-3/NXT-3c, exchange it.
1. Remove the screws and remove the plate.
Caution
Store the removed plate in a safe place. The plate will be needed when setting the head on an NXT-2(c).
2. Attach the NXT-3/NXT-3c plate and secure with the screws.

3. Lower the 2 Z axes and confirm that the attached plate does not interfere with their movement.
0.69 Nm
01SYS-0943
a. Remove the cover.
b. While holding the ball nuts for the Z-axes ball screws, squeeze both sides of the Z-axes brake using
your fingers to release the brake and gently move the axes to their lowest positions (fully extended).
c. Confirm that the plate does not interfere with the movement of the Z axes.

4.12 Setting Auto-tools For DX Head

When using DX Heads, set the auto-tools for the DX Head in the module. The machine will stop with an
error if production is started without auto-tools being set.
1 2
3
30SYS-0833
1 Auto-tool R12
2 Auto-tool R4
3 Backup pin picker tool
Refer to the "DX Head Instruction Manual" for details about DX heads and auto-tools for the DX heads.

4.13 Other changeover

This section lists other types of changeover. If the units listed in this section have not been properly
prepared, changeover guidance will be displayed when the machine is turned on.
4.13.1 Device type changeover
Exchange guidance
Exchange guidance
The example shown above displays guidance.
DP45
The example shown above displays guidance
for exchanging a feeder pallet with a tray unit-LT.
TULT
The following displays the option type for the tray unit.
Type TULT
Option 1.5 inch 01SYS-0699-Ea
For details on exchanging the feeder pallet and tray unit, refer to section "4. Basic Operation" of the
Mechanical Reference.

4.13.2 Parts camera type changeover
Exchange guidance
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The type of the parts camera required for exchange is displayed.
The example above shows guidance for exchanging a standard camera with a sidelight camera.
Procedures
For details on exchanging the parts camera, refer to section "8. Replacing Parts" of the Mechanical
Reference.

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 5. Production
5. Production
This chapter explains details about production.
5.1 Starting production

After turning on the machine, push START at the main screen to begin production.When calibration is
complete, panels are loaded and production is commenced.
01SYS-0655
Note
The above screen displays when all changeover necessary for production has been performed. Refer to section " 4. Preparing production" for
details on the changeover process.
01SYS-0700

5. Production SYS-NXT3C-013E0
5.2 Stopping operation

The operation method is different for when you want to stop operation immediately or wait for a panel to
complete production and then stop the machine. Use the appropriate method for the action that you wish to
perform.
5.2.1 Cycle stop

Push CYCLE STOP to temporarily interrupt production at the next cycle.
01SYS-0701
5.2.2 Finishing and unloading the current panels (Stop after

production of one board)
1. Press the [One panel production] button during production. The machine continues operating until the
panel currently inside the machine is complete.
Note
When performing pair module production, press the [One panel production] button on the first module in order to stop the paired modules. If the
button is pressed at the second module, the machine will load the next panel and then stop.
01SYS-0758

2. Once the loaded panels have been completed, they are unloaded to the next module and the stop
command is also sent to the module. The previous module display changes while it is waiting for
production to be completed.
Module1 Module2
01SYS-0759
3. Production is continued in modules which receive a command to stop until the production of loaded
panels is complete.
Note
If the button is pressed again with the panel [One panel production] pictogram displayed, the stop command is canceled and normal production
is resumed.
5.2.3 Emergency stop

Push any of the EMERGENCY buttons to stop the machine immediately in the case of an emergency. The
machine stops immediately.
01SYS-0702

5.2.4 Using the interval stop function
1. Specify interval stop settings at the [Module Configuration] screen in Accessory Software. After the
specified number of panels are produced, the machine will automatically cycle stop after the last panel
has been unloaded from the machine.
01SYS-0760
Note
When the interval stop function is being used, a special pictogram is displayed in the status area (the left side) of the operation panel.
For details regarding the interval stop function, refer to section " 6.10 Interval stop function".

5.3 Restarting production
5.3.1 Restarting after cycle stop or after finishing and

unloading current panels
When resuming production after a CYCLE STOP, production begins from the next production sequence.
1. Push START.When production is resumed after the machine unloaded panels and stopped, the
machine loads the next panel and begins production.
01SYS-0703
5.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop
1. Ensure that the problem that resulted in the emergency stop has been resolved.
2. Release the EMERGENCY STOP button by turning in the clockwise direction.
3. Push START.
01SYS-0704

5.4 Supplying feeder parts

There are two basic options for supplying parts during production.
a. New part tape can be connected to the previous part tape for which parts are going to run out soon.
b. By exchanging feeders during production, feeders with new reels of parts can be set. (It is possible
to supply parts without stopping the machine by using alternate feeders. )
5.4.1 Splicing parts

When parts are going to run out soon, guidance to perform splicing is displayed.
Slot information
Slot No.
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
01SYS-0705E
The proper splicing tools and items need to be available before starting the splicing operation.
Tape cutter Splicing tool NXTSPL006-E
Three splicing modes are available when using Fujitrax Verifier. Each method uses a different procedure to
verify parts.
Without DID mode 1 point verification mode 2 point verification mode
When not using Fujitrax Verifier, ensure that the parts to be connected are correct and then connect the
carrier tapes together.

Verify parts (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

1. Check the parts out warning that is displayed at the operation panel of the machine, the status screen
of Kit Manager, or the part condition screen of Kit Handy.
2. Prepare a new parts reel that contains the same type of parts as the parts that are currently being
placed.
3. Start Kit Handy and click the Windows mark to display the start menu. Select [Kit Handy] to display
the logon screen.
4. Enter or select a user ID and click [OK] to display the Kit Handy menu.
5. Click [Parts Status List].
6. Enter or scan the name of the machine for which splicing will be performed and click [OK].
7. At the Kit Handy screen, select [Mode] - [Splicing].
8. When using 1 point verification or without DID mode, follow the procedure below.
a. All feeder positions that require splicing display at Kit Handy. Therefore, tap each feeder position to
be spliced.
b. Scan the DID for the new reel or the part barcode.
9. When using 2 point verification mode, follow the procedure below.
a. Scan the DID of the reel being used in production with Kit Handy. Continue by scanning the DID of
the new reel.
10. After the DID or part barcode has been scanned, splicing can be performed if no problem was found
during the splicing check. However, if an error occurs, then the new parts reel and the parts reel
currently loaded on the feeder do not match and splicing cannot be performed.
Splicing the carrier tape

1. Remove the old reel and unwind the remaining tape.
DID
Reel Holder
NXTSPL008-Eb

2. Using the splicing cutter, cut the tape at the correct position based on the tape pitch after the last part
on the tape. Ensure that the top film is facing up when cutting the tape.
New tape Existing tape
(P2) 2-pitch
(P2) 2-pitch
Feed direction
(P4) 4-pitch (P4) 4-pitch Feed direction
NXTSPL001-E
3. If not using Fujitrax, ensure that the parts are the same type.
4. Cut the new tape on the new reel at the correct position based on the tape pitch just before the first
part in the tape. Ensure that the top film is facing up when cutting the tape.
5. Ensure that the top film can be peeled back from the starting point without a problem by peeling the
film on the new tape back for about 1 mm and then sticking it back down.
New tape
1 mm NXTSPL007-E
Note
Do not peel too far back or parts may be lost.
6. Put a splicing chip in the splicing tool.
Splicing chip NXTSPL002-E

7. Place the existing and new carrier tape onto the splicing tool with the cover tape at the top.
a. Ensure that the end of the existing carrier tape is at the middle of the splicing tool and then secure it
with the holding clip so that it does not move.
b. Ensure that the start of the new carrier tape is at the middle of the splicing tool and then secure it with
the holding clip so that it does not move.
Holding clips
New tape
Existing tape
NXTSPL003-E
8. Squeeze the grips for the splicing tool quickly to set the splicing chip.
Handle
NXTSPL004-E
Note
When squeezing the grips, keep fingers and other body parts away from the splicing area to avoid injury.
9. Secure the joined carrier tape using the splicing cover tape.
01SYS-0706
Note
Be sure to use the correct size for the top film tape based on the width of the tape being spliced.

10. Gently peel the top blue section of the top film splicing tape off the spliced tape. A yellow band of tape
should remain on the spliced tape.
01SYS-0707
11. Move the holding levers on the splicing tool so the tape can be removed and gently remove the spliced
tape from the splicing tool.
12. Gently wind up any old length of tape onto the new reel and set the reel on the feeder reel holder.
NXTSPL009b
13. If using Fujitrax, tap the displayed message at Kit Handy to inform Fujitrax that splicing has been
completed.
This completes the splicing procedure.
When using the splicing jigs shown below, refer to the “Fuji Intelligent Feeder Splicing Metal Detection Unit
Instruction Manual” for details.
AA9DA01 AA94Z02 AA95A02
AA94T02
01SYS-0353

Caution regarding splicing carrier tape

Splicing is a procedure that should only be performed when the number of remaining parts in the carrier is
very small. If splicing is performed when there are still lots of parts left in the carrier tape, then the diameter
of the tape roll may exceed the diameter of the parts reel when the carrier tape is taken up.
Carrier Tape Carrier Tape
Parts reel Parts reel 01SYS-0332E
If the reel is set in the reel holder with the carrier tape in this condition then the tape may interfere with the
feeder, and the loose tape may get twisted as it is moved forwards, causing indexing problems.
Ensure that the diameter of the tape roll does not exceed the diameter of the parts reel.
Caution when using the free allocation function

When the free allocation function is being used, both the slot at which the feeder is actually set and the slot
specified in the job are displayed at the parts out warning screen in Kit Handy. Perform splicing for the
feeder displayed in the [Position] column.
Slot with parts out condition
01SYS-0188E
In the screen shown above, the feeder for which a parts out warning occurred is set at 1-1-20-0. However,
slot 1-1-11-0 is specified in the job.

5.4.2 Replacing feeders

The following screen displays when parts run out during production.
It is possible to switch the display between feeder setup guidance and a feeder allocation list in the feeder
exchange guidance screen. Switch the display between the feeder setup guidance and the feeder allocation
list by pressing the change screen button.
• Feeder setup guidance
Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
01SYS-0689E
• Feeder allocation list
Slot information
Stage number
Slot number
Pitch
Width
Device comment
01SYS-0690E
The feeder setup guidance screen displays the feeders which are required for changeover.
The feeder allocation list screen displays the slots at which feeders need to be set. If many feeders are
displayed, you can scroll down the list by pressing the screen.
Note
Follow the procedures displayed on the guidance screen to perform feeder changeover. It is also possible to perform feeder changeover during
production. Procedures for loading and unloading tape feeders are shown in this section. The same procedures can be used for stick feeders.
Procedures differ depending on whether or not Fujitrax Verifier is used. When not using Fujitrax Verifier,
check the parts out on the operation panel and then exchange the feeder.

Verify parts (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

1. Check the parts out warning that is displayed at the operation panel of the machine, the status screen
of Kit Manager, or the part condition screen of Kit Handy.
2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being placed. Set the
new parts reel in a feeder.
3. Use Kit Manager to create an ID, or use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to perform quick verification. (The
machine will check the part type once the feeder has been set on the feeder pallet.)
Note
When using AVL data, be sure to create an ID if the new parts have a different part number than the current parts.
Remove feeders
1. Verify that a parts out condition is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status screen in Kit
Manager, or the parts status screen in Kit Handy.
2. Remove the feeder which has run out of parts. Refer to " 3.9 Removing feeders from the feeder pallet"
for details on removing feeders.
01-SYS-0672

Set feeders
1. Set the feeder with new parts into the slot. Refer to " 3.8 Setting feeders on feeder pallets" for details
on setting feeders.
01SYS-0661
After the feeder has been set and the set button has been pushed, information for the feeder is displayed
in the guidance screen. If the set button is pushed again, information displayed for the feeder disappears.
01SYS-0666
Set information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
01SYS-0691E

5.4.3 Replacing feeders (Tray unit-LT/LTC)

The following feeder exchange guidance displays when parts run out during production when using feeders
set on the tray unit-LT/LTC to supply parts.
Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
The feeder slot positions on the tray unit-LT are slot 39 to 45.
The feeder slot positions on the tray unit-LTC are slot 27 to 45. 01SYS-0764E
The method for setting feeders is the same as setting on feeder pallets. Correctly insert the feeders into
the feeder slots for the tray unit-LT/LTC.

Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC

On a module with a tray unit-LT/LTC, if parts run out for feeders and trays at the same time, the guidance
for supplying tray parts is displayed first.
Complete setting trays or change to feeder set guidance by pressing the [Set feeder] button.
01SYS-0765
If trays replenishment is completed for one magazine and production can be continued, a pictogram to
indicate that feeder replenishment should be performed first is displayed.
In this case too, change to feeder set guidance by pressing the [Set feeder] button.
01SYS-0766

5.4.4 Using dynamic alternate feeders

Production can be continued by using the dynamic alternate feeder function. During production, a report is
issued by Fujitrax Verifier that a part is going to run out. The operator prepares a feeder with the same part
and places this feeder in an empty position in the module. Fujitrax Verifier checks the set feeder and
changes that feeder position into an alternate feeder for the matching part. Once the original feeder runs
out of parts, the alternate feeder is then used by the machine.
Note
In order to use the dynamic alternate feeder function, Fujitrax Verifier must be used.
Two different modes can be selected when using dynamic alternate devices. Settings for the modes are
specified in Fujitrax.
Setting Description
Look For Removable The alternate feeder can be used when a condition such as a parts out
warning occurs for the feeder currently being used in production, or
when a problem occurs during parts pick up.
Keep Alt Feeder The alternate feeder can be use regardless of the condition of the feeder
currently being used for production.
Replacing feeders
1. Verify that a parts out warning is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status screen in Kit
Manager, or the parts status screen in Kit Handy.
2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being placed. Set the
new parts reel in a feeder.
3. Use Kit Manager to create an ID, or use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to perform quick verification. (The
machine will check the parts type once the feeder has been inserted into the device pallet).
Note
Create a different ID if the new parts have a different part number than the current parts.
4. Set an alternate feeder for which verification has been performed into an empty slot on the device
pallet.
5. Check the feeder set LED for that position. If it turns green, verification was completed successfully
and the feeder status is changed into an alternate feeder.
6. Once the original feeder runs out of parts, remove that feeder and the machine starts to use the
alternate feeder. After the original feeder is removed, the LED for the alternate feeder changes to red
and the feeder must be removed (it becomes a “removeable feeder”).
Note
If multiple dynamic alternate feeders are set for the same part, the status of all of the set feeders becomes “removeable”.
From this point, procedures differ according to the mode selected for dynamic alternate devices.

When [Look For Removable] is selected
1. The guidance area changes to display the guidance for moving the alternate feeder to the original
feeder position. Remove the alternate feeder. At this point the original slot red LED will begin to blink.
01SYS-0767
Caution
When there are multiple alternate feeders, only remove one of the alternate feeders. If two or more feeders are removed, the feeder
guidance will not display correctly.
2. Set the removed alternate feeder in the original feeder position. The feeder set LED turns green if
verification is OK and production can continue.
Caution
When removing the alternate feeder (removable feeder) and setting in the slot for the original feeder, make sure to perform this within
the [Miss Prevention Timer] time limit set at the Central Server. If the action is not completed within this time limit, the feeder status
becomes "No ID" and the feeder must be verified again before it can be used.
When [Keep Alt Feeder] is selected
1. Parts pick up is performed using the alternate feeder until a new feeder is set into the original slot.
2. Once a new feeder is set into the original slot, parts pick up is continued from that feeder.

5.4.5 Feeder changeover using the automatic changeover

function
When the automatic changeover function is being used, the [Exchange feeder pallet] button displays after
job changeover if the feeder setup for the new job is different.
01SYS-0768
1. Press the [Remove feeder pallet] button.
01SYS-0769
2. Set the PCU-2(c).
01SYS-0454E
Note
Refer to sections " 4.4 Feeder batch exchange" for details on how to use PCU-2(c) units.

3. Press the button for pulling forward the device unit. The feeder pallet is unclamped.
01SYS-0770
4. Remove the feeder pallet by gently sliding the PCU-2(c) body away from the base.
01SYS-0708
5. Insert a feeder pallet that has been loaded with new feeders into the machine. The feeder pallet will
clamp automatically.
01SYS-0454E
6. Push START.

5.4.6 Exchanging feeders when using the free allocation

function
Parts out conditions that occur during production can be checked at either of the screens listed below.
Check the parts out condition at the screen which is most convenient (this will vary depending on whether
or not Kit Handy is used and the location of the computer).
• Machine operation panel
• Kit Handy
• Kit Manager
The feeder exchange guidance displayed at the machine operation panel is the same as when the free
allocation function is not being used. For details, refer to section " 5.4.2 Replacing feeders".
01SYS-0771
The screen shown above indicates that a part outs condition has occurred for the feeder set in slot 11. This
is not the feeder for slot 11 which is specified in the job.
The feeder exchange guidance which is displayed at Kit Handy and Kit Manager shows both the actual slot
at which the feeder is set and the slot which is specified in the job.
Slot with parts out condition
1-1-1-0 1-1-2-0
Slot number
01SYS-0189E
The screen shown above indicates that a parts out condition has occurred for the feeder set in slot 1. This
feeder is specified for slot 2 in the job.
Procedure
1. Remove the feeder for which the parts out condition occurred from the feeder pallet. Also, perform
quick verification for the new parts reel. For details, refer to section " 5.4.2 Replacing feeders".
2. Set the new feeder into any slot. For details on setting the feeder, refer to section " 5.4.2 Replacing
feeders".
3. Ensure that the green LED is lit on the feeder control panel.

5.5 Replenishing trays on a Tray Unit-LT

There are four main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-LT.
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Using tray verification)
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Not using tray verification)
• Supplying trays parts to the supply magazine (magazine A or magazine B)
• Supply during production using dynamic alternate trays
No matter the mode being used, supply tray parts based on the tray supply guidance displayed on the
operation panel.
5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Refer to the tray parts supply guidance screen.
Slot
Slot

selected slot.

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B) 01SYS-0732E


Front door
Front door
01SYS-0733E
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237
CAUTION
• If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper, the tray drawer and
magazine may be damaged.
Note

01SYS-0719

Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
Note
For details on tray verification, refer to “5. Verifying Tray Parts” in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
2. You can specify the first part to pick up using Kit Handy. Refer to " 4.6.4 Setting the pickup position"
for details.


Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239E
Caution
Note
01SYS-0734

Note
It is possible to enter production even though not all of the trays have been set as long as all the trays necessary for production have been set.
When this condition is fulfilled, guidance for pushing COMPLETE is displayed as shown below.
01SYS-0772
Knob
01SYS-0240
01SYS-0241
Note
7. When using tray verification with position check, the tray unit reads the FIDL of the tray drawer and
checks the part type, pickup point, and tray height. The supply guidance redisplays if some condition
occurs such as the wrong tray is set or tray parts have come out of their cavities. Correct the problem
and set the tray in the unit.

5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Refer to the parts supply guidance screen.
Slot
Slot

selected slot.
Set feeder parts
01SYS-0731E


Front door
Front door
01SYS-0733E
the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen is lit.
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237
CAUTION
may be damaged.
Note

01SYS-0719

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239E
Caution
Note

3. If it is necessary to specify the first pickup point, then specify it at this time. Refer to " 4.6.4 Setting
the pickup position" for details.
01SYS-0735
01SYS-0773
Note
01SYS-0774

Knob
01SYS-0240
01SYS-0241
Note

5.5.3 Guidance display and procedure (when supplying parts

to supply magazine)
The following are the procedures for supplying parts when using magazine B (the lower magazine) as the
supply magazine.
The procedures are the same when using magazine A (the upper magazine) as the supply magazine. For
magazine A, use the following procedures but just change the supply position to the upper section (open
the upper door).
Slot
Slot
The magazine set to be used for resupply is indicated by "S".
Slots 10 to 12 do not display.
When using a tray unit that supports 1.5 inch tall parts and parts that are taller than 25.4 mm are set,
slots from 9 to 12 are not displayed.

Slot 12 in magazine B is used for ejecting drawers.
selected slot. 01SYS-0775-Ea

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT for the lower magazine.
Front door
01SYS-0776E
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0318E
CAUTION
may be damaged.
Note

3. Remove the tray drawer from slot 12.
Tray drawer
01SYS-0319E
Set tray parts in slots

1. Check the slot to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition, the LED for
LED
01SYS-0320
2. Press the [Set tray button].
3. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2

Tray drawer
01SYS-0321E
Caution
5. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, set it here. For more details, refer to " 4.6.4 Setting
the pickup position".
01SYS-0777
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0322E

8. Close the bottom front door and then push the COMPLETE button.
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0323E
Note

5.5.4 Guidance display and procedure (for dynamic alternate

tray resupply)
The following are the procedures for supplying parts when using magazine A (the upper magazine) as the
supply magazine.
The procedures are the same when using magazine B (the lower magazine) as the supply magazine. For
magazine B, use the following procedures but just change the supply position to the lower section (open the
lower door).
Slot
Slot
The upper slot(s) in the resupply magazine are the location to which drawers with empty trays are moved.
The number of slots used for storing empty trays should be enough to hold the tray in the production
magazine that occupies the largest number of slots.

selected slot.
Set feeder parts
01SYS-0778E

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the door for the supply magazine.
Front door
Front door
01SYS-0733E
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0237
CAUTION
may be damaged.
Note
3. Remove the tray drawer from the slot(s) for empty trays.
Empty tray
Drawer
01SYS-0495E
Caution
The LED for the relevant slot should be flashing.


Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
Note
For details on tray verification, refer to section “5. Verifying Tray Parts” in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
Note
When supplying parts on a drawer in which only one subslot is being used, scan the "-NOPARTS-" barcode attached to the drawer for the
subslot without parts.
for details.


1. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.
Drawer
Subslot 1
Tray
Subslot 2 01SYS-0496E
Drawer
01SYS-0497E
Caution
Note
If you wish to change the display to supply trays for other slots, use the up and down arrow keys on the operation panel to select the slot and
then set trays.
Note
Tray drawers can be set in any empty slot except for the slot(s) used for storing empty trays. The most efficient way when using the dynamic
alternate tray function is to set the tray drawers for parts that are due to run out first in the empty slot nearest the top of the unit.
A A Removal If parts outs occur in the order A, B, C, set

Removal trays in open slots in order starting from the
B
A A uppermost slot.
C
B
C
Production Supply
magazine magazine 01SYS-0506E
3. Check the warnings for magazines to be removed given at Kit Handy or Kit Manager. If more trays
need to be set, repeat the steps performed up to this point.

Knob
01SYS-0240
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0383E
Note

Supplying tray parts in advance

When using the dynamic alternate tray function, parts for the next tray due to run out can also be supplied
when supplying parts for the current tray.
When using Kit Handy
1. Display either the [Parts Status List] or [Device Check] window.
2. Check the [Mag. Time Left] column. This displays the time remaining until the next tray parts need to
be supplied.
Note
The sort function can be used to change the order (either descending or ascending).
01SYS-0502E
3. Verify the relevant parts and then set the tray drawer in an empty slot.
4. Tap the refresh display button in Kit Handy to update the [Mag. Time Left] information.
01SYS-0503E
Note
Refer to "3. Operating Kit Handy" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for more details on using Kit Handy.
When using Kit Manager
1. Open the device window in Kit Manager.
2. Check the [Mag. Time Left] column. This displays the time remaining until the next tray parts need to
be supplied.
Note
The sort function can be used to change the order (either descending or ascending).
01SYS-0504E
3. Verify the relevant parts and then set the tray drawer in an empty slot.
Note
Refer to "2. Operating Kit Manager" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for more details on using Kit Manager.

Guidance for removing tray drawers when supplying tray parts

When using the dynamic alternate tray function, tray parts can be set in any empty slot in the supply
magazine.
However, guidance to remove tray drawers displays in the following situations. Remove the tray drawers
as prompted to by the guidance and insert them in another slot.
a. A set tray is too tall and protrudes into the slot(s) for storing empty trays.
01SYS-0779
• The machine checks the height of trays after COMPLETE is pushed. If the height of a tray set
immediately below the slot(s) used for storing empty trays is detected to be protruding into the
slot(s) used for storing empty trays, guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.
b. A tray is set in the slot(s) for storing empty trays.
01SYS-0780
• If a tray is set in the slot(s) for storing empty trays, the status does not become "Set OK", and
guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.
c. A tray is set in a slot specified to be used by another tray.
01SYS-0781
• If a tray is set in a slot specified to be used by another tray (or if not enough slots are left for a certain
tray part), the status does not become "Set OK", and guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.

5.5.5 When using the supply reservation function

Parts supply for the tray unit-LT can be performed efficiently by following the guidance displayed at the
operation panel. However, even if guidance to supply tray parts is not being displayed at the operation
panel, it is possible to efficiently supply tray parts by pushing SUPPLY PARTS. This function should be
used in cases like the one shown below.
• If it is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator wishes to perform
part supply for the alternate tray now in order to prevent a parts out condition from occurring while
he/she is gone.
1. When the machine is performing automatic operation, push SUPPLY PARTS. The SUPPLY PARTS
button will begin to flash.
SUPPLY PARTS button (upper level)
SUPPLY PARTS button (lower level) 01SYS-0403E
2. Guidance for supplying tray parts will be displayed at the machine operation panel. The magazine of
the tray unit-LT will retract so that parts supply is possible.
01SYS-0782
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. Refer to " 5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure (when
using Fujitrax Verifier)". or " 5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier)"
for how to set trays.
01SYS-0241
Note

5.6 Replenishing trays on a Tray Unit-LTC

There are four main methods for supplying parts for a tray Unit-LTC.
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Using tray verification)
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Not using tray verification)
• Supplying trays parts to the supply magazine (magazine A or magazine B).
• Supply during production using dynamic alternate trays
operation panel.

Verifier)
Refer to the tray parts supply guidance screen.
Slot
Slot

selected slot.
Set feeder parts
01SYS-0741E


Front door
Front door
01SYS-0742E
LED 01SYS-0246
Knob
01SYS-0286E
CAUTION
may be damaged.
Note

01SYS-0710

Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
Note
For details on tray verification, refer to “5. Verifying Tray Parts” in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
for details.


Tray
Caution
Note
01SYS-0783

Note
01SYS-0784
Knob
01SYS-0290E
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E
Note


Verifier)
Slot
Slot

selected slot.
Set feeder parts
01SYS-0740E


Front door
Front door
01SYS-0742E
the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen is lit.
LED 01SYS-0246
Knob
01SYS-0286E
CAUTION
may be damaged.
Note

01SYS-0710

Tray
Caution
Note

3. If it is necessary to specify the first pickup point, then specify it at this time. Refer to " 4.7.4 Setting
the pickup position" for details.
01SYS-0785
01SYS-0786
Note
01SYS-0787

Knob
01SYS-0290E
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E
Note

5.6.3 Guidance display and procedure (when supplying parts

to supply magazine)
The following are the procedures for supplying parts when using magazine B (the lower magazine) as the
supply magazine.
The procedures are the same when using magazine A (the upper magazine) as the supply magazine. For
magazine A, use the following procedures but just change the supply position to the upper section (open
the upper door).
Slot
Slot
Slots 11 and 12 are not displayed.

Slot 12 in magazine B is used for ejecting drawers.
selected slot.
01SYS-0788E

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray Unit-LTC for the lower magazine.
Front door
01SYS-0789E
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0391E
CAUTION
may be damaged.
Note

3. Remove the tray drawer from slot 12.
01SYS-0392E
Tray drawer

1. Check the slot to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition, the LED for
LED
01SYS-0320
2. Press the [Set tray button].
3. Set the tray in the tray drawer.
Tray

Caution
5. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, set it here. For more details, refer to " 4.7.4 Setting
the pickup position".
01SYS-0790
Drawer
stopper
Knob
01SYS-0394E

8. Close the bottom front door and then push the COMPLETE button.
COMPLETE
button
01SYS-0395E
Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray Unit-LTC.

5.6.4 Guidance display and procedure (for dynamic alternate

tray resupply)
This section only explains the guidance that displays.
The supply method for the tray unit-LTC is the same as for the tray unit-LT. Refer to " 5.5.4 Guidance
display and procedure (for dynamic alternate tray resupply)".
Slot
Slot
The upper slot(s) in the resupply magazine are the location to which drawers with empty trays
are moved.
The number of slots used for storing empty trays should be enough to hold the tray in the production
magazine that occupies the largest number of slots.

selected slot.
Set feeder parts
01SYS-0791E

5.6.5 When using the supply reservation function

Parts supply for the tray unit-LTC can be performed efficiently by following the guidance displayed at the
• If it is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator wishes to perform
he/she is gone.
button will begin to flash.
SUPPLY PARTS button (upper level)
SUPPLY PARTS button (lower level) 01SYS-0409E
the tray unit-LTC will retract so that parts supply is possible.
01SYS-0792
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. Refer to " 5.6.1 Guidance display and procedure (when
using Fujitrax Verifier)". or " 5.6.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier)"
for how to set trays.
COMPLETE COMPLETE
button button
01SYS-0291E
Note

5.7 Replenishing trays on a Tray Unit-M

There are two main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-M.
• Supplying tray parts to the slots at which parts have run out. (Using tray verification)
• Supplying tray parts to the slots at which parts have run out. (Not using tray verification)
operation panel.

Verifier)
Slot
Slot
Select slots by pressing the up/down arrows.1 to 10 shown here are the slot numbers.



selected slot.
Set feeder parts

01SYS-0751E

Remove trays
1. Open the tray unit door.
Front door
NXTOPE220aE
Tray stopper
NXTOPE221-E
3. Remove the empty tray from the slot to be supplied with parts.
01SYS-0709


Kit Handy
NXTOPE089
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID.
Note
For details on verifying trays refer to "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
for details.
Insert tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed at the machine operation panel.
Tray
NXTOPE222-E
Caution
Gently set the tray into the magagine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also, ensure that the tray does not contact the
stopper located in the rear of the slot. If the tray contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.

a. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the empty trays of
other parts.
Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out - NXTMTU098-E
10
b. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but replenishment is not required.
01SYS-0793
Tray stopper
NXTOPE224-E

5. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is continued.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225-E
Note


Verifier)
Slot
Slot



selected slot.
Set feeder parts

01SYS-0750E

Remove trays
1. Open the tray unit door.
Front door
NXTOPE220aE
Tray stopper
NXTOPE221-E
3. Remove the empty tray from the slot to be supplied with parts.
01SYS-0709

Insert tray parts into slots

1. Check the slot indicated in the guidance and then remove the empty tray and gently set a new tray
with the same part number back in the slot from which the empty tray was removed.
Tray
NXTOPE222-E
Caution
Gently set the tray into the magagine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also, ensure that the tray does not contact the
stopper located in the rear of the slot. If the tray contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.
2. If necessary, specify settings for tray pickup position. Refer to " 4.8.3 Setting the pickup position" for
details.
01SYS-0752

a. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the empty trays of
other parts.
Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out - NXTMTU098-E
10
b. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but replenishment is not required.
01SYS-0744
Tray stopper
NXTOPE224-E

7. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is continued.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225-E
Note

5.7.3 When parts run out for both position A and position B
When two tray unit-Ms are in a module, production is stopped when parts have run out for position A and
position B and these are waiting for replenishment parts. If this occurs, follow the procedures below.
Position A Waiting Position B Waiting

Slot Part Present/Parts out Slot Part Present/Parts out
01 X - Parts out - 01 X Present
02 Y Present 02 Y - Parts out -
03 03 NXTMTU099-E
1. Parts replenishment guidance for the first parts is shown in the operation panel. Resupply the parts
according to the displayed guidance.
Note
Replenishment is not completed just by removing the empty tray and then pushing [OK].
2. Production is resumed once parts for the first tray unit have been replenished, and a single side is still
waiting for parts to be replenished.
Position A Position B Waiting

01 X Present 01 X Present
03 03 NXTMTU100-E
Note
in the example diagram above the parts "X" were the first parts that needed to be replenished.
3. Guidance for replenishing parts for the other side is displayed in the operation panel. Resupply parts
according to the displayed guidance. Once all of the parts for the other side have been replenished,
parts replenishment for both positions is completed.
If the operator wishes to continue production with the current parts for a reason such as production for the
current job is nearly completed, then move the parts from the tray unit-M position that was not the first to
require replenishment (position B in the example) into the tray unit-M position that was first (position A in
the example).
Position A Position B Waiting

01 X Present 01 X - Parts out -
NXTMTU101-E
03 03
After setting the trays, press the [Set tray] button and then specify the first pickup point for the tray. For
details, refer to section " 4.8.3 Setting the pickup position" in this manual.

5.7.4 Using the SUPPLY button

Parts supply for the tray unit-M can be performed efficiently by following the guidance displayed at the
• It is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator wishes to perform
he/she is gone.
button will begin to blink.
SUPPLY PARTS button
01SYS-0181-E
the tray unit-M will retract so that parts supply is possible.
01SYS-0794
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. For details on setting tray parts, refer to section " 5.7.1
Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier)" or section " 5.7.2 Guidance display
and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier)" in this manual.
COMPLETE button
NXTOPE225-E

5.8 Clearing errors

The error screen displays upon the occurrence of an error.
Error guidance
Information
Procedures for
clearing the error
This screen is an example of error guidance.
Cause of the error

A pictogram representing the cause of the error or the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
In the example shown above, indicates interference with the head occurred..
This code represents the cause of the error. More detailed information about the error can be
obtained by using Accessory Software to search for this error code.
Information
Information such as the status of the I/O at the place where the error occurred and the name
of the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
01SYS-0711E
Contact a member of the maintenance staff or technical engineer and ask them to fix the error.
1. Push READY ON to proceed with production, if necessary.
01SYS-0712

5.9 Saving trace data

When an error stop occurs, it helps to troubleshoot the problem if trace data is saved.
Perform the following procedures when the main screen, waiting for a command screen, or an error screen
is displayed.
1. Push and hold CYCLE STOP for 10 seconds.
10 seconds 01SYS-1055
Note
While trace data is being saved, the following is displayed on the operation panel and operation cannot be performed.
01SYS-1056
2. When the display changes, the trace data has been saved.
3. Use the [Acquire Trace] command from Accessory Software to acquire the trace data.


SYS-NXT3C-013E0 6. Machine operations
6. Machine operations
This section explains the procedures for various machine operations.
6.1 Conveyor only (breakdown) function

It is not usually possible to continue production on modules that share a base with a module that has items
or servo motors that are not working. However, with this function it is possible to use the conveyor only on
the module with the problem and continue production.
Non-functional module (conveyor only)
Base NXTOPE115-E
Check the list below for the item that is non-functional. It is possible that this function cannot be used
depending on the non-functional item.
Can be used Cannot be used

Servo Amplifiers Servo motors CPU board Servo board
XY-robot Robot cables Vision processing board DIO
Waste tape Nozzle changer Remote I/O Serial signal (RS232C)
processing unit
Nozzle station Mark camera IEEE-1394 Operation panel
Parts camera Device unit Safety doors
Conveyor Module control boxes
Air related items
6.1.1 Preparation procedures

If one of the items in the "Can be used" list is non-functional, follow the procedures below to prepare the
machine, and then restart production.
1. Check inside the module for any panels. If any panels are present, use the manual mode panel
removal command and remove the panel.
Note
If it is not possible to use the manual mode command, then use the remote command from Accessory Software to unclamp the module and
remove the panels.
2. With the non-functional module pulled forward, turn off the main switch in order to turn off the machine.
3. If it is possible, remove the non-functional item. For example, remove the head if it is the non-
functional item.

6. Machine operations SYS-NXT3C-013E0
4. Open the job for production in Fuji Flexa and distribute the parts allotted to the module with the non-
functional item to the other modules and save the job.
Note
If the job is to be optimized, do not select the [Reallocate Feeders] option. If this option is selected, it is possible that feeders will be assigned
back to the module with the non-functioning item.
5. Turn on the main switch and wait until the modules boot and then automatically enter sleep mode.
6. In Accessory Software, select [Module Configuration] and then perform settings for the [Operation
settings] category.
• [Breakdown operation settings]: select [Conveyor only]
Note
For paired M3-3 modules, specify conveyor only settings for both modules in the pair.
7. Push POWER on the modules to wake them and then return the non-functional module.
8. Transmit the job from Fuji Flexa to the machine.
6.1.2 Conveyor only (breakdown) operation
1. On modules with the [Conveyor only] setting, it is not possible for the conveyor to perform changeover.
If the conveyor width needs to be changed, it is necessary to turn the conveyor width shafts by hand
to be the correct width.
2. When the width has been changed, the sensitivity of the conveyor sensor must be adjusted. Open
Accessory Software and use the [Conveyor sensor sensitivity adjustment] command from the remote
commands in the machine accessories section.
3. Push START and production commences.
Lane 2 width adjustment shaft
Lane 1 width adjustment shaft NXTOPE116-E

6.2 Pair module production

A single M3-3 module can be used for a panel when the panel is 250 mm or less or when the panel is less
than 305 mm and all placements and fiducials are within the middle 250 mm range of the panel. For panels
that are larger than 250 and do not match the above condition, it is possible to use pairs of M3-3 modules
to place parts on the panel.
Caution
M3-3S modules do not support paired module production.
Panel
Pair module
250.01 mm or greater
Panel
01SYS-0909E
a. Panels with a length (X-direction) of 250.01 mm or more are supported.
b. Dual lane production using lanes 1 and 2 can be performed for panels with a width (Y-direction) of
280.00 mm or less.
c. Production can be performed for different jobs at lane 1 and lane 2.
d. Production can be performed for the same job at lane 1 and lane 2.
6.2.1 Conditions for pair module production
Machine conditions
a. Both standard panel flow (from left to right) and reverse panel flow (from right to left) are supported.
b. The head types for paired modules must be the same. Collisions between nozzles and previously
placed parts are possible if production is started with different head types in paired modules.
c. Paired production is possible only when the two modules are surrounded by seamless covers and/or
the side cover. Paired production is not possible between M3-3 and M6-3 modules (only M3-3
module can be paired) or when the seamless cover is between the two modules.
Unsupported functions
a. For paired module production, the panel loading retry function cannot be used when a fiducial mark
reading error occurs. If there is an error when reading fiducial marks, an error stop occurs for the
machine.
b. Manual mode commands are not supported for paired modules. It is necessary to operate both
modules simultaneously.

6.2.2 Waking paired modules

Normally, all of the modules are woken up roughly at the same time.
01SYS-0713
However, if a job that uses pair module production has already been transmitted to the machine, then
neither paired module can be used until both paired modules are awake.
The screen shown below displays on the paired module that is awake until the other module is also awake.
01SYS-0653
Once both paired modules are awake, the main screen is displayed on both modules and production can
be started.

6.3 Blocking feeders

If a feeder needs maintenance during production when using Fujitrax Verifier, that feeder will stop being
used and guidance for exchanging the feeder displays on the operation panel. By using this function, it is
possible to reduce the number of feeder related errors.
In addition, a feeder which has not had maintenance performed cannot be used in production even if
verification of that feeder is performed.
Note
The Fujitrax option software, Advanced Feeder Maintenance, must be installed and used in order to use this function.
6.3.1 Feeder exchange guidance displayed

If a feeder exceeds any of the conditions specified in the [Conditions] tab for the Advanced Maintenance
[Options] dialog box during production, then that feeder will stop being used by the machine and guidance
for exchanging the feeder is displayed.
01SYS-0795
6.3.2 Replacing feeders

Exchange the feeder or remove the feeder, perform maintenance on it and then set it back in the module.
01-SYS-0672

6.4 Automatic changeover function

The automatic changeover function supports changeover for production of boards which use a large variety
of parts in small lots. The machine performs job changeover based on the panel which is conveyed or a pre-
specified production plan.
Job A
B B A A A
Job B Job A
B B A A A
The job changes from previous module in the direction of panel flow.
30SYS-0638E
Select one of the following three modes when operating with the automatic changeover function.
• Barcode ID mode
• Handy scanner mode
For details on using the automatic changeover function, refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual
(Chapter 4, Automatic Changeover Function).
The following options are required in order to use the automatic changeover function.
• Automatic changeover function software (license required)
• Fujitrax Verifier and Fujitrax Profiler

6.4.1 Barcode ID mode

The barcode attached to the panel is read and the machine performs job changeover to the job matching
the barcode ID before beginning production.
The following equipment is required to operate using barcode ID mode.
• Conveyor • Barcode reader

• Profiler FLP (CONTEC SB20) • Panel conveyance control box (FLP-C)
Procedure
1. Push START to start production.
2. When panels are loaded, if a new job is specified by a barcode ID, panels being produced start to be
unloaded and the job is changed automatically.
3. If a changeover operation such as exchanging the head is required, guidance for the operator is
displayed at the operation panel of the machine. Follow the displayed guidance and perform the
necessary changeover work.
6.4.2 Handy scanner mode

In this mode, a handy scanner is used to scan a barcode on a production command document in order to
change jobs and start production.
The following items are required in order to use handy scanner mode.
• Barcode reader (connected to a computer)
• Barcodes that specify the desired jobs (production command document)
Procedure
1. Push START to start production.
2. Read the barcode for the next job when production of the final panel for the current job begins.
Note
Refer to chapter 4, "4.5.5 Changeover by scanning the barcode ID" in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.
3. The panel for the current job is completed and unloaded to the next module. Automatic changeover
occurs after unloading is completed.
4. If a changeover operation such as exchanging the head is required, guidance for the operator is
displayed at the operation panel of the machine. Follow the displayed guidance and perform the
necessary changeover work.

6.4.3 Automatic changeover usage precautions

There are three automatic changeover modes: production order, barcode ID, and handy scanner. Exercise
caution regarding the following items when using the automatic changeover function.
1. The following is the recovery method if the machine power is turned off when automatic changeover
has been performed for only some of the modules.
Auto changeover completed Job previous to changeover
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
NXTOPE218-E
Unload panels from the next modules.
a. Starting from the next modules and unload the panels after rebooting.
Unload panels starting from the next modules after rebooting.
b. After unloading any panels from module M6, start unloading panels from M5.
c. After all of the panels have been unloaded from the modules, change the job using the operation
panel on the modules that have not completed changeover (M5 to M8 in the example).
2. If there is no job in the machine for the current production, then use Fuji Flexa to transmit it to the
machine.
3. Ensure that the machine configuration in the job and the actual machine configuration match and then
transmit the job.
4. When using the "barcode ID" mode, do not place a buffer conveyor between the conveyor where the
barcode reader is installed and the first module of the NXT-3.
5. Jobs cannot be transmitted to the background from Fuji Flexa when the automatic changeover
function is being used. Jobs are either automatically transmitted to the background by the automatic
changeover function, or they can be reserved by performing settings in the Next Production screen in
Production Monitor.
6. When the automatic changeover function is being used, background jobs cannot be changed if the
machine is waiting for an operation to be performed.
7. After a job has been specified to be used in automatic changeover, that job should not be edited.
When the automatic changeover function determines the next job is to be used, reading of that job
begins in the background. There is no indication at the machine or in Accessory Software that reading
of the next job is occurring.
8. If the current job is lost, it can be restored by using the following procedure:
a. Select the "OFF" option for [Automatic changeover] in the [Machine Configuration].
b. Transmit the current job from Fuji Flexa as the next job.
c. Switch to the background job at the machine using the operation panel.
d. Select the "ON" option for [Automatic changeover] in the [Machine Configuration].

9. After replacing the CPU box, the current job and next job are lost if not backed up in diagnostic mode.
The current job may also be lost if an error occurs during job changeover. In this case, perform the
procedure described above in the previous step to recover.
10. Background jobs are cleared when automatic changeover is switched from OFF to ON. If the job
currently being used in the next module is different from the job for the panel to be unloaded to that
module, a job must be sent to the background and job changeover must be performed at the next
module before unloading the panel to that module.
11. When performing automatic changeover from single module to paired module production, a job
change is not possible when the following occurs:
1) One of the modules has been changed to a paired module production job.
2) Power is turned off for that module.
3) Production is restarted at another module.
In such a case, unload all the single module production panels, and then use the recovery procedures
listed in item 8 to change to the job for paired module production.
12. When using automatic changeover, it is not possible to change to another job if no panels have been
produced for the job in the foreground. In such cases, production of all panels must be completed and
the panels unloaded before the next job can be changed.
13. Automatic changeover cannot be performed correctly for a line in which a module is in conveyor only
mode (breakdown operation). Do not use automatic changeover when a module is in conveyor only
mode (breakdown operation).
14. Automatic changeover is not supported when in idle mode.

6.5 Panel position correction function

This function is effective when using panels for which the stopping position may be unstable due to the
weight or shape of the panel.
6.5.1 Attaching felt paper plate

The underside of the felt paper is magnetic, allowing it to be mounted onto the backup plate. While attaching
the felt paper plate pay particular attention to positioning.
(X-direction)
Type A 20
*1 Backup plate
*1 Push the felt paper plate up against the side surface of the backup plate.
The applicable panel size is below.
L = 48 to 250 mm
Type B 20
*1 Backup plate
*1 Push the felt paper plate up against the side surface of the backup plate.
The applicable panel size is below.
L = 48 to 534 mm
Type C 30
Backup plate
The felt paper can be placed anywhere on the surface of the backup plate.
01SYS-0357Ea
Note
The type A low reflective plate is not used in NXT-3c.

(Y-direction)
When the Y-coordinates are at the default value (12 mm) during vision processing, the position of the felt
paper in the Y-direction is displayed below.
Lane 2 Lane 1
12.5 mm 1.0 mm
01SYS-0358E
For lane 2, attach the felt paper so that it does not obstruct the light beam of the backup pin detection sensor.
The red lamp on the receiving sensor will light up if the light beam is obstructed.
6.5.2 Regarding errors when using the panel position

correction function
Follow the procedures below when an error occurs for the panel position correction function.
Unable to acquire fiducial mark

This error occurs when the machine fails to capture an image of the panel edge or fiducial mark.
01SYS-0796
a. Press the [Remove module] button and pull the module forward.
b. Remove the panel. When correcting using the panel edge, clean the backup plate and low reflective
plates.
c. Push back the module.

Push MONITOR and check the image displayed. If the contrast between the panel and the felt paper
(background) is small, then modify the following and try again.
a. Change the contrast between the light and dark sections.
b. Narrow the scan area specified in the job.
Panel Background Panel Background
When the scan area is within the dotted

lines, the panel edge cannot be detected
because there is low contrast between
the upper and lower areas.
NXTOPE239-E
When panel stopping position correction cannot correct the

stopping position.
The module error stops and displays the error seek number 8E56 when the panel edge position exceeds +/
- 0.5 mm from the correct position after the panel stopping position function has tried to correct the position
two times. Follow the flowchart below to correct the issue.
A panel stopping position

error occurs.
Clean the conveyor belt and/or

adjust the conveyor belt tension.
Is the panel edge displayed
clearly in the image?
Yes
Specify the retry function.
No
Is some object in the background Is the bright object a backup

brightly lit? pin?
Yes
No
Is the panel edge in the Y-direction

not straight?
Yes Yes
Change the coordinates for the Change the coordinates for the
panel edge check position in the panel edge check position to a
Y-direction to a location that the location in which there are no
No panel edge in the Y-direction is backup pins located.
straight.
No
Acquire the image from the machine Clean the backup plate and ensure
and send it to your Fuji representative. that the felt paper is in the location
that is being checked. 01SYS-0175E

6.5.3 Important point
1. Do not place shiny items in the panel edge detection area.
2. Any lubricants on the surface of the backup plate will cause problems when detecting the panel edge.
3. If low reflective plates have been attached, backup pins cannot be allocated near them. Regions
where pins cannot be allocated are shown below.
Area where backup pins cannot be positioned (mm)
9 20 9
Felt paper (type A)
Area where backup pins cannot be positioned
9 20 9
Felt paper (type B)
Area where backup pins cannot be positioned 9

9
Felt paper
30
(type C)
9
9 60 9
NXTBAS228bE
4. There are limits on the height of pre-mounted parts for the area where the type B felt paper is
positioned. Refer to the following diagrams.
Pre-mounted parts height of 25.4 mm or less

20
22
Pre-mounted parts height of 18 mm or less
20 Panel (mm)
25.4
18
Felt paper (type B)
Panel length (L) + 2a

Larger than 494 mm
494 mm or less
and less than 534 mm
Up to 20 mm
Pre-mounted part height from the panel edge : 18 mm or less
on the bottom side 25.4 mm or less
Everywhere else : 25.4 mm or less
a: Panel stopping position offset amount 01SYS-0360E

6.6 Automatic backup pin function

This function uses a picker mounted in the placing head to pick up automatic backup pins from the stocker
and place them on the backup plate.
Picker NXTPHD043-E
In addition, it is recommended to use the panel position correction function with this function.
6.6.1 Using automatic backup pins
1. Set the backup pins in the stocker.
a. Pull forward the module using the manual command.
b. Set the backup pins in the stocker.
Stocker
Backup pins
01SYS-0280-E
c. Push the module back into position.
2. Push START. The machine positions the backup pins as specified in the job.
01SYS-0715

6.6.2 Errors during operation

Check the following items for how to clear errors that occur when using automatic backup pins.
When backup pins cannot be located or it is not possible to return

them.
This error occurs when events such as the ones listed below occur.
• When pickup pins are returned to the stocker by hand.
• When backup pins cannot be found during position checks.
• When the number of backup pins specified in the module configuration is changed to a number less
than the actual number of backup pins that are placed.
01SYS-0797
b. Put all of the backup pins on the backup plate back into the stocker by hand and then push back the
module.
Caution
If the error guidance is cleared with leaving the backup pins on the backup plate, interference may occur between the already placed
backup pins and the new backup pins when operation is restarted. All of the backup pins must be returned to the stocker.

When the picker remains closed

The error occurs when the picker remains closed when trying to pick a backup pin with the picker.
01SYS-0798
b. Push up by hand on the picker to open it and then push back the module.
When there are not enough backup pins

In order to check for the presence or absence of backup pins in the stocker, the marks on the automatic
backup pins in the stocker are read. The following displays when errors occur during the reading of the
backup pin marks for backup pins in the stocker.
Note
It is possible to push MONITOR to check the image used for vision processing.
01SYS-0799
b. Correctly set the backup pins in the stocker and then push back the module.

Error reading backup pins marks for backup pins on the backup
plate
In order to check for the presence or absence of backup pins on the backup plate, the marks on the
automatic backup pins on the backup plate are read. The following displays when errors occur during the
reading of the backup pin marks for backup pins on the backup plate.
01SYS-0800
Note
If a series of dashes is displayed (---), this means that the backup pin mark could not be found.
b. Ensure that there are no problems with the pin positions and there are no items on the bottom of the
pins. Return all pins back to the stocker by hand. Then push back the module.

Error reading the stocker 2D code

The following displays when errors occur during the reading of the 2D code for the stocker if the 2D code is
dirty.
Note
It is possible to push MONITOR to check the image used for vision processing.
01SYS-0801
b. Ensure that the stocker 2D code is not dirty and is not in the wrong position. Then push back the
module.
Picker raising and lowering errors

When the machine starts, the picker moves to the upper position. Also, when backup pins are grabbed, the
picker moves up and down. Errors occur if these operations do not occur properly.
01SYS-0802
b. Confirm that the sensor is operating properly.
c. After the picker moves to the upper position (or is pushed up manually), push back the module.

Picker upper limit errors

The machine monitors the upper limit of the picker in case it drops. Errors occur if for some reason a
problem is detected with the upper limit.
01SYS-0803
First, confirm the status of the [PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK] on the error screen. The next actions
depend on whether it is [ON] or [OFF].
If the X100 PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK is [ON]

b. It is possible that the sensor is temporarily off. Confirm the status of the I/O input.
• Check the position of the sensor and the dog.
• Check that the sensor board connectors are connected correctly and that no pins are disconnected.
c. Turn the machine main switch off.
d. Remove the head and check the following.
• The up and down movement of the picker is smooth.
• The picker moves up to the position where the upper limit sensor is supposed to detect it.
e. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine again and continue
production. If an error recurs, replace the head.
If the X100 PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK is [OFF]

Press the [Remove module] button, pull the module forward, then check the picker position visually. The
next actions depend on whether the picker is in the upper position or not.
- If the picker is not in the upper position
a. The picker may have dropped or fallen off for some reason. Check the following.
• The picker has not dropped or become deformed.
• The cylinder is down.
• The picker has not collided with the panel or other item.

b. After confirming that the Y100 CLAMPER DOWN is off, push the picker to confirm that it will raise.
Note
If the Y100 CLAMPER DOWN is on, acquire trace data.
c. Turn the machine main switch off.
d. Remove the head and check the following.
e. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine again and continue
- If the picker is in the upper position
a. It is necessary to check the status of the pin clamper upper limit sensor.
• Check the position of the sensor and the dog.
b. Turn the machine main switch off.
c. Remove the head and check the following.
d. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine again and continue
Clearing picker upper limit errors from Accessory Software

When picker upper limit error guidance is displayed, the error cannot be cleared by pushing READY ON
without pulling forward the module. Depending on the status of the stopped machine, pulling the module
forward may be difficult. In this case, picker upper limit errors can be cleared forcibly in Accessory Software.
Refer to " 9.6.9 Forcibly clearing errors " for details on how to clear picker upper limit errors from Accessory
Software.

1. When dual lane production is being performed and a panel exists in only one lane (either lane 1 or
lane 2), the backup pin cannot be positioned or returned at the lane without a panel. It is necessary
to remove panels from both lanes before positioning or returning backup pins.
2. When the job is changed from paired module production to single module production, backup pins
which have been positioned in areas that are accessible only during paired module production cannot
be returned to the stocker. Therefore, it is necessary to return the pins to the stocker or to change the
backup plates before changing the job. Also, backup pins are automatically returned to the stocker
when the automatic job changeover function is being used.
3. When using felt paper, do not position backup pins on the felt paper when creating the job.
4. If operation is started with a panel on the conveyor, backup pins are not positioned. Remove the panel
from inside the conveyor before starting operation.

6.7 Device statistical warnings and error stop is

supported
This displays warnings for positions that have an error rate that exceeds a specified value. In addition,
operation is stopped if the errors exceed another specified error value.
01SYS-0261E
• Specify the desired success rate. It is possible to make settings for all lines, individual lines,
machines, modules, and slots. Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual for details.
6.7.1 Device statistical warning screen

When the error rate exceeds the specified value for the statistical warning rate, a warning is displayed on
the operation panel of the module in question. Furthermore, if the error rate drops below the success
warning rate value then the warning is automatically cleared.
Example
Feeder in slot 11
Tray unit-M
Position B - slot 3
01SYS-0804E

6.7.2 Statistical error stop screen

When the error rate exceeds the specified statistical error rate, the machine cycle stops. When this occurs,
error information is displayed on the operation panel like that shown below.
Information
This displays the feeder position
and error rate. 01SYS-0805E
Note
The warning is cleared when a feeder is removed and reinserted as this is interpreted as feeder maintenance having been performed.
For the example below, check the feeder and perform actions on it to correct the issue such as maintenance
and set it back in the feeder pallet. After the error has been cleared, the machine can restart production.

6.8 Changing nozzles due to statistical warnings

When using this function and the error rate for a nozzle exceeds a specified value then that nozzle is
skipped and not used in production. The nozzle specified to be skipped is then scheduled to be changed
for a good nozzle by the machine when panels are unloading and loading, and production is continued.
Set the spare nozzles in the nozzle station. If there is no alternative nozzle, then the machine stops with an
error.
6.8.1 Screen for changing nozzles due to statistical warnings

When the setting to change nozzles due to nozzle statistical warnings is enabled, the changeover display
area changes as shown in the picture below.
Nozzle changes due to statistical warnings

enabled
(This pictogram is also used when the simple
periodic nozzle changeover function is enabled.)
01SYS-0806E
6.8.2 Exchanging nozzles

After production is started, the machine calculates the nozzle check conditions. If there is a nozzle that has
reached or passed the specified nozzle error count, then that nozzle is exchanged with a spare nozzle set
in the nozzle station.
When this occurs, the background color of the pictogram in the changeover display area changes to yellow.
This informs the operator that there are nozzles in the nozzle station that require maintenance.
Background color: yellow
01SYS-0807E

If there are any remaining spare nozzles in the nozzle station, then production is continued. When
exchanging nozzles, follow the procedures below.
Getting nozzles ready

If the required nozzles are prepared beforehand, it is possible to reduce the time the machine is stopped for
exchanging nozzles.
1. Click the nozzle icon in Floor Monitor.
2. Check the nozzles that require maintenance in the [Nozzle information list]. The background for these
nozzles will be yellow.
Yellow
Nozzle that requires maintenance
01SYS-0514E
3. Prepare spare nozzles for the indicated nozzles.
Exchanging nozzles
1. Push CYCLE STOP on the operation panel to stop the machine.
01SYS-0701

2. Use the manual mode commands to pull forward the module and replace the nozzle station. Check
the nozzles displayed on the operation panel.
Red
Nozzle that requires
maintenance.
01SYS-0808E
Note
Refer to " 7.7.2 Nozzles command " for how to remove nozzles using manual mode commands.
Note
The background for the nozzle code and nickname in the manual mode information display also change to yellow for nozzles that need
maintenance.
Background color:
Yellow
01SYS-0809E
3. Exchange the indicated nozzles.
4. Set the nozzle station back in the module and push back the module.
5. Push START on the operation panel to restart production.
6. Clean the removed nozzles.
Note
Refer to chapter 5. "Preventive Maintenance" in the Mechanical Reference Manual for information on cleaning nozzles.

When nozzles are removed, cleaned, and then put back

When nozzles that need maintenance are removed, cleaned and then put back in the station, the machine
does not know that the maintenance condition has been corrected. Perform the following to clear the
maintenance condition for all of the nozzles in the nozzle station.
1. Use the remote operation command [Complete nozzle maintenance] in Accessory Software.
01SYS-0209bE
2. Push START to restart production.
6.8.3 Clearing error stops

If there are no spare nozzles set in the nozzle station for the skipped nozzle to be exchanged with, then the
machine stops and displays an error like that shown below. Perform maintenance on the nozzles or
exchange the nozzles and then restart production.
01SYS-0810

6.9 Network error detection function

This section explains how to troubleshoot network related errors.
6.9.1 Duplicate IP address detection function

An error screen is displayed when the IP address for the NXT-3 is the same as the IP address for another
machine on the network. If the NXT-3 is currently performing production, a cycle stop will occur.
Error screen and how to clear error
The duplicate IP address of the machine

is displayed.
M/C: Displays the MAC address of this machine.

???: Displays the MAC address of the duplicate
IP address.
01SYS-0811E
a. Call a network administrator.
b. Refer to the information on the screen and change either the IP address for the NXT-3 or the IP
address at the other machine.
c. After clearing the error, turn the machine on and off using the main switch located at the front of the
base.

6.9.2 Line Monitor disconnection

An error screen displays if the machine detects a disconnection with Line Monitor. If this occurs during
operation, production can continue but correct production information cannot be acquired.
Line Monitor disconnection detected
01SYS-0812E
a. Stop the machine and call a network administrator.
b. Connect the machine to the Line Monitor server.
c. Confirm that the Line Monitor disconnection pictogram no longer displays at the operation panel.
d. Perform a [Communication check] in Accessory Software to confirm that the network is connected
properly.
Note
Refer to "6 Checking the communication status of each machine" in "5. Utilities" of the Fuji Accessory Software Operation Manual (online) for
details.

6.9.3 Multiple connections to the Fujitrax Profiler server

An error screen displays if there are multiple connections to the Fujitrax Profiler server. If the machine is
currently performing production, a cycle stop will occur.
01SYS-0813
a. Call a network (Fujitrax line configuration) administrator.
b. Check the Fujitrax line configuration settings. Stop any servers that are not necessary.
Note
If the unnecessary servers are being used for other lines, change the connections.
• If the IP address displayed on the screen is that of an unnecessary server, stop that unnecessary
server.
• If the IP address displayed on the screen is that of the server you wish to connect to, stop any
unnecessary servers and restart the server you wish to connect to.
c. Push READY ON.
properly.
Note
details.

6.9.4 Repeated connections and disconnections with host

An error screen is displayed if the connection to the network host is repeatedly broken. If the machine is
currently performing production, a cycle stop will occur.
01SYS-0814
a. Call a network administrator.
b. Clear the network error by referring to the information displayed on the screen.
c. Push READY ON.
properly.
Note
details.

6.10 Interval stop function

When using this function, the number of panels to be produced in one interval is specified before production
is started. After production is started, a cycle stop occurs automatically when the number of panels
produced reaches the specified number. This function is useful to ensure regular maintenance of equipment
such as the dip flux unit or GL head.
6.10.1 Guidance for starting and stopping the interval stop

function
When settings for interval stop have been performed, the main screen is displayed at the machine operation
panels as shown below.
Panel count / interval stop panel quantity
01SYS-0815E
When production is started, the displayed panel count increases each time a panel is loaded into the
machine.
The machine automatically stops when the specified interval stop panel quantity has been reached and the
last panel is unloaded from the machine. At this point, the interval stop guidance shown below is displayed
at the operation panel of the machine.
The [Stop Message] specified at the module configuration

settings screen.
(Use this area to display the purpose of the interval stop.
For example, a message could be displayed telling the
operator to clean the dip flux unit or perform other
maintenance.)
01SYS-0815E
After the interval stop, perform the necessary maintenance or action, and then push READY ON. The main
screen is displayed and the panel count is displayed as "0".

Note
It is possible to use manual mode to clear the panel count before the interval stop panel quantity is reached. For details, refer to section " 7.4.3
Clearing the number of panels loaded ".
1. When the interval stop function and the automatic changeover function are being used together and
the stop timing for the two functions occurs at the same time, priority is given to automatic changeover
(automatic changeover guidance is displayed first). After START is pushed to restart production, an
interval stop occurs.
2. If the [Unload panel] button is pressed to stop production after the current panel at the same time as
the interval stop panel quantity is reached, the reason for the stoppage is displayed as [Unload panel].
After START is pushed to restart production, an interval stop occurs.
3. If, in addition to the cases listed above in 1 and 2, an error also simultaneously occurs, priority is give
to the error (error guidance is displayed first). After production is restarted, an interval stop occurs.
Then, when production is restarted for a second time, guidance for automatic changeover or for when
after STOP is pushed.
4. When producing using paired modules and an interval stop occurs in a situation like one of the three
cases listed above, there are cases when one of the modules in the pair does not stop. In this case,
push CYCLE STOP.
5. When producing using dual lanes, the interval stop occurs after panels have been unloaded from both
lanes.
6. When producing using dual lanes and two panels are conveyed simultaneously at both of the lanes,
there are cases when the number of panels produced is one greater than the number specified for the
interval stop panel count.

6.11 Simple periodic nozzle changeover function

This function automatically changes the nozzles being used after the number of panels being produced
reaches a value that was specified before starting production. The nozzles are exchanged automatically
during production with the same type of nozzles that were set in the nozzle station prior to starting
production.
The production and maintenance rate is improved because this function helps prevent the use of dirty
nozzles.
6.11.1 Operation when using simple periodic nozzle changeover

When using the simple periodic nozzle changeover function, the changeover display area changes as
shown in the picture below.
Simple periodic nozzle changeover enabled

(This pictogram is also used when the nozzle
statistical warning function is enabled.)
01SYS-0817E
When the machine has produced the number of panels specified for this setting, the nozzles on the head
are exchanged with the spare nozzles set in the nozzle station.
When this occurs, the background color of the pictogram in the changeover dilay area changes to yellow.
This informs the operator that there are nozzles in the nozzle station that require maintenance.
Background color: yellow
01SYS-0807E

At the same time at Floor Monitor in Accessory Software, the background for the nozzle icon changes to
yellow.
Yellow background
01SYS-0513E
If there are any remaining spare nozzles in the nozzle station, then production is continued. When
exchanging nozzles, follow the procedures below.
Getting nozzles ready

If the required nozzles are prepared beforehand, it is possible to reduce the time the machine is stopped for
exchanging nozzles.
1. Click the nozzle icon in Floor Monitor.
2. Check the nozzles that require maintenance in the [Nozzle information list]. The background for these
nozzles will be yellow.
Yellow
Nozzle that requires maintenance
01SYS-0514E
3. Prepare spare nozzles for the indicated nozzles.

Exchanging nozzles
1. Push CYCLE STOP on the operation panel to stop the machine.
2. Use the manual mode commands to pull forward the module and replace the nozzle station. Check
the nozzles displayed on the operation panel.
Red
Nozzle that requires
maintenance.
01SYS-0808E
Note
Refer to " 7.7.2 Nozzles command " for how to remove nozzles using manual mode commands.
Note
The background for the nozzle code and nickname in the manual mode information display also change to yellow for nozzles that need
maintenance.
Background color:
Yellow
01SYS-0809E
3. Exchange the indicated nozzles.
4. Set the nozzle station back in the module and push back the module.
5. Push START on the operation panel to restart production.
6. Clean the removed nozzles.
Note
Refer to chapter 5. "Preventive Maintenance" in the Mechanical Reference Manual for information on cleaning nozzles.

When nozzles are removed, cleaned, and then put back

When nozzles that need maintenance are removed, cleaned and then put back in the station, the machine
does not know that the maintenance condition has been corrected. Perform the following to clear the
maintenance condition for all of the nozzles in the nozzle station.
1. Use the remote operation command [Complete nozzle maintenance] in Accessory Software.
01SYS-0209bE
2. Push START to restart production.
Note
When this command is performed, the current quantity of produced panels being tracked for this function is changed to "0".

1. There are cases in which simple periodic nozzle exchange cannot be performed based on the
production pattern being used even though this setting is enabled. Consider the following items when
specifying machine settings.
Production Pattern Caution

Production in which different nozzles Do not enable this function.
are used on each lane Only the nozzles currently attached to heads are exchanged
when the simple periodic nozzle changeover quantity is
reached.
Production in which nozzle changeover Do not enable this function.
is performed during production of a Only the nozzles currently attached to heads are exchanged
single panel when the simple periodic nozzle changeover quantity is
reached.
Production in which jobs are changed The production quantity count is continued even when jobs are
frequently and the nozzle sizes change changed. However, do not use this function on modules on
each time which the nozzles are changed if the job is changed.
Combined use with nozzle statistical When using the nozzle statistical error function, the machine
error function switches to spare nozzles upon the occurrence of a statistical
nozzle error. As a result, there may be insufficient nozzles for
simple periodic nozzle changeover. When this happens, an
insufficient replacement nozzles error occurs.
2. The [Complete nozzle maintenance] remote command is only for the nozzles in the nozzle station. It
is not for nozzles that are currently on the head.
3. A nozzle bend (chipping, dirt) check is performed for nozzles 1.0 mm and smaller when changing
nozzles. If a vision processing error occurs at this time, an error stop occurs without replacing any
error nozzles.

6.12 Backup pin allocation check function

This function is used by the operator to check the positioning of backup pins. When a module is in backup
pin allocation check mode, the panel is loaded and clamped by the machine and then guidance for checking
the backup pin positioning is displayed.
From this point, the operator pulls forward the module to check the backup pin positions.
When using this function a plate (transparent or semi-transparent) that is the same size as the panel is
required.
6.12.1 Procedure to change to backup pin allocation check

mode
1. Change to backup pin allocation mode from [Remote operation] in Accessory Software.
a. Click [Check backup pin position].
01SYS-0224aE
b. Select the lane and then click [Start].
01SYS-0225E
Note
If you desire to change back to normal operation mode after changing the mode without checking the backup pin positions, select [Production
mode] in [Remote Operation] and the click [Operation Mode] and then click [Start].

6.12.2 Using backup pin allocation check mode

In advance prepare a plate (transparent or semi-transparent) that is the same size as the panel. Put the
plate on the panel so you can see the layout of the panel and then mark the backup pin positions on the
plate. When the module is in backup pin allocation check mode, the plate is to be clamped to check the
positioning of the backup pins.
Plate
01SYS-0252E
When the module is changed to backup pin allocation check mode, the operation panel changes to display
guidance to push START with the backup pin allocation pictogram. In addition, the panel loaded indicator
area background color changes to yellow for the specified lanes.
In backup pin allocation check mode
Panel loaded area (yellow)
01SYS-0818E
Check the display and then perform the follow steps.
1. Push START.
Note
When checking modules other than the first module, use manual commands to load the plate before pushing START.
2. The module becomes ready to load a panel. Load the prepared plate.
Note
When using dual lane conveyance, first load the plate for lane 1 and then load for lane 2.

3. The plate is loaded and clamped and then module stops and displays guidance for checking the
backup pin positions. Press the [Remove module] button and pull the module forward.
01SYS-0819
4. Check the positions of the backup pins. Correct the positioning of any backup pins for which the
backup pin position does not match the mark on the plate.
5. Once the positioning of the backup pins is completed, push back the module on the base.
6. Guidance for unloading the panel is displayed on the operation panel. Push START.
Note
If the next module cannot be changed to backup pin allocation mode, then use the manual commands to remove the plate from the module
before pushing START.
01SYS-0820

7. The next module changes to backup pin allocation mode. Push START on this module.
Module1 Module2
01SYS-0821
8. The plate is loaded in the next module and then backup pin allocation check guidance is displayed.
Press the [Remove module] button and pull the module forward.
Note
The backup pin allocation mode for the module the plate was unloaded from is automatically cleared.
Module1 Module2
01SYS-0822
9. Check the positioning of the backup pins. Return to step 4 and repeat the procedures from this point
until the last module is reached.
10. The plate is not unloaded from the last module and the module stops. Use manual commands to
remove the plate from the module.

1. If the [Operation Mode] is set to any setting other than [Production mode] in Accessory Software, then
the backup pin position check cannot be used.
2. Turning off the machine does not clear the backup pin allocation check mode. To clear this mode,
select [Production mode] in [Remote Operation] and then click [Operation Mode] and then click [Start]
in Accessory Software.
3. During paired module production, push START at the first paired module. Then after the mode has
been set for the second paired module, push START at the second paired module.
4. When using the panel stopping position correction function based on fiducial marks or the panel edge
to correct the position at which the panel stops, prepare the plate so that it can be used with this
function.
5. When using a Profiler FLP unit, do not load the plate using the conveyor before the first module. Use
manual commands to load the plate.
6. When using vacuum backup pins, turn the vacuum backup pin function off temporarily or turn off the
vacuum through I/O Monitor.
7. When the tray unit is removed from a module and EMERGENCY STOP is pushed during operation,
the conveyor clamp lowers. Ensure that the panel does not move out of position at this time.
8. When using seamless production during times such as automatic changeover, the next module may
not have the same job as the current module. If this happens, change the job at the next module so
that it matches.

6.13 Nozzle changeover error detection function

This function displays guidance for clearing errors that occur when problems are detected during nozzle
changeover.
When an error occurs during nozzle changeover, the head may stop in a position where it collides with the
nozzle station. The error cannot be cleared until maintenance personnel checks inside the machine.
6.13.1 Clearing nozzle changeover errors

The guidance applies to the following errors.
Error code Contents

93F40000 Z, Q, R-axis error during nozzle changeover.
93FF0000 Nozzle station shutter open/close timeout
8F540000 After returning the nozzle, it remained on the head.
8F590000 After picking up the nozzle, no nozzle was detected.
6.13.2 Clearing errors when using H01 and H02(F) heads
01SYS-0823
b. Check the details of the error code in Accessory Software or press the [Scenario] button to display
the countermeasures and follow the instructions given.
c. Confirm that no nozzles fell inside the machine. If any nozzles fell, remove the nozzle station and set
them in it.
d. Push back the module.

6.13.3 Error guidance and clearance method for H04(S), H08(Q),

H12HS(Q), H24 (G, S, A), and V12 heads
01SYS-0824
Note
The guidance is the same for G04 and OF heads.
b. Check the details of the error code in Accessory Software or press the [Scenario] button to display
the countermeasures and follow the instructions given.
c. Check the Z-axis of the head. If the Z-axis is down, raise it by hand.
d. Remove the nozzle station. If any nozzles fell, set them in the nozzle station.
e. Set the nozzle station.
f. Push back the module.
6.13.4 Clearing nozzle changeover errors in Accessory Software

When nozzle changeover error guidance is displayed, errors cannot be cleared by pushing READY ON
without pulling forward the module. Depending on the status of the stopped machine, pulling the module
forward may be difficult. In this case, nozzle changeover errors can be cleared forcibly in Accessory
Software.
Refer to " 9.6.9 Forcibly clearing errors " for details on how to clear picker upper limit errors from Accessory
Software.
1. Upon restarting the machine, [A nozzle that cannot be returned to the nozzle station is mounted on
the holder] or [Dropped nozzle error] errors may occur.
2. If power to the machine is turned off while nozzle changeover error guidance is being displayed, after
the machine is restarted, be sure to inspect inside the machine and confirm that the head and nozzle
station will not collide.

6.14 Hybrid calibration support

Hybrid calibration is a function for measuring and correcting placing deviations using a dedicated stand and
jigs.
When one of the following actions are performed, hybrid calibration is performed as part of autocalibration.
a. The placing head is exchanged.
b. The parts camera is exchanged.
c. The parts camera mounting position is changed.
d. If the setting [Module Configuration] - [Calibration Settings] - [Placement angle measurement] is

changed.
e. If "Use" is specified for the setting [Module Configuration] - [Calibration Settings] - [Hybrid
Calibration].
This function can only be used on modules that have the special hybrid calibration stand attached to the
conveyor lane 1 reference rail.
Chip jig part

Glass jig part
Hybrid calibration
stand
01SYS-0273-Ea
6.14.1 Handling the jig parts

When performing hybrid calibration, both the jig nozzles and jig parts must be set correctly.
When handling the chip jig parts (GGAJ040*) and glass jig parts (AA7SA**), note the following cautions.
a. When setting the glass jig part in the hybrid calibration stand, set the part with the printed side face
down.
b. When using H08(Q), H12HS(Q), V12, or H24 (G, S, A) heads, do not set the glass jig part in the
module (this part is not used by these heads).
c. Always keep the surfaces of the jig parts clean.
d. When removing jig parts, use soft plastic tweezers or a similar tool in order not to scratch the parts
and the storage unit.
e. Be careful to not drop the jig parts in the machine.

6.14.2 Starting measurement

After setting the jig nozzles in the nozzle station, push START on the operation panel. Hybrid calibration is
started and the placing deviations are measured.
01SYS-0715
Note
When using an H04(S), H08(Q), H08M(Q), H12HS(Q), V12, or H24 (G, S, A) head, ensure that all mechanical valves are raised as far as they
can go.
30SYS-0705
Note
Modules with H08(Q), H12HS(Q), V12, or H24 (G, S, A) heads do not use the glass jig part. Set only the chip jig part in the module.
Chip jig part
Glass jig part
01SYS-0612-Eb
After measurements are completed, remove the jig nozzles from the nozzle station and replace them with
the nozzles to be used in production.

6.14.3 Regarding errors when measuring

The following are instructions on errors that may occur during hybrid calibration and how to correct the error.
When the jig parts are not set in the hybrid calibration stand
When measurement is started, the mark camera is used to check the presence of the jig parts in the hybrid
calibration stand. If jig parts cannot be detected by this check, the error guidance shown below is displayed.
01SYS-0825
b. Set the jig parts in the hybrid calibration stand.
Note
If a jig part is being held on a nozzle, then gently remove the jig part by hand and set back in the stand. Be careful to not drop and lose a jig
part when setting it in the stand.
c. Press the perform command button and insert the module.
d. Push START to restart the hybrid calibration measurement.
When a vision processing error occurs for a mark on the stand

The marks on the stand and jig parts are vision processed by the machine to measure the placing position
and placing condition. If a vision processing error occurs, the error guidance shown below is displayed.
01SYS-0826

b. If the jig parts or stand marks are dirty, clean them with a clean dry cloth. After cleaning, set the jig
part back in the stand.
Note
Be careful to not drop and lose a jig part when setting it in the stand.
When a vision processing error occurs for a jig part

The machine vision processes the condition of the picked up jig part and then compensates. If a vision
processing error occurs, the error guidance shown below is displayed.
Note
Press the camera button on the operation panel to check the current image.
01SYS-0827
b. Use a clean dry cloth to clean the jig part. After cleaning, set the jig part back in the stand.
Note

When a vacuum error occurs for the hybrid calibration stand

The stand uses vacuum to fixed the jig parts in place on it. If a vacuum error occurs, the error guidance
shown below is displayed.
01SYS-0828
b. If the jig parts or stand marks are dirty, clean them with a clean dry cloth. Remove any foreign objects
that are in the stand. After cleaning, set the jig part back in the stand.
Note
6.14.4 Dedicated jig cleaning method

When errors occurs because the hybrid calibration stand or jig parts are dirty, use the following cleaning
method.
1. Use a cotton swab to remove any dirt or dust from the top of the jig parts.
Caution
Wipe the parts without using any water or solvents on the cotton swab. Also, be careful not to scratch the jig parts.
2. Use a cotton swab to remove any dirt or dust from the fiducial marks on the hybrid calibration stand.
Caution
Wipe the parts without using any water or solvents on the cotton swab. Also, be careful not to scrach the marks.

6.14.5 Clearing an error when measuring from Accessory

Software
When measuring hybrid calibration and error guidance is displayed, it is not possible to clear the error by
pushing READY ON without pulling forward the module. There are cases in which the error cannot be
cleared when it is difficult to pull forward the module due to machine stop circumstances. Due to this, there
is a command in Accessory Software to forcibly clear the error that occurred during measurement.
Refer to " 9.6.9 Forcibly clearing errors " for how to clear errors using Accessory Software.

6.15 Automatic nozzle cleaning function

This function cleans nozzles set on the head periodically during production. It also cleans the thermal
compensation marks on the head at the same time.
This function can be used on modules loaded with the following units.
Station type brush unit
Feeder type brush unit

01SYS-0441-E
Note
Refer to the Feeder Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual for details regarding the feeder type brush unit.
This function can only be used for production that uses the following heads.
H08(Q) H12HS(Q) V12 H24 (G, S, A) DX(R12)
6.15.1 Using the automatic nozzle cleaning function
1. When the amount of production time specified in [Nozzle cleaning interval] has elapsed, the "Cleaning
nozzles" pictogram displays on the operation panel. Nozzles and thermal compensation marks are
cleaned.
01SYS-0829-a
Note
This section explains the procedure when using the station type brush unit. When using the feeder type brush unit, the cleaning nozzles
pictogram displays (with a blue background) indicating that you should set a feeder type brush unit on the feeder pallet. Refer to the Feeder
Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual for details.
2. When cleaning is completed, the machine restarts production and the cleaning nozzles pictogram is
no longer displayed.

6.15.2 Regarding errors when using the automatic nozzle

cleaning function
This section explains what to do if errors occur during automatic nozzle cleaning.
When the jig parts are not set in the hybrid calibration stand
H08, H12HS, V12, and H24(G, S, A) nozzles are supported. If a nozzle station for nozzles other than those
above is set on the machine, production continues with the cleaning nozzles pictogram displayed.
When the time specified in [Not cleaned nozzles stoppage interval] has elapsed, an error occurs and the
machine stops.
01SYS-0830-a
a. If nozzles that are not supported by the automatic cleaning function are being used in production, set
[Nozzle cleaning settings] to "Not used" and restart production.

6.16 Separated reject parts box support

Any parts that have errors in vision processing during production are rejected into the reject parts box. By
using the separated reject parts box, parts can be rejected into separate boxes based on part type. This
makes it possible to reuse these parts.
The part types to be rejected separately into the separated reject parts box are specified in the job
beforehand. All other parts will be rejected to the standard reject parts box.
01SYS-0507
The separated reject parts box can be used in the following module configurations.
Module M6-3, M6-3L, M6-3c

Parts supply unit Fuji intelligent feeders
Tray feeder-M
6.16.1 Setting the separated reject parts box

The separated reject parts boxes are set on a dedicated stand. Pull forward the module and set the four
separated reject boxes together.
01SYS-0517

Each box is secured individually to the plate by a clip. Away from the machine, it is also possible to remove
and set them individually.
01SYS-0510
6.16.2 Using the separated reject parts box

The parts that are to be rejected separately based upon separation settings specified in part data.
Using during production

1. If a vision processing error occurs for a part that is to be rejected separately, the machine rejects the
part with the error to one of the four boxes.
2. Parts with vision processing errors are separated in order of being rejected based on part data.
Note
For LED parts using the group device function, it is based on the lighting class.
3. After different parts have been rejected to all four boxes and an error occurs for another part type that
needs to be rejected separately, the machine cycle stops and displays error clearing guidance.
Displays the part types that are

stored in the different boxes.
1 2 3 4
01SYS-0831E
4. Follow the guidance to remove the parts that are in the separated reject parts box.
b. Remove the separated reject parts box from the module.
c. Remove the parts.
d. Set the separated reject parts box back in the machine.

e. Gently return the module.
5. The part information for each reject area is cleared. Push START to start production.
Note
Even if parts are not removed from the separated reject parts box and only parts in the standard reject parts box were removed, all reject part
information is cleared. In this case, parts that then fail vision processing may be mixed with the original parts in the separated reject parts box.
Be sure to remove any parts in the separated reject parts box.
Using manual mode commands

When the machine is stopped and you want to remove the parts in the boxes from a module, use manual
mode commands.
1. Select the cleaning command from the manual command menu.
Note
Refer to "7.2 Clean command" for information about using manual mode commands.
2. Operation guidance is displayed.
Displays the part types that are

stored in the different boxes.
1 2 3 4
01SYS-0832E
Note
If there are no parts in the separated reject parts box, then normal operation guidance is displayed.
3. Follow the guidance to remove the parts that are in the separated reject parts box.
b. Remove the separated reject parts box from the module.
c. Remove the parts.
d. Set the separated reject parts box back in the machine.
e. Gently return the module.
4. The rejected parts information is cleared.
Note
Even if parts are not removed from the separated reject parts box and only parts in the standard reject parts box were removed, all reject part
information is cleared. In this case, parts that then fail vision processing may be mixed with the original parts in the separated reject parts box.
Be sure to remove any parts in the separated reject parts box.

Clearing part information with remote commands

When vision processing errors occur for parts, the machine records the information of where the part was
rejected. This information is cleared based on following error clearing guidance and manual commands
when parts are removed from the separated reject parts box.
If rejected parts are removed by some other method, use a remote command from Accessory Software to
clear the information. Refer to " 9.6.10 Clearing separated reject box information " for how to use this
command.

6.17 Energy saving mode

This is a mode that can reduce the energy consumed by turning off the operation panel and signal tower
display as well as stopping the servo motors and vacuum pumps.
When the buttons on the operation panel or guidance does not need to be displayed for a set time, or when
the machine is continuously stopped, the machine will change to energy saving mode.
01SYS-0833
6.17.1 Operating using energy saving mode

Energy saving mode has two modes, one related to display related and one related to control.
Display related energy saving mode

1. When the following conditions occur during production, the machine changes to energy saving mode
and turns off the operation panel display and signal tower.
a. There are no notices for operators for the specified length of time.
b. No actions on the operation panel have occurred for the specified length of time.
01SYS-0584
2. If operator actions are required such as for part resupply, the machine switches out of energy saving
mode and the operation panel display and signal tower are turned on.

3. If you wish to switch out of energy saving mode, push POWER on the operation panel.
01SYS-0834
Note
1. It is also possible to switch out of energy saving mode by pushing the EMERGENCY button. However, the machine will emergency stop in
this case.
2. When the machine is in display energy saving mode, buttons other than POWER and EMERGENCY are disabled.
Control related energy saving mode

1. When the machine is stopped for longer than the specified time, the machine changes to energy
saving mode and turns off the conveyor, servos, and vacuum pump.
2. When production is restarted, the machine switches out of energy saving mode.
1. When the machine is in display energy saving mode, parts out warnings are not displayed. If you wish
to be alerted to parts out warnings, turn display related energy saving mode off.
Note
It is possible to check parts out warnings from Fujitrax even when the machine is in display energy saving mode.
2. When the machine is in display energy saving mode, the set OK buttons on the feeder pallet are
disabled. Push POWER once to switch out of energy saving mode before setting feeders.

6.18 Reducing auto calibration time when

exchanging heads
This reduces the auto calibration time when heads are exchanged.
Normally, auto calibration is performed when heads are exchanged. However, when there are calibration
results saved from using a head previously on a module, it is used again and calibration is not performed.
6.18.1 Operating while reducing calibration time when

exchanging heads
1. Push START on the operation panel to start production.
a. The machine performs auto calibration.
b. The measurement results are automatically saved.
c. Production is completed as usual.
2. After a different head is used, if the head for which step 1 was performed is put back in the module
and START is pushed, auto calibration is skipped and production is started.
1. When the parts camera position is moved or it is exchanged, previously saved auto calibration results
up to that point are cleared.
2. When the module, parts camera, or head is exchanged and even if the units are the same types, if
the serial numbers are different it is necessary to perform auto calibration again. Clear the auto
calibration results in Accessory Software.
Note
Refer to "Clearing auto calibration results" on the next page for details on how to clear this data.
3. When the parts camera and head is removed and maintenance is performed and then these are set
back in the module, perform auto calibration again.
Note
Refer to "6.10 Remeasure calibration data" in the Accessory Software Online manual for details.

6.18.3 Clearing auto calibration results
1. Click [Status Reference] from the Floor Monitor page in Accessory Software.
01SYS-0587E
2. Click [Manage Auto Calibration Data] from the list.
01SYS-0588E
3. Use one of the drop-down menus to display the auto calibration measurement results for the
applicable serial number.
01SYS-0589E
• Search by module: Select the applicable module serial number
• Search by camera: Select the applicable camera serial number
• Search by head: Select the applicable head serial number
4. Click [Clear]. All of the displayed auto calibration results files displayed in the list are cleared.
Caution
Be aware that it is not possible to restore cleared auto calibration results.

6.18.4 When errors occur

This section explains what to do if errors occur when heads are exchanged and you are using the function
to reduce the auto calibration time.
Note
1. RWB service is an abbreviation for Fuji Realtime Workingrate Buffer Service. For details related to RWB service, refer to the Accessory
Software Operation Manual (Chapter 5, "3 System Administration").
2. If the error cannot be cleared by following the instruction in this section, stop using this function.
RWB service connection error (0000A001)

Follow the procedures below to clear the error when the error code 0000A001 is displayed in the error
screen.
1. Check the status of the RWB service.
a. Click [Status Reference] from the Floor Monitor page in Accessory Software to display the status
reference page.
b. Click [Service List].
c. Click [Check] for [Checking and restarting RWB services].
d. Ensure that the [Status] for each server is "Normally running".
2. If the above does not clear the error, send a line change report and then restart the RWB services and
then check again.
3. If the problem is still not resolved, restart the Fuji Flexa communication server computers on which
the RWB service is installed. Check the status again from step 1.
4. If this still does not resolve the problem, cut the power to the machine at the main switch, and then
reboot the machine.
Insufficient hard disk space error when saving results of auto

calibration (0000A002)
screen.
1. Use the procedures from "Clearing auto calibration results" to clear auto calibration results for
unnecessary combinations.
2. Push READY ON at the operation panel to clear the error and then START to restart production.
3. If the problem is not resolved by the above step, move Fuji Flexa communication server and RWB
service to computers which have a lot of free disk storage space.

Auto calibration results file import error (0000A003), or Auto

calibration results file import error (0000A004)
Follow the procedures below to clear the error when the error code 0000A003 or 0000A004 is displayed in
the error screen.
1. Push READY ON at the operation panel to clear the error and then START to restart production.
Remeasure auto calibration.
then check again.
the RWB service is installed. Check the status of the service again.
reboot the machine.
Auto calibration results import data parsing error (0000A005)

screen.
1. Remeasure calibration data.
Note

RWB service error (0000A006)

Follow the procedures below based on the sub error code to clear the error when the error code 0000A006
is displayed in the error screen.
Sub error code Error contents

00000004 No file specified.
00000005 An attempt was made to open a file that exceeded file open restrictions.
00000006 Opening a file that is already open was attempted.
00000007 Unable to locate the directory.
0000000B There is data remaining that was not read.
0000000C When attempting to change the file name, a file with the same name already
exists in the same location.
0000000E Unable to acquire the module number.
For sub error codes 00000004 to 00000006
1. Send a line change report and then restart the RWB services and then check the RWB services status
again.
the RWB service is installed. Check the status again from step 1.
reboot the machine.
For sub error code 00000007
1. Reboot the computer used as the Fuji Flexa communication server that has RWB service installed.
For sub error codes 0000000B to 0000000C
1. Remeasure calibration data.
Note
2. If the previous step does not clear the error, clear the current auto calibration measurement results
data.
Note
Refer to previous "Clearing auto calibration results" section for details on how to clear this data.
then check again.
the RWB service is installed. Check the status of the service again.

reboot the machine.

6.19 Waste tape box cleaning guidance support

This function suggests to clean the waste tape box by displaying guidance on the operation panel.
01SYS-0606
6.19.1 Waste tape box cleaning guidance

Each time production of the specified quantity of panels is reached, guidance to clean the waste tape box
is displayed on the operation panel.
01SYS-0835
6.19.2 Cleaning the waste tape box
1. Remove the waste tape box and dispose of the waste tape and cover tape.
2. Put the waste tape box back in the machine.

6.20 Panel height detection function

This function is used to measure the warp of panels on the conveyor.
By measuring the amount of panel warp and reflecting the result to the part placing height, this can be used
to stabilize placements based on the panel warp. In addition, when excessive panel warp is detected an
error occurs in order to prevent the production of defective panels in advance.
01SYS-0590
6.20.1 Operating using the panel height detection function
1. Push START on the operation panel to start production.
2. If there are errors reading the panel height positions or the detected warp of the panel exceeds
permissible limits, the machine stops with an error.
3. Clear the error and continue production.

6.20.2 When errors occur

This section explains what to do if errors occur when using the panel height detection function.
Panel height position (mark) reading errors

If reading is unsuccessful even after repeated attempts to read panel height marks, an error stop condition
occurs after unclamping the panel, and error guidance displays.
01SYS-0910
a. Press the camera button and check the image.
b. Check the seek number (error code), and the position of the panel height mark from the image.
c. Push READY ON. The error is cleared.
d. If necessary, change the position of the panel height mark in MEdit. After changing the setting, update
the job and resent it to the machine.
Panel warp exceeds permissible limits

If the panel warp is detected as exceeding the permissible limit, an error stop condition occurs after
unclamping the panel, and error guidance displays.
Note
The permissible limit based on our specifications is ±2.0 mm.
01SYS-0911

b. Remove the panel.
c. Check the warp of the panel. Adjust the support by backup pins and return the panel if the warp
problem can be corrected.
d. Return the module.
6.20.3 Outputting panel height measurement results to a file

From a remote command in Accessory Software, the panel height measurement results can be output to
files during production.
Outputting the data

Transmit the job you wish to produce and then perform the following procedures.
1. In the machine accessories section of Accessory Software, select the applicable module.
2. Select [Remote operation] and then [Output panel height measurement data].
Caution
When this command is selected, any previously existing measurement result files are cleared. If you need these previous files, then
acquire these files first and then perform the above command.
01SYS-0593E
3. Push START on the operation panel. Production is started and the panel height measurement results
for each lane is output to a file.
Note
The measurement results files are for each lane and these are saved in the base as text files.
Even if [Output panel height measurement data] is selected, panel height measurement data is not output
to a file under the following conditions.
• Immediately after the main switch is turned on.
• The file size of the output file of one of the lanes reaches 1 MB.
• Immediately after a different job is transmitted for dual lane production.
• Immediately after jobs have been transmitted using [Multi lane transmission].

Acquiring the output data

Follow the procedure below to acquire the panel height measurement result data.
1. In the machine accessories section of Accessory Software, select the applicable module.
2. Select [Data Acquisition] and then [Acquire Trace].
01SYS-0594E
3. Download the file and save it to the desired location.
Note
When trace acquisition is performed, the files stored in the base are deleted. The files cannot be recovered, so take care when managing the
acquired files.
4. The saved files are compressed in a zip format. Using a file compression tool to uncompress the
saved file. The output panel height measurement files have the following names.
Lane File name

1 PanelHeightL1.csv
2 PanelHeightL2.csv
3 PanelHeightL3.csv

Viewing acquired data

Open the acquired text files in a text editing program such as Notepad. The following is a description of the
items found in the files.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
01SYS-0595E
No. Item Contents

1 Job information Name and side of job in production ("T" or "B"), revision
2 Panel ID Panel ID of panel in production
3 Panel size X Panel length (mm)
4 Panel size Y Panel width (mm)
5 Panel rotation Panel direction (deg)
6 Measurement position X X coordinate of the point where panel height measurement
coordinate is performed. (um)
7 Measurement position Y Y coordinate of the point where panel height measurement
coordinate is performed. (um)
8 Measurement results Panel height measurement (um)
9 Board number 1 to 6000: When measuring board height
0: When measuring panel height

6.21 Predictive maintenance

The predictive maintenance function detects abnormalities in the CPU box. It notifies users of abnormalities
and how to handle the issue.
6.21.1 When a low CPU box battery is detected

The machine monitors the remaining battery life of the battery in the CPU box. If a low life battery is
detected, an error pictogram is displayed to warn the users.
Warning screen and how to resolve the problem
Module
Base
01SYS-1021
a. A low battery life has been detected. Production can be continued.
b. If production is continued, an error stop may occur.
c. Stop production and replace the battery. Refer to "Replacing the Control Box" and "Replacing the
Module CPU Box" in "6. Replacing Consumable Parts" in the mechanical reference manual for how
to replace the battery.

6.21.2 When a high temperature is detected in the CPU box

The machine monitors the temperature in the CPU box. If a high temperature is detected, an error pictogram
is displayed to warn the users.
Warning screen and how to resolve the problem
Module
Base
01SYS-1022
a. The machine detected a high temperature. Production can be continued.
b. If production is continued, an error stop may occur.
c. Stop production and check the operation of the cooling fans. Refer to "Replacing a Cooling Fan" in
"7. Replacing Parts" in the mechanical reference manual for details.
d. When the temperature raises for a module CPU box, clean the filters in the module. Refer to
"Cleaning filters inside the module" in "5. Preventive Maintenance" in the mechanical reference
manual for how to clean.
e. When the error cannot be cleared, replace the CPU box.

6.21.3 When there is a CPU box battery life error

When the battery life for a CPU box runs out, the machine cycle stops and an error screen is displayed.
Clearing errors
Module
Base
01SYS-1023
b. Turn off the main switch of the machine.
c. Replace the battery. Refer to "Replacing the Control Box" and "Replacing the Module CPU Box" in
"6. Replacing Consumable Parts" in the mechanical reference manual for how to replace the battery.

6.21.4 When there is a CPU box high temperature error

When there continuous to be a high temperature in a CPU box, the machine cycle stops and an error screen
is displayed.
Clearing errors
Module
Base
01SYS-1024
b. Turn off the main switch of the machine.
c. Check the operation of the cooling fans. Refer to "Replacing a Cooling Fan" in "7. Replacing Parts"
in the mechanical reference manual for details.
d. When the temperature raises for a module CPU box, clean the filters in the module. Refer to
"Cleaning filters inside the module" in "5. Preventive Maintenance" in the mechanical reference
manual for how to clean.
e. When the error cannot be cleared, replace the CPU box.

6.22 Operation when IPS is broken

This allows production to be performed without using the IPS unit at modules with a V12 head or H12HSQ
head. Use this to continue production using a head with a non-functioning IPS unit.
Caution
Production is performed without performing IPS checks such as parts presence checks and tombstone checks. When quality of the
panel is more important, change the head to one with a working IPS.
6.22.1 Operation using operation when IPS is broken

Beforehand, select "IPS not used" for [Operation when IPS is broken] in the module configuration settings
in Accessory Software.
A pictogram indicating that IPS is not being used is displayed in the status area on the operation panel.
01SYS-1046
Push START as usual. The machine starts performing production without using IPS on that head.
6.22.2 Clearing the mode for when IPS is broken
1. Stop the machine.
2. Set the head with the repaired IPS unit in the machine.
3. Change the [Operation when IPS is broken] setting in the module configuration to "Normal
production".
4. Remeasure auto calibration.
a. The calibration data for the repaired head is cleared.
Note
Refer to "Clearing auto calibration results" on the next page for details on how to clear this data.
b. Remeasure calibration data.
Note

6.22.3 Clearing auto calibration results
1. Click [Status Reference] from the Floor Monitor page in Accessory Software.
01SYS-0587E
2. Click [Manage Auto Calibration Data] from the list.
01SYS-0588E
3. Use one of the drop-down menus to display the auto calibration measurement results for the
applicable serial number.
01SYS-0589E
• Search by head: Select the applicable head serial number
4. Click [Clear]. All of the displayed auto calibration results files displayed in the list are cleared.
Caution
Be aware that it is not possible to restore cleared auto calibration results.

6.23 Any side production

The mark to determine which panel side is to be produced (job identification mark) is read at the first module.
The machine determines the panel side to be produced and then starts production.
Supported units Double conveyor, single conveyor (Note 1)
Caution
Note 1: The specifications for panel sizes that can be produced are the same as for a double conveyor.
Note 2: This is only supported with Nexim. This cannot be used with Fuji Flexa.
6.23.1 Any side production operation

When using this function on a single conveyor machine, specify "Used" for [Single conveyor any side
production settings] - [Use single conveyor any side production] in [Operation Settings] in the machine
configuration settings in Accessory Software.
1. Transmit the job to the machine.
When the machine detects a job for which any side production is to be used, the background of the job name
on the machine operation panel is displayed in blue. Figure 1
If the machine detects a job for which any side production is not to be used, the background of the job name
on the machine operation panel is displayed in black. Figure 2
Note
If a job for which any side production should be used is transmitted but the background of the job name indicates that the function is disabled,
check if the job identification marks have been specified correctly.
[fig.1] [fig.2] 01SYS-1063
2. Push START.
After loading the panel at the first module, the job identification mark is read to decide which side to produce.

The job display as shown on the operation screen during production
e b d
A Job name
01SYS-1064-a
f a c
a. The side of the panel being produced on each lane
• Immediately after transmitting a job, "Lane1:Top Lane2:Bottom" is displayed.
• During production, the side of the panel being produced displays for each lane.
• If production is stopped without a panel in lane 1, "Top" displays for lane 1.
• If production is stopped without a panel in lane 2, "Bottom" displays for lane 2.
b. Job name
c. Quantity of panels produced for the top side
d. Quantity of panels produced for the bottom side
e. Presence of panel in lane 1
f. Presence of panel in lane 2
1. When using automatic backup pins, specify the same setup for the top and bottom sides. The mode
for checking the backup pin allocation can be performed at either lane.
2. Board skips cannot be specified for each panel side. If you wish to skip specified boards regardless
of the panel side, specify the same skip settings at lane 1 and lane 2. After specifying skip settings,
the boards specified to be skipped will be skipped when panels are loaded regardless of the side.
3. When performing the following functions at lane 1, do so for the top side. When performing them at
lane 2, do so for the bottom side. When using a single conveyor machine, if the bottom side of the
panel is to be produced, transmit the bottom side job to lane 1 separately.
a. Simulation
b. Place and check
c. Testing vision processing
d. Pickup test
e. Board skip mark reading test
f. Mark camera image
4. Single lane operation (for panels with a Y size exceeding 280 mm) cannot be used.
5. M3 paired module production is not supported.

6. Conveyance and placement of panels with protruding parts is not supported.
7. Automatic changeover is not supported.
8. Advanced reading trays, advanced nozzle exchange, and advanced pickup operations are not
performed at the first module.
9. The NPI support function is not supported.

6.24 Stacked part supply

This is a function for performing production in which multiple parts are stacked in each tray cavity.
The parts stacked in the cavities are picked in succession and, after picking the stacked quantity as
specified in the job, the picking position is then moved to the next cavity.
It is possible to use this function with the following module configurations.
Module M6-3, M6-3c

Head H01, H02(F)
Supply unit Tray unit-LT, tray unit-LTC
Fujitrax Always turn off to operate with this function.
Nexim V1.6.0
6.24.1 Using stacked part supply
1. Specify the quantity of stacked parts in the job. Refer to the NXT series Programming Manual for
details on how to create jobs.
3. Stack the quantity of parts specified in the job in each tray cavity, and set the tray in the tray unit.
Note
When specifying the pickup start point for the tray parts, stack the quantity of parts specified in the job into the specified cavity and every cavity
thereafter, and then set the tray in the tray unit.
4. Start production.
1. If the stacked quantity specified in the job is not set in the cavity, this will result in an empty pickup,
and a pickup error will occur.
2. If a pickup error occurs, the parts which remain in the applicable cavity are not picked up and the
pickup position is moved to the next cavity.
3. When stopping production mid-way and then restarting again, the machine will remember the position
to begin pickup from. However, the memory will be cleared in the following cases. In such a case,
pickup will begin from the first part in the cavity.
a. When the machine is moving to the pickup position to the next cavity.
b. When the operator specifies the pickup start point for the tray parts.
c. When the operator resets the tray pickup position from MEdit.
d. When the operator changes the feeder setup for the applicable slot and then transmits the job.

4. When performing the following tests in MEdit, make sure there is only one part in the applicable cavity.
a. When performing [Pickup Test] - [Pickup height measurement].
b. When performing vision processing tests.

6.25 Part ID traceability

It is possible to connect the 2D codes on the top or bottom of parts used at the machine to the traceability
data and then output the traceability data externally for management purposes.
Caution
When reading the 2D codes on the bottom of parts, use an H01 or H02(F) head.
6.25.1 Using part ID traceability
Specifying Fujitrax settings

Specify settings for cases in which an error occurs when reading the 2D code on the top of a part.
Specify the settings for [Panel conveyance when part 2D code reading errors occur] in the Fujitrax profiling
settings.
a. When continuing production even if a 2D code reading error has occurred, specify [Permit
conveyance] for [Panel conveyance when part 2D code reading errors occur]. The machine will
continue production.
b. When stopping production using an error stop at the machine when a 2D code reading error has
occurred, specify [Do not permit conveyance] for [Panel conveyance when part 2D code reading
errors occur]. Production is stopped and error guidance is displayed.
Refer to the Fujitrax Profiler User Manual for more details.
Specifying settings in Accessory Software

Specify the following settings in the [Host coordination settings] in the machine configuration of Accessory
Software.
01SYS-1094-E
• [Fujitrax Verifier]: [Used]
01SYS-1095-E
• [Fujitrax Profiler]: [Used]

Note
When wanting to recover by trying to reread the 2D code when reading 2D codes on top of parts fails, specify "Used" for [Recover from part 2D
code reading errors].
01SYS-1096-E
• [Use version]: [V5.80 or later]
Specifying job settings

Specify the shape data settings in the job. Refer to the NXT series Programming Manual for details on job
settings.

6.25.2 When 2D code reading errors occur
When using 2D codes on the top of parts

When [Do not permit conveyance] is specified for [Panel conveyance when part 2D code reading errors
occur] in the Fujitrax profiling settings, the machine displays error guidance and stops production.
01SYS-1097
1. The part for which the 2D code reading error occurred is displayed.
2. Check the image which caused the reading error on the monitor.
3. Refer to the displayed lane number, board number, and reference number, and check the 2D code in
the part for which the error occurred.
4. If an error still occurs when trying to read again, use the panel removal manual mode command and
remove the panel.
When using 2D codes on the bottom of parts

The machine discards the applicable part, then performs recovery. If the recovery limit is reached, an error
code denoting a 2D code reading error has occurred is displayed on the machine.

1. A maximum of 10 types of parts with 2D codes can be loaded to one module.
2. When it is specified to not use Fujitrax Profiler, parts with 2D codes can be placed but the codes are
not read.
Important points when using 2D codes on the bottom of parts
1. When parts with 2D codes on the bottom are to be dipped using the following dipping operation;
pickup > vision processing > dipping > vision processing > placement, the 2D code is read during
vision processing before dipping, but is not read during vision processing after dipping.
2. When parts with 2D codes on the bottom are to be dipped using the following dipping operation;
pickup > dipping > vision processing > placement, the 2D code is read during vision processing after
dipping. If the 2D code cannot be read after dipping, change the settings so that vision processing is
performed before dipping.
3. 2D codes on the bottom of parts cannot be read when using idle operation (No vision processing, no
feeder indexing).
4. Vision type 253 does not support reading 2D codes on the bottom of parts, and thus an error occurs
when using idle operation (no panel conveyance, VT 253).
5. When reading the 2D codes on the bottom of parts for which part direction checks are also performed,
the direction may be checked from the image taken to read the 2D code on the bottom of the part to
save time. This means that the imaging conditions will differ from those previously used, which may
result in a vision processing error when checking the part direction. When this occurs, adjust the
setting for [CCD Level] in the [Shape Process] - [Pin Check] tab in the shape data.

6.26 Placed part deviation check

This is a function for checking the positioning of placed parts using the mark camera.
If there is a part which is deviated, by discovering the deviation on the machine which placed the part, it is
possible to prevent defective panels from beings sent on to the next stage.
Note
It is possible to use this function with H01, H02(F), and H04S(F) heads.
6.26.1 Using placed part deviation check
1. It is necessary to specify job settings to be able to use this function. Refer to the NXT series
Programming Manual for details on job settings.
3. Start production.
6.26.2 When a placing deviation is detected

If a placing deviation is detected for a part, the panel is unclamped and an error stop occurs. Details of the
part with the error display.
Note
The displayed items will differ depending on the shape data settings specified in the job.
When "Recheck"
01SYS-1098
[ReCheck]
a. Remove the panel, repair the deviated part and then return the panel. After restarting, the deviation
is checked again. If the part is not deviated, production is resumed.
b. Remove the panel with the placing deviation, then resume production. Clear the error by pushing
READY ON.

When "Recovery"
01SYS-1099
[Recovery]
a. Check that the applicable part has not been placed. If the applicable part has been placed, remove
it. After the error is cleared, recovery is performed for the placement and production continues.
1. This function cannot be used together with part ID traceability.
2. The part and panel are recognized based on brightness. This function cannot be used if the contrast
between the panel and part is low.

6.27 Reading panel IDs again using a handy scanner

When reading the panel ID fails using the mark camera in the machine, it is possible to re-read the panel
ID using a handy scanner connected to a computer with Accessory Software installed.
Note
Board IDs are not supported using this function.
6.27.1 Re-reading panel IDs with a handy scanner
Specifying Fujitrax settings

Specify "Do not permit conveyance" for the [Panel conveyance when ID scanning error occurs] setting in
[Profiling Settings] in Fujitrax. If a panel ID reading error occurs, the machine displays error guidance and
stops production.
Refer to the Fujitrax Profiler User Manual for more details.
6.27.2 When panel ID reading errors occur

If a panel ID reading error occurs, the machine displays error guidance for the following errors.
• 9275 error
• 9277 error
• 8A51 error
1. Following the error guidance, pull forward the module and remove the panel.
Note
The same contents are displayed other than for [Seek Number] for the errors 9275, 9277, and 8A51.
01SYS-1100a
Caution
After removing the panel, do not cancel the error guidance by pushing the READY ON button.

2. In Floor monitor in Accessory Software, select the applicable module and then select the [Panel ID
Recovery] icon.
01SYS-1101
3. The panel ID re-reading screen is displayed. Read the panel ID using a handy scanner.
01SYS-1102
4. Check that "Success" is displayed on the screen.
01SYS-1103
Caution
a. To prevent incorrect operation by operators, if error guidance for a 9275, 9277, or 8A51 error is not displayed, a "6B04" error
occurs when [Send] is clicked. When this occurs, check the following.
• Is the applicable module correct?
• Has the error guidance been cleared?
• Is a board ID reading error (1 or larger board number) displayed?
b. When the panel ID is re-read several times using a handy scanner, the last panel ID for which "Success" is displayed is used.
5. Return the removed panel to the machine and then restart operation.
Note
If reading the panel ID after restarting operation fails, the machine continues production based on the panel ID read by the handy scanner.

1. In the following cases, if re-reading the panel ID fails after restarting operation, remove the panel and
read the panel ID using the handy scanner again.
• When operation was restarted with the panel removed after reading the panel ID with the handy
scanner.
• When restarting the machine before re-reading the panel ID after restarting operation, after reading
the panel ID with the handy scanner.


SYS-NXT3C-013E0 7. Using manual commands
7. Using manual commands

In this chapter, manual commands used to perform maintenance and other special operations are
explained.
7.1 Items displayed in the manual commands menu

Switch from the main screen to the manual commands menu. Refer to " 3.3 Displaying the manual mode
screen "for details on changing screens.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 01SYS-0716
No. Command name Functions
1 Clean When this command is used, the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT/
LTC attached to the machine is unclamped.
2 Position head This command is used to position the head in different

locations to make working on the module easier such as when
lubricating.
3 Manage production This command is used to check the pickup position for parts.
4 Diagnostics This command is used when upgrading control software.
5 Remove panels This command is used to remove panels from the conveyor.
6 Exchange This command is used when exchanging heads or feeder units

and for removing nozzles.
7 Adjust This is used when a GL head (glue head) or feeder type brush
unit is mounted in the module.
8 Information This command is used to display information about the

module, base, and head.
Note
Normally, modules that are performing paired production are attached together. When commands such as pulling forward a module are
performed for either of these modules, the command is performed for both modules.

7. Using manual commands SYS-NXT3C-013E0
7.2 Clean command

This command is designed to be used when cleaning is to be performed on the module. When this
command is selected and OK is pushed, the module is unclamped to allow it to be pulled forward. This
allows cleaning to be performed more easily on the module.
Note
If a tray unit is attached to the module, the guidance screen changes to display guidance for removing the tray unit at this point. Follow the
directions provided to remove the tray unit and then continue on to the next step.
1. Select the [Clean] command.
01SYS-0717
module.
01SYS-0926
Note
When performing this on paired modules, perform steps 1 to 2 on both modules. When either of the OK buttons is pushed on the paired modules
in step 4, both modules are unclamped.
3. Perform the necessary cleaning actions.
b. Grip the handle for the module, squeeze to release the module brake and gently push the module
back.
Note
If a tray unit was removed, guidance for reinserting the tray unit is displayed. Insert the tray unit gently in the module and the unit is automatically
clamped.
5. Push the [Production] button to return to the main screen.

7.3 Position head command

Use this command to move the head to different positions in the module to enable easier access to perform
actions such as cleaning and lubrication. There are three possible locations to position the head with this
command.
• In the middle rear of the module: This makes it easy to remove panels.
• In the left front of the module: This makes it easy to access the head from the left side.
• In the right front of the module: This makes it easy to access the head from the right side.
Caution
When this command is performed, any parts on the head are not rejected.
1. Select the [Position head] command.
01SYS-0718
2. Select the head retract position.
In the left front of the module

In the middle rear of the module In the right front of the module
01SYS-0837E

3. The main screen for retracting the head is displayed. Push START to begin moving the head.
01SYS-0838
4. The guidance changes to redisplay the different head positions. Push MANUAL and the main screen
is displayed on the operation panel.
a. Press the [Production] button to return to the main screen for production.
b. Press the [Manual] button to return to the manual command menu.

7.4 Manage production command

This involves performing the following commands.
• Pickup position check
• Clear the quantity of produced panels
• Clear the number of panels loaded (this clears the count for the interval stop panel quantity)
1. Select the [Manage production] command.
01SYS-0719
2. The following command selection screen displays.
1 2 3
01SYS-0839
No. Command name Function
1 Adjust pickup position Specify a device offset for the feeder or tray parts set in the
machine.
2 Clear produced quantity This clears the production quantity of the panels displayed on
the screen.
3 Clear interval stop quantity This clears the count for the interval stop panel quantity. The
count is displayed at the operation panel when using the
interval stop function.

7.4.1 Pickup position check (device offset)

This command is designed to check and change the pickup position for feeders and trays.
01SYS-0840
Caution
1. When the pickup offset has been specified for a position at the machine, the pickup offset is cleared for that position if a feeder
with a different part comment is set in that position.
2. Pickup offsets cannot be specified for positions that are not used in production.
3. Specify the pickup offset for parts in the shape data if pickup cannot be performed due to a reason such as pickup from the middle
of the cavity is not possible due to the shape of the part.
Pickup position
NXTMMS021-E
4. Do not remove the feeder while the command is running.
Set the feeders in the machine in accordance with the feeder configuration specified in the job.
Note
Usually parts do not need to be present at the pickup position (during production, the feeder is advanced before pickup). When the pickup
position is to be checked, set the feeders in the machine and then advance a part to be in the pickup position.
1. Select the [Adjust pickup position] command.
01SYS-0841

2. Select the unit and slot for which you want to check the pickup position by pressing the arrow buttons.
It is only possible to check slots that are in the current job.
01SYS-0842-a
Note
1. If it is required to advance the tape a specific amount in order to perform this command, this information is displayed. Manually advance
the tape the number of times indicated plus one extra time. Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for information on advancing feeders.
2. When using the free allocation function, the data displayed for [Device Comment] and [SLOT] is for the actual position selected.
3. Push START. The machine performs calibration and then checks the pickup position.
01SYS-0843-a
4. Once the check is completed, the operation panel displays the image in image monitor. Check the
pickup position using the gradations in the image from the mark camera.
Note
The image is displayed with left and right sides reversed.

5. Pressing the screen restores the pickup position check screen.
01SYS-0844-a
6. Next, specify the device offset by following the steps below. Press the text box field.
01SYS-0845-a
7. Device offset settings are enabled. Enter a value using the number keypad..
01SYS-0846-a
8. Press [OK] to save the offset values. To check the pickup position at Image Monitor after setting the
values, push START and then repeat the procedure from step 4.

9. When the values have been set, the operation panel returns to the pickup position check screen. For
slots at which indexing has already been performed, the required reverse index count displays in the
screen. Manually reverse index the parts tape the specified number of times plus one extra time.
Note
Always return the parts tape to its original position before commencing production. Failure to do may result in damage to parts. When a part is
present in the pickup position of a set feeder, the part is not returned from the pickup position even if the feeder is indexed back by the specified
pitch. If production is started in this condition, the part in the pickup position is scrapped. Due to this, index the feeder one extra time more than
the specified pitch.
10. Use the following procedure to switch screens from the pickup position check screen.
Clearing pickup offsets made at the machine

Pickup offsets specified on the machine are cleared under the following conditions.
• A feeder with a part with a different part comment is set in the slot.
• When a tray part with a different device comment is set
• A part is changed through splicing (the part comment for a spliced part is different (when using
AVL)).
• The pickup offsets are manually cleared.
The procedure for manually clearing the pickup offsets for a feeder is provided below.
1. Press the [CLEAR] button in the device offset settings screen. The offsets change to zero (0).
01SYS-0847-a
2. Press [OK] to return to the pickup position check screen.

Specifying the conditions for taking images

When part images cannot be acquired due to issues such as halation, change the lighting pattern and
shutter speed.
01SYS-1078
For details, refer to the "Specifying Image Acquisition Conditions for Adjusting Pickup Manual" included in
the DVD.
Specifying the lighting pattern
Press the triangle buttons in the device offset settings screen to change the lighting pattern.
01SYS-1075
Lighting pattern
Side:Red + Bottom:Red All red lights (default)
All Lighting All on
Side:Blue Blue sidelighting
Side:Red Red sidelighting
Bottom:Blue Blue incident lighting
Bottom:Red Red incident lighting
Side:Blue + Red Blue sidelighting + Red sidelighting
Bottom:Blue + Red Blue incident lighting + Red incident
lighting
Side:Blue + Bottom:Blue All blue lights

Specifying the shutter speed
1. Select the field for the shutter speed in the device offset settings screen. A numeric keypad is
displayed.
01SYS-1076
2. Enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press [OK].
01SYS-1077
Note
When "0" is set for the shutter speed (ms), image acquisition is performed with the default value of 10 ms. The decimal places for the shutter
speed are rounded off.

7.4.2 Clearing the quantity of produced panels

Use this command to clear the number of panels that have been produced to enable management of the
quantity of panels produced.
This command only clears the display of the quantity of panels produced on that module for the current
module. This does not affect production or Profiler information.
1. Select the [Clear produced quantity] command.
01SYS-0848
2. Press this button to clear the displayed panel production quantity.
01SYS-0849
Note
1. If you do not want to clear the displayed panel production quantity, press a button at the top of the screen to change the screen.
2. If the machine detects a panel on the conveyor, the lane pictogram displays yellow. Wait until production for that panel is completed and
then unload the panel.

7.4.3 Clearing the number of panels loaded

This command is only enabled when the interval stop function is being used. Use this command to clear the
count for the interval stop panel quantity. The count is displayed at the operation panel when using the
interval stop function.
1. Select the [Clear interval stop quantity] command.
01SYS-0850
2. Press the perform command button. The display for the panel loading quantity is cleared.
3 / 5
0 / 5
01SYS-0851
Note
If you do not want to clear the displayed panel loading quantity, press a button at the top of the screen to change the screen.

7.5 Diagnostics command

This command is designed to be used when upgrading control software, directly loading matrix software
and so on.
1. Select the [Diagnostics] command.
01SYS-0852
2. Press the perform command button.
01SYS-0853
Caution
An hourglass timer displays at the screen when diagnosis begins. Do not operate the machine during this time.
3. Wait until diagnosis is complete and then perform any necessary operations.
01SYS-0854

7.6 Remove panels command

This command is designed to be used when removing a panel from the module.
1. Select the [Remove panels] command.
01SYS-0721
2. The main screen for removing a panel is displayed. Push START.
01SYS-0855
Note
module.
01SYS-0926
Note
When performing this on paired modules, perform steps 1 to 2 on both modules. When either of the OK buttons is pushed on the paired modules
in step 3, both modules are unclamped.

4. Remove the panels from the lanes.
Note
1. The operation panel for the paired module on which the OK button was not pushed in step 3 displays guidance for pulling forward the
module. Remove the panel and continue with the next work.
2. The top plate for the front rail of the lane can be slid back to allow easy removal of the panel. After removing the panel, be sure to slide this
plate back into the original position.
NXTBAS194
back.
Note
clamped.

7.7 Exchange command

This command is designed to be used when exchanging units on the module. .
1. Select the [Exchange] command.
01SYS-0722
1 2 3
01SYS-0857
4 5
1 Device unit This unclamps the feeder pallet or tray unit which is set in the
machine.
2 Nozzles This returns nozzles on the head to the nozzle station. Nozzles
can also be exchanged by removing the nozzle station from
the module.
3 Head This moves the head to the removal position and then cuts
power to the head.
4 Backup plates This maximizes the width of the conveyor for lanes 1 and 2.
5 Backup plates Lane2 forward This makes backup plate exchange possible.

7.7.1 Device unit command
1. Select the [Device unit] command.
01SYS-0858
2. To remove a feeder pallet, set a PCU-2(c) on the machine.
01SYS-0454E
3. Press the button for removing the feeder pallet or tray unit.
4. Slowly remove the unclamped feeder pallet or tray unit-LT/LTC.
01SYS-0859
Note
After this, guidance displays at the operation panel to set a feeder pallet or tray unit-LT/LTC.
5. Insert a feeder pallet or tray unit-LT/LTC.
Refer to section “4. Basic Operation” in the Mechanical Reference manual for procedures and details on
exchanging a feeder pallet or tray unit.

7.7.2 Nozzles command
1. Select the [Nozzles] command.
01SYS-0860
2. The main screen for exchanging nozzles is displayed. Push START.
01SYS-0861
Note
module.
01SYS-0926
4. Remove the nozzle station and exchange nozzles or replace the nozzle station.
5. After completing nozzle exchange, press the perform command button.

back.
Note
clamped.
7.7.3 Head command
1. Select the [Head] command.
01SYS-0862
2. The main screen for exchanging heads is displayed. Push START.
01SYS-0863
Note

module.
01SYS-0926
4. Exchange the head. Refer to "4. Basic Operation" in the Mechanical Reference manual for details on
how to exchange the item.
5. After completing head exchange, press the perform command button.
back.
Note
clamped.

7.7.4 Backup plates command

When this command is used, lane 1 and 2 move to their maximum width. This means the following work can
be performed.
• Removing backup plates or removing backup pins set on the backup plate
• Cleaning the backup plate surface
• Performing maintenance on the conveyor
1. Select the [Backup plates] command.
01SYS-0864
2. The main screen for exchanging backup plates is displayed. Push START.
01SYS-0865
Note
module.
01SYS-0926

4. Exchange the backup plates. Refer to "4. Basic Operation" in the Mechanical Reference manual for
details on how to exchange the item.
5. After completing backup plate exchange, press the perform command button.
back.
Note
clamped.

7.7.5 Backup plates (lane2 forward) command

This command is designed to be used with machines that have dual conveyors.
When this command is used, the backup plates for lane 1 are first removed, and then lane 2 moves forward.
Then the backup plates for lane 2 are exchanged. Finally, lane 2 is moved back and then the new backup
plates can be set in lane 1.
This can be used for dual lane and single lane production.
1. Select the [Backup plates Lane2 forward] command.
01SYS-0866
2. The main screen for exchanging backup plates is displayed. Push START.
01SYS-0867
Note
module.
01SYS-0926

4. Exchange the backup plates. Refer to "4. Basic Operation" in the Mechanical Reference manual for
details on how to exchange the item.
5. After completing backup plate exchange, press the perform command button.
back.
Note
clamped.

7.8 Adjust command

This command is used when GL heads are being used or when a feeder type brush unit or station type brush
unit is set in the module.
1. Select the [Adjust] command.
01SYS-0723
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 01SYS-0868
1 Remove air This applies to the GL head. This removes air bubbles from the
needle tip of a syringe loaded with glue.
2 Measure needle offset This applies to the GL head. This measures the needle center
of rotation.
3 Check applied glue This applies to the GL head. This measures the glue dot area
applied on a glue check unit.
4 Clean head nozzles This cleans the nozzles currently on the head and the thermal
compensation marks on the head.
5 Clean all nozzles This cleans the all nozzles in the module and the thermal
compensation marks on the head.
6 Adjust IH This measures the IH1 camera lens distortion.
7 Remove jig parts This removes the hybrid calibration chip jig part from the
storage unit for jig parts.

7.8.1 Remove air command

This command is used on a module that has a GL head. Use this command to remove air bubbles from the
needle tip of a syringe loaded with glue.
01SYS-0869
For details on this command refer to the GL Head Instruction Manual.
7.8.2 Measure needle offset command

This command is used on a module that has a GL head. Use this command to measure the needle center
of rotation. In order to measure this data, the job currently being used must have glue check sequences set.
01SYS-0870

7.8.3 Check applied gue command

This command is used on a module that has a GL head. Use this command to measure the glue dot area
applied on a glue check unit. In order to measure this data, the job currently being used must have glue
check sequences set.
01SYS-0871
7.8.4 Clean head nozzles command

This command can be used on modules loaded with either a feeder type brush unit or a station type brush
unit. Use this command to clean the nozzles currently on the head and the thermal compensation marks on
the head.
1. Select the [Clean head nozzles] command.
01SYS-0872
2. The main screen for cleaning nozzles is displayed. Push START.
01SYS-0873

Note
The pictogram displays while the nozzles are being cleaned. When nozzle cleaning is finished, the screen returns to the head adjustment menu.
01SYS-0874
7.8.5 Clean All Nozzles Command

This command can be used on modules loaded with either a feeder type brush unit or a station type brush
unit. Use this command to clean all of the nozzles on the head and in the nozzle station as well as the
thermal compensation marks on the head.
1. Select the [Clean all nozzles] command.
01SYS-0875
2. The main screen for cleaning all the nozzles is displayed. Push START.
01SYS-0876

Note
The pictogram displays while the nozzles are being cleaned. When nozzle cleaning is finished, the screen returns to the head adjustment menu.
01SYS-0877
7.8.6 Adjust IH Command

This command is used on a module that has an IH1 controller. Perform this command to measure IH1
camera lens distortion.
01SYS-1006
For details on this command refer to the IH1 Instruction Manual.

7.8.7 Remove jig parts command

This command is used when removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part from the storage unit for jig parts.
Clean the removed hybrid calibration chip jig part before performing hybrid calibration.
Removing glass jig parts is not supported.
1. Select the [Remove jig parts] command.
01SYS-1007
2. Waiting for START to be pushed displays. Push START.
01SYS-1008
Note
The pictogram displays while the command is being performed. The chip jig part is moved to the placing area from the storage unit of the jig
stand.

01SYS-1009
01SYS-1010
3. Guidance displays when the command is completed.
01SYS-1011
4. Pull forward the module.
module.
01SYS-0926

5. Remove the hybrid calibration chip jig part.
01SYS-1012
Note
When removing jig parts, use soft plastic tweezers or a similar tool in order not to scratch the parts and the storage unit.
Caution
• Be careful to not lose the jig parts such as by dropping them in the module.
6. Clean the hybrid calibration chip jig part. Check the surface and if there is any dirt, use a cotton swab
to remove it.
Note
Do not use any water or solvents.
7. Set the hybrid calibration chip jig part in the jig stand.
01SYS-1013
8. Push the module back into position.
back.
c. The module is clamped automatically. If the module is not automatically clamped, gently pull the

7.9 Information command

This command displays information for the module, base, and each unit set in the module.
1. Select the [Information] command.
01SYS-0878
2. The unit information screen displays.
01SYS-0879
3. Select the desired unit to display the information for that unit.
01SYS-0725
Note
Information is blank for an item if the machine has not yet checked that item during calibration. To do this, start production and wait until the
module has completed calibration and then stop production and redisplay the information.

Unit Information Displayed
Module Type Serial number Application version number Recovery count
Base IP address of the base
Conveyor Conveyor type Software version Motor bank version (M1 to M5)
Panel transport interface board version (Displayed only for the
two end modules on the base)
Tray Unit-LT (if mounted) Type Software version
Tray Unit-LTC (if mounted) Type Software version
Tray Unit-M (if mounted) ID number Software version
Feeder Pallet (if mounted) ID number Software version Feeder pallet levelness
measurement data (Calibration [um])
Feeder (feeders on the feeder Slot number set ID number Software version
pallet)
Part Camera and Mark Camera Camera type (*1) Serial number Software version
Head ID number, head option Serial number Software version
Nozzle Station ID number Serial number
Nozzles Socket number 2D code number
Calibration table Software version, calibration values, filter values, so on
(*1) The following displays to indicate the part camera type.
• P04CL:(CSB6500CL)
• BP04CL:(CSB6500CL (f))
• MP03CL:(VIS-1001-CM (b))
• MP05CL:(VIS-1001-CM (a))
• MP05:(CSB4000F-41)
• Side light:(CSB4000F)


SYS-NXT3C-013E0 8. Accessory software
8. Accessory software
Accessory Software is an application that brings together various tools used for things such as production
preparation and for non-production related commands. This chapter contains a summary of the main
functions in Accessory Software.
8.1 Functions
Accessory Software is used to perform the following operations.
• Checking the machine operation status and searching for errors
• Specify machine configuration settings
• Specify module configuration settings
• Acquire machine information such as trace data and images
• Managing calibration values such as feeder pallet levelness measurements
• Remote commands such as software updates and forcibly clearing errors
For further details on how to use Accessory Software, refer to the online Fuji Accessory Software Operation.
Click here to display the Accessory

Software Operation Manual.
01SYS-0726-Ea
8.2 Starting accessory software

If Accessory Software is installed in a network environment, Accessory Software can be accessed by any
computer with Internet Explorer.
1. Double-click the [Internet Explorer] icon on the desktop.
2. Enter the address (URL) "http://<FUJI accessory software server name>/fujiweb/" and then press
[Enter]. When application preparation is complete, Accessory Software main screen appears.

8. Accessory software SYS-NXT3C-013E0
8.3 Floor monitor

Floor Monitor displays the status for all lines and machines in the factory.
8.3.1 Floor Monitor fields and their meanings

Click [Floor Monitor] to display Floor Monitor as shown below. The screen is refreshed every 15 seconds
in order to always give the latest information.
12 7
2 9 10 11
1 3
4
6
5
01SYS-0157-Ea
Below is an explanation of the Floor Monitor items.
Number Name Description

1 Line Name This displays the line name.
2 Link Icon Area Click the icon for the item you wish to display.
Displays the pages for specifying machine settings.
Displays the pages for vision processing error analysis.
Displays the pages for viewing the placing time history.
Displays the pages for production plan progress monitor.
Displays errors that occurred when using the automatic

changeover function.
Displays the pages for maintenance warnings.
Displays the pages for trace data that is automatically
acquired when errors occur.
Displays the pages for the nozzle list. When the background
for a nozzle is yello that indicates that the nozzle needs
maintenance. 30SYS-0322aE
3 Equipment Name This displays the machine name and module number.
Click the machine or module to open the machine
accessories screen.
4 Module Status This displays the status for the selected module. If the
module is in an error status, the cause also displays. Click
the error cause to open the Error Details screen.
5 Job Name This displays the current job name. Click the job name to
open the Trend screen.
6 Line Configuration This displays the line module configuration. Click a module
to check the current status of that module.


7 Service List This displays the service list. Click here if the line
configuration displayed in the floor monitor does not match
the actual line configuration.
8 Update button This updates the information displayed in the Floor Monitor
to the latest.
9 Utilization Displays the operation rate for the last 10 minutes.
10 Comp panels Displays the quantity of panels produced for the last 4
hours.
11 Success rate Displays the success rates for the last 10 minutes.
12 Setting Information can be displayed based on production by
customizing the display for Floor Monitor.
Setting window
01SYS-1079

Item Description
Option Items displayed in Option1, Option2, Option3, Option4, and
Option5.
None No display
Line Utilization Operating status (last 10 minutes)
Completed Panel Production quantity
Completed Panel Production quantity (displayed in different colors for each lane)
(Lane Color)
Success Rate Success rate (last 10 minutes)
CPH Cph (last 1 hour)
LOB LOB (last 5 panels)
Job Information Job image (only for Fuji Flexa)
Lane Order Order of the lanes displayed in Floor Monitor
Ascending Ascending
Descending Descending
Status Color Settings for the colors when [Line Utilization] is selected in
[Option] (The same color is used for production information.)
Original Original color of Floor Monitor.
FloorInsight Color used for Floor Insight.
Completed Panel Display period when [Completed Panel] is selected in [Option]
(displaying for a long time heightens the load).
Last Displays the last specified time.
Fix Displays the quantity for the specified period of time from the
specified time.
Shift Displays the quantity for the period of the shift based on two
shifts or three shifts.
Success Rate Settings for the colors when [Success Rate] is selected in
[Option] (The same color is used for production information.)
Warning Displays in this warning color when the rate drops to be at or
below the specified value.
Error Displays in this error color when the rate drops to be at or
LOB Settings for the colors when [LOB] is selected in [Option]
Warning Displays in this warning color when the rate drops to be at or
Error Displays in this error color when the rate drops to be at or
Decimal Places Number of decimal places for each rate displayed in the
production information screen.
Clock Settings whether to display the clock in Floor Monitor
Note
LOB (%) = The average cycle time for all modules divided by the bottle neck cycle time.

8.4 Vision processing error analysis

When a vision processing error occurs during production, the related image is acquired from the machine
and displayed. Furthermore, by using VPDplus, shape data can also be edited. This function allows prompt
rectification of vision processing errors.
8.4.1 Information displayed in the vision processing error

analysis screen
Click the right icon in the [Link Icon Area] of the Floor Monitor to open the vision processing error analysis
screen. The vision processing error analysis screen displays the image, date, slot, part number, shape
name and error code for the specified module.
30SYS-0323E
Below is an explanation of the screen items.

1 Module Selects the module to perform vision processing error
analysis.
2 Sort by Displays the image in data order or slot order.
3 Image Displays the image acquired when the vision processing
error occurred.
4 IPS image Displays the IPS image at the time of a vision processing
error.
5 Download Click to save or edit the part image. Use VPDplus to edit.
6 Download Click to save the IPS image. Check the IPS image in
IPSViewer.
7 Date created Displays the date and time the vision processing error
occurred.
8 Slot Displays the slot the parts from which the vision processing
error occurred came.
9 Part number Displays the part number used by the part for which the
error occurred.
10 Shape name Displays the shape name used by the part for which the
error occurred.


11 Error code This displays the error code of the error that occurred
during vision processing. Click the error code to display the
error details.
12 Holder Displays the holder name on which the IPS vision
processing error occurred.
13 IPS Error This displays the error code of the error that occurred
during IPS vision processing. Click the error code to
display the error details.
14 Exit monitoring Exits vision processing error monitoring. The images
acquired will not be deleted.
15 Redo monitoring Redoes vision processing error monitoring. This deletes all
images acquired and starts without any error status.
16 Vision processing settings Specify whether to start vision processing error monitoring.
Click to display the vision processing error analysis screen.
8.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring settings
30SYS-0324

1 Module Selects the module to perform vision processing error
analysis.
2 Always save the error image Select this check box to always save the image for vision
processing errors.
3 Monitor check Select this check box when you want to monitor vision
processing errors for the slot.
4 Slot Displays the slot for which vision processing errors will be
monitored.
5 Part number Displays the part number of the part in the slot.


6 Shape name Displays the shape data name of the part in the slot.
7 Save pickup error Select this check box when images are to be acquired for
pickup errors.
8 Error code When vision processing errors for the specified error codes
occur, the image for that vision processing error is saved.
9 Back Deletes settings and returns to the vision processing error
analysis screen.
10 Clear Clears the specified settings. To update the settings at the
machine, click [Apply].
11 Set all Specifies the same settings for all slots. This changes all
of the slots on the module to be the same setting.
12 Apply Updates the specified settings to the machine.

8.5 Warnings
If the success rate of the product being assembled drops, a warning is sent to the machines, which can be
viewed by operators. If the productivity then goes back above the specified success rate, the warning
condition is removed.
This allows users to act on drops in productivity in real-time.
8.5.1 Displaying warnings

Click [Warnings] from the Menu to display the current warnings.
8.5.2 Warning information

The warning screen is updated every 15 seconds to display the current status. The selection box for the
production line displays at the top of the screen.
Select the name of the production line of which to monitor the warning status. The default is [All]. To display
warnings for a single line only, select that line name from the drop-down list.
30SYS-0336E
The description of the items from the screen above are provided in the following table.

1 Line name This displays the name of the line for which warnings are
currently displayed.
2 Machine name This displays the name of the machine for which warnings
are currently displayed.
3 Slot This displays the name of the slot for which warnings are
currently displayed.


4 First warning This indicates the time the warning status first occurred.
The warning has continued as is from this time.
5 Latest time This indicates the most recent time for the warning status.
6 Success rate Displays the success rate when warnings occur.
7 Error count by code Warnings display separately in order of highest incidence.
The error code, error description, and count display. This
allows users to efficiently prioritize countermeasure
actions.
8 Error graph This displays a graph showing the transition of errors over
time. Determine time periods of high errors using this
graph. For example, a strong upward trend (to the right)
indicates a high priority to take action, or continuing errors
indicates the negligence of a problem.
8.5.3 Displaying current warnings

Click [List] in the header menu to display the current warnings in the order of occurrence.
The warnings monitor screen is updated automatically when a warning occurs. From this display, it is
possible to see at which production lines or modules the warnings are occurring.
NXTAS0028E
The items displayed and their descriptions are as follows.
Number Description
1 Select the check box to select that item.
2 Displays a list of the currently active warnings. This section displays the line name,
equipment name, slot, current success rate, and the latest error.
3 Click to display the warning information details view.
4 Click to select all check boxes for the lines.
5 Click to clear the check box for the selected item.
8.5.4 Displaying warning details

Click the details icon in the warnings list screen to show further information about the warnings. Plan
countermeasures for the errors and prioritize these countermeasures based on the problems with the
highest frequency which can be determined by the error code counts.

8.5.5 Displaying the warnings log list

Click [Log] in the header to display the warning log which displays previous warnings.
NXTAS0029-E
Number Description
1 Indicates the date of the warning.
2 Indicates the name of the line at which the warning occurred.
3 Indicates the name of the equipment and module number at which the warning occurred.
4 Indicates the nature of the warning and the slot at which the warning occurred.
5 Indicates the current page number being displayed from the log. To view other pages, click
the relevant page number.
6 Clears the warning log.
8.5.6 Setting the success rate

Click [Success Rate] in the header to display the sucess rate screen.
Set the success rate for each production line, or for all the lines.
Number Description
1 Specify the items for which the success rate settings are to be made. If "All lines" is selected
and [Apply] is clicked, then the success rate settings will be for all lines.
2 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate warnings are issued. The
default value is 99%.
3 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate errors are issued. The
default value is 0%.
4 Click this to return the warning and error settings back to the default settings. Click [Apply]
after clicking this to enable the default settings.
5 This applies the specified success rates for the warnings and errors. Click this to enable the
currently set values.

8.6 Messages
This function allows users to distribute information between shifts and Accessory Software users within the
network.
The five most recent messages display in the lower section of the Menu.
30SYS-0338E
8.6.1 Displaying messages

Click the icon for a message in Menu to display that message. Click [To List] to display the entire list of
messages and to access the message editing function.
NXTAS0032-E

8.6.2 Adding messages

To add a message, click [Add] from the message list. Enter the desired message and specify the necessary
settings and then click [Apply] to save the message.
NXTAS0034-E
8.6.3 Editing messages

To edit a message, click the icon for that message and the message is displayed. To edit the message,
click [Edit]. To delete the selected message, click [Delete]. To close the screen without making any
changes, click [Cancel].
NXTAS0033-E

8.7 Error search

Click [Error Search] in the menu to open the error search screen.
30SYS-0343E
Enter the error code to search for in the search text box and click [Search]. A list of the items that match
the entered text is displayed.
NXTAS0035-E
Click the link of the item from the list to display the details for that item. If [Edit] is clicked from the details
page, it is possible to edit the selected message.

8.8 Service list

This screen displays the current working status and version of the realtime workingrate buffer services
installed on the computers with the Fuji Flexa machine communication service to which a machine is
connected. In addition, the computers with this service are listed.
From this screen, it is also possible to started the installation of the realtime workingrate buffer service on
the current computer.
8.8.1 Displaying the services
1. Click [Service List] from the header in Floor Monitor.
2. The names of the computers with the realtime workingrate buffer service installed are displayed along
with the service version and working status.
NXTAS0039Ea

1 [Check] for RWB services Click this to display a list of the RWB services and their
status.
2 [Check] for network Click this to display a list of the network connections and
connection their status.
3 [Check] for individual network After specifying the network item to connect to, click this to
connections check the network connection status to that item. It is
possible to use the host name or IP address of the item to
check in the textbox.

8.8.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer service

installer
1. Click [Service List] from the header in Floor Monitor.
2. Click [Download] at the bottom of the screen. The screen changes to the download screen.
3. Click [Download] to start the download process.
01SYS-0378E
4. Click [Save] in the dialog box that displays.
5. Specify the location to save the downloaded file and click [Save]. The file is downloaded to the
specified location.

8.9 Acquiring machine trace data automatically

Settings can be specified in Accessory Software to automatically acquire trace data when errors occur.
8.9.1 Displaying the auto trace data screen

Click the [Auto Trace Data] icon (shown below) in Floor Monitor.
30SYS-0880E
8.9.2 Auto trace data screen items and their meanings

Error codes for errors that occurred display at the [Auto Trace Data] screen along with the date and time at
which they occurred and the module number.
2 3 4 5
6 01SYS-0881E

1 Auto Trace Settings Click to display the page for specifying auto trace settings.
2 Date hr Displays the time that the trace data was acquired from the
machine.


3 Module Displays the module from which the trace data was
acquired. For the AIMEX-2, the number refers to the
number of the robot.
4 Error Code Displays the error codes included in the trace data that was
acquired from the machine. Click an error code to display
the error details for that code.
5 Save trace Press to open and save the trace data file.
6 Clear Click this to delete the acquired trace data.
8.9.3 Specifying automatic trace data acquisition

Click [Auto Trace Settings] in the top right of the [Auto Trace Data] screen. The [Auto Trace Settings] screen
is displayed.
01SYS-0882E
Refer to "4.2 Specifying automatic trace data settings" in chapter 2 of the Accessory Software Operation
Manual for details on settings.
8.9.4 The machine during automatic trace acquisition

After specifying automatic trace acquisition settings, if a specified error occurs during operation, the
machine acquires the trace data and then stops due to the error.

8.9.5 Downloading trace data
1. Click the [Auto Trace Data] icon (shown below) in Floor Monitor.
30SYS-0880E
Note
A red icon blinks if there is trace data.
2. The acquired trace data can be downloaded by clicking the icon in the right column.
Caution
Trace data displayed here is deleted automatically after 1 week.
01SYS-0883E

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 9. Settings and management
9. Settings and management

Operation settings can be specified for machines and individual modules to suit the production conditions.
Accessory Software is used to specify settings. This section also explains how to manage calibration data
and how to perform remote operation.
• Machine Configuration
• Module Configuration
• Data Acquisition
• Calibration
• Remote operation
9.1 Starting machine accessories

1. From Floor Monitor, click the machine or module number for the machine for which Machine
Accessories is to be used. The Machine Accessories log on page is displayed.
2. Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.
1;7$6(
3. Enter the user password and then click [Log on]. The main menu is displayed.
NXTAS0018E

9. Settings and management SYS-NXT3C-013E0
9.2 Making machine configuration settings

These settings affect the entire machine.
1. Click [Machine Configuration] to display the [Machine Configuration] screen.
01SYS-0596aE
2. Select the type of setting to change with the [Category] drop-down list. Selecting a category changes
the items that display.
Category Setting
Operation settings Changeover guidance settings
Recovery settings
Alternate feeder (Alternate tray) change condition settings
Function to skip the top part when bottom part mounting is
defective
Nozzle cleaning settings
IPS dust detection settings
Pickup error prevention settings
READY ON check function
Energy saving settings
XY-axis grease splash prevention function
Disable feeder buttons during production to prevent collisions with
nozzles setting
Insert order check settings
Production start conditions
Specify feeder indexing based on job
Allow 0402 parts to use different package data
LCR check setting
Single conveyor any side production settings
One CycleStop Switch ON/OFF settings
Mark reading settings Fiducial mark settings
Solder mark read settings

Category Setting
Panel conveyance settings Conveyor width settings
Panel clamp setting
Panel conveyance operation settings
Tray unit settings Tray pickup start point and movement direction settings
Tray unit-M settings
Tray unit-L settings
Tray unit-LT/LTC settings
Host coordination settings Fujitrax Verifier setting
Fujitrax Profiler Setting
Fujitrax communication setting
Automatic changeover settings
Skip boards at the machine setting
HexaFeeder cassette ID recognition
Error code used when reporting an empty pickup in production
information
Signal tower settings Signal tower setting
Operator call setting Signal tower delay settings
Operation panel sound volume
Calibration settings Shorten auto calibration when replacing heads
Operation when placing height measurement sensor has
recognition errors
Error display settings Language settings (NXT-3(c) only)
3. Perform settings for each item as required. For details on the settings, refer to the explanation list
below the settings.
4. After all required settings have been specified, click [Send to Machine].
5. Once all changed settings have been sent to the machine, click [Close].

9.2.1 Tray pickup start point and movement direction settings

The pickup order for tray parts may be different on Fuji machines compared to machines made by other
companies.
The first pickup position and the pickup order for tray parts can now be specified in Accessory Software.
This means that even partially used trays from machines made by other companies can be used on the
NXT-3/NXT3-c.
Set direction
01SYS-0477E
Specify settings in [Tray unit settings] in [Machine Configuration].
1. Specify the starting pickup position for pickup from tray units.
01SYS-0886E
• [Tray pickup start point]: [Start from bottom right], [Start from top right], [Start from top left], or [Start
from bottom left]
Note
The starting pickup position from this setting is based on tray direction 0.
Direction: 0 degrees Direction: 90 degrees

3 2 2 1
1 Bottom right
2 Top right
3 Top left 3 4
4 1
4 Bottom left
01SYS-0479aE

2. Specify the movement direction for pickup from tray units.
01SYS-0887E
• [Tray pickup movement direction]: Select either [Move in Y-direction] or [Move in X-direction]
Note
The pickup direction from this setting is based on tray direction 0.
Direction: 0 degrees Direction: 90 degrees

1
1
2
1 Y-direction
2 2 X-direction 01SYS-0481E
Pickup order operation table

The following types of operation are possible by specifying the pickup order settings.
a. Settings: [Start from bottom right] and [Y-direction] (default values)
Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees
01SYS-0482E
b. Settings: [Start from bottom right] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0483E

c. Settings: [Start from top right] and [Y-direction]
01SYS-0484E
d. Settings: [Start from top right] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0485E
e. Settings: [Start from top left] and [Y-direction]
01SYS-0486E
f. Settings: [Start from top left] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0487E
g. Settings: [Start from bottom left] and [Y-direction]
01SYS-0488E

h. Settings: [Start from bottom left] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0489E
Important points after setting the tray unit pickup order

Do not change the [Tray pickup start point] or [Tray pickup movement direction] settings after supplying
parts to tray units. This may cause the following errors.
a. Parts out guidance may display when there are still parts in a tray.
b. The machine may attempt pickup from an empty cavity.

9.2.2 Specifying the reference position for the tray pickup start
point
When the tray reference coordinate position is different from those used for machines from other
companies, it is possible to change the reference coordinate position to match the machines from other
companies.
01SYS-1081E
• Fixed: The reference coordinate position (X= 1, Y= 1) is fixed to always be the lower right corner of
the tray.
• Adjustable: The reference coordinate position changes as shown below according to the [Tray
pickup start point] setting.
a. When "Adjustable" is set for [Reference position for tray pickup start point] and "Start from top right"
is set for [Tray pickup start point]
Direction: 0 Direction: 90
01SYS-0482J
01SYS-1082
b. When "Adjustable" is set for [Reference position for tray pickup start point] and "Start from top left" is
set for [Tray pickup start point]
Direction: 0 Direction: 90
(6, 1) (6, 10)
(1, 1) (1, 10)
01SYS-1083

9.2.3 Specifying automatic changeover settings (barcode ID

mode)
The barcode attached to the panel is read and the machine performs job changeover to the job matching
the barcode ID before beginning production.
01SYS-0888E
• Fujitrax verifier: Used
• Fujitrax Profiler: Used
• Automatic changeover: Used
• Automatic changeover mode: Barcode ID
The following procedure is required to enable the settings.
1. Insert the license dongle at the computer that has Accessory Software installed.
2. At the Floor Monitor screen, specify the following items. For more details regarding the operation
method, refer to "Chapter 4 Automatic Changeover Function" in the Accessory Software Operation
Manual.
a. Specify the Fuji Central Sever host name for each machine.
Note
Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual, chapter 4, section "4.1 Setting up Fuji Central Server".
b. Create a panel type list.
• Click on the pictogram shown below to display the [Monitor] screen.
30SYS-0385E
• Click [Panel ID] at the top of the screen.
30SYS-0396E

• Create a panel type list.
Note
Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual (Chapter 4, section "4.3 Editing a Panel Type List").
3. Log on to Fujitrax Web and click [Profiling Settings] from the [System Settings]. Specify [Do not permit
conveyance] for [Substrate conveyance at the time of scanning ID error].

9.2.4 Specifying automatic changeover settings (handy

scanner mode)
In this mode, a handy scanner is used to scan a barcode on a production command document in order to
change jobs and start production.
01SYS-0889E
• Automatic changeover: Used
• Automatic changeover mode: Handy scanner
The following procedure is required to enable the settings.
1. Insert the license dongle at the computer that has Accessory Software installed.
2. At the Floor Monitor screen, specify the following items. For more details regarding the operation
method, refer to "Chapter 4 Automatic Changeover Function" in the Accessory Software Operation
Manual.
a. Register the lines on which automatic changeover is to be performed.
Note
1. Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual, chapter 4, section"3.5.2 Registering lines that use the function for automatic
changeover using a Handy Scanner".
2. When performing dual lane production (two lane production of different jobs), at the [Line settings for the Auto Recipe Function] screen,
select the check box for [Specify separate barcode ID for each item].
b. Create a table for the relationships between the factory setup (lines and machines) and the machine
type IDs.
Note
Refer to chapter 4, "3.5.3 Creating a relationship table for the machine type ID and equipment" in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.
c. Create a table for the relationship between the production job and the production part IDs".
Note
1. Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual, chapter 4, section "3.5.4 Creating a relationship table for the production job and the
production part ID".
2. Changeover is only performed for jobs at lanes selected at the panel type editor screen. To performed changeover at both lanes, select [All].

9.2.5 Specifying panel position correction function settings

This function is used to correct the stopping position of panels loaded onto the conveyor. This function is
particularly effective when using panels for which the stopping position may be unstable due to the weight
or shape of the panel.
There are two methods for correcting the panel stopping position. Select one and perform operation.
a. Fiducial mark correction
• Fiducial marks on the panel that arrived at the conveyor are vision processed and the panel
stopping position is corrected.
b. Correcting using the panel edge
• The edge of the panel that arrived at the conveyor is vision processed and the panel stopping
position is corrected. To prevent reflections from the backup plate, a felt paper plate must be
attached.
Felt paper
Type A: for M3-3 Type B: Type C:
for M3-3, M6-3, M6-3L,
for M6-3, for M3-3c and M6-3c M3-3c and M6-3c
M6-3L
AA8DG** AA8AM** AB257** AA8AN**
01SYS-0968-Ea
Note
The felt paper is sold separately. Order the part that matches the conveyor specifications.
• When correcting using the panel edge, set panel edge sequences in the job. Refer to the NXT
Series Programming manual for details.
1. Specify panel transport settings.
01SYS-0890E

• [Panel stopping position correction target] : Select either [Machine], [Module], or [Each job].
• [Panel stopping position correction]: Select [Correct based on fiducial mark] or [Correct based on
panel edge].
2. If [Module] was selected for [Panel position correction function settings], select [Send to Machine], and
then perform panel conveyance settings for the applicable module at [Module Configuration].
01SYS-0900E
• [Panel stopping position correction]: select either [Correct based on fiducial mark] or [Correct based
on panel edge]
3. If selecting [Each job], it is necessary to specify items in [Module Configuration]. Refer to the NXT
Series Programming manual for details.
30SYS-0399

9.2.6 Specifying resupply settings for the tray unit-LT/LTC

This section explains how to specify either magazine A or magazine B as the resupply magazine. Specify
one magazine for production (original feeder) and one for resupply (alternate feeder). Operators always
supply parts to the magazine for resupply.
1. Specify Fujitrax settings.
01SYS-0891E
• [Fujitrax Verifier]:[Not used]
• [Tray unit-L/LT/LTC Verifier]:[Not used]
Note
1. Turn one of the above settings off.
2. Specify the following settings for each tray unit type.
01SYS-0892E
• [Tray unit-L/LT/LTC Verifier]:[Set for each unit]
• [Tray unit-LT Verifier]:[Not used]
• [Tray unit-LTC Verifier]:[Not used]

2. Specify tray unit LT/LTC settings.
01SYS-0893E
• [Tray unit-LT/LTC resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A] or [Part resupply from magazine B]
Note
Specify the following settings for each tray unit type.
01SYS-0894E
• [Tray unit-LT/LTC resupply]: [Set for each unit]
• [Tray unit-LT resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A] or [Part resupply from magazine B]
• [Tray unit-LTC resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A] or [Part resupply from magazine B]
3. Specify the alternate tray change conditions.
01SYS-0895E

• [Alternate tray change condition]: [Parts out]
The following settings are required in the job to enable the settings.
a. Change the status of the following feeder positions in both magazines (TULTC ) to [Reserve] in the
machine configuration.
• For standard tray unit-LTs: [10-1] to [12-2]
• For standard tray unit-LTCs: [11] to [12]
b. Set the original trays in the production magazine (the one to be picked up from).
c. Optimize and then set the alternate trays in the supply magazine.
Note
Refer to the NXT series Programming Manual for details.
9.2.7 Dynamic alternate tray supply settings

Dynamic alternate tray supply is one of the operation modes for the tray unit-LT/LTC. One magazine is
specified as the production magazine and the other is specified as the supply magazine. In this mode,
operators set tray parts during production at any of the empty slots specified for alternate tray use.
In order to use this mode, it is necessary to have a tray unit-LT/LTC that supports the dynamic alternate tray
supply function (see below for requirements).
• Tray unit with barcode reader
• Tray drawers with RFID tags
Dynamic alternate tray operation order

There are three operating modes that can be used for dynamic alternate tray supply. The mode depends
on the [Machine Configuration] settings in Accessory Software and feeder setup specified in the job.
a. Mode A
Tray positions (job feeder setup) Alternate trays are set in the same tray drawer as the original tray.
in the production magazine
Dynamic alternate tray supply -
settings ([Machine
Configuration] settings)
Operation 1. Parts are picked up from the original tray.
2. When parts run out, the empty tray is exchanged for an alternate
tray from the supply magazine.
3. Parts are picked up from the new tray.

b. Mode B
Tray positions (job feeder setup) Alternate trays are set on a different tray drawer to the original tray.
Dynamic alternate tray supply Priority given to production magazines
settings ([Machine
3. Parts are picked up from the alternate tray in the production
magazine.
c. Mode C
Tray positions (job feeder setup) Alternate trays are set on a different tray drawer to the original tray.
Dynamic alternate tray supply Priority given to supply magazines
settings ([Machine
3. Parts are picked up from the new tray.
*Alternate trays in the production magazine are used once all the
alternate trays in the supply magazine have been used.

1. Specify Fujitrax settings.
01SYS-0896E
• [Tray unit-L/LT/LTC Verifier]: [Part type check + position check]
Note
01SYS-0897E
• [Tray unit-L/LT/LTC Verifier]: [Set for each unit]
• [Tray unit-LT Verifier]: [Part type check + position check]
• [Tray unit-LTC Verifier]: [Part type check + position check]
2. Specify tray unit LT/LTC settings.
01SYS-0893E

• [Tray unit-LT/LTC resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A] or [Part resupply from magazine B]
Note
01SYS-0894E
• [Tray unit-L/LT/LTC resupply]: [Set for each unit]
• [Tray unit-LT resupply]: [Part type check + position check]
• [Tray unit-LTC resupply]: [Part type check + position check]
Note
After specifying the resupply operation settings, transmit the job to the machine. If the job has already been sent, re-transmit it.
3. Specify the alternate tray change conditions.
01SYS-0895E
• [Alternate tray change condition]: [Parts out]

4. Specify alternate tray operation mode settings.
01SYS-0898E
• [Tray supply order]: [Slot number order]
• [Dynamic alternate tray supply device transition order]: [Priority given to production magazines] or
[Priority given to supply magazines]
Note
1. For mode A, either option can be specified.
2. When you are specifying the supply order and you want to prioritize the use of old parts, select the [Part registration time order] option.
The following settings are required in the job to enable the settings.
1. Edit the job.
a. Specify settings so that all the original trays are in the production magazine.
• For mode A: Specify alternate trays in the same drawer as the original tray.
• For modes B and C: Specify alternate trays in different drawers to the original tray.
b. In the [Feeder Setup] tab of the machine configuration, change the [Status] of all the slots being used
in the production magazine of the tray unit-LT/LTC to [Fixed].
c. In the [Feeder Setup] tab of the machine configuration, change the [Status] of all slots in the supply
magazine of the tray unit-LT/LTC to [Reserved].
d. Optimize the job.
Note
Refer to the NXT series Programming Manual for details.

9.2.8 Panel unloading order settings

When performing dual lane or triple lane production, it is now possible to select the order in which panels
are unloaded to the next machine from the individual lanes. The two orders that can be selected are shown
below.
• Panels are unloaded in the order they are produced
• Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded whenever possible
• Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded
The default setting is [Panels are unloaded in the order they are produced]. Panels loaded to each lane are
unloaded in the order they complete production. If production stops at one lane due to parts out or a similar
reason, production will continue in the other lane without maintaining line balance. Specifying [Panels are
unloaded in the order they are loaded] for this setting maintains line balance between lane 1 and lane 2
because panels are unloaded in the same order as they entered the machine.
Specify the panel unloading order that best suits your production line.
2 4
Panel B Lane 2
1 3
Example: Panel A Lane 1

Specifying the setting [Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded]
Panel A is loaded to lane 1, completes production and is then unloaded before panel B.
Even if parts run out and production stops at lane 1 and moves to lane 2, panel A is still
unloaded before panel B because productionresumes at lane 1 after parts are resupplied
to lane 1. (Panel B waits to be unloaded from lane 2 even when it has completed production). 01SYS-0197E
1. Specify the panel unloading order settings.
01SYS-0899E
• [Panel unloading order control setting] : Select the panel unloading order.
Note
The default setting is [Panels are unloaded in the order they are produced]. The setting [Panels are unloaded in the order they are loaded] can
also be used at modules using pass mode or breakdown mode.

9.2.9 Performing dual production with different width panels

On machines equipped with double conveyors, it is possible to perform dual lane production and single lane
production depending on the size of the panel. It is also possible to perform dual lane production with
different panel sizes for lane 1 and lane 2. Specify the lane width for the target lanes and then perform
production.
Lane 2 Panel B
Lane 1 Panel A
A+B is 560 mm or less
01SYS-0167E
Note
It is necessary that the total width of the backup frame sizes for lane 1 and lane 2 are 560 mm or less. The panel sizes that can be produced
then are restricted based upon this limitation.
This function is recommended for use when the conditions below are present.
a. Dual lane production is performed but it is desired to occasionally produce panels wider than 281 mm.
b. Panels wider than 281 mm are being produced (single lane production) but it is desired to produce
small panels in the extra lane.
01SYS-0905E
• Specify the maximum width for the panels for lane 1 in the [Maximum panel width for lane 1] setting.
• Specify the maximum width for the panels for lane 2 in the [Maximum panel width for lane 2] setting.
To enable these settings, transmit the job to the machine from Fuji Flexa. Lanes 1 and 2 require jobs.

9.2.10 Settings for the pitch between conveyors

During dual production, lane 2 is normally brought forward for panel conveyance. However, it is possible to
specify an optional position for the reference rail for lane 2 if it is desired to not move it forward due to
circumstances at the previous and next stages.
Lane 2
Lane 1 Lane pitch
01SYS-0168E
Note
It is not possible to perform single lane production using just lane 2.
01SYS-0904E
• [Lane Pitch Setting]:Select the [Use the Lane Pitch Value]
• [Conveyor margin setting for lane 1]:Specify the distance between the reference rail for lane 1 to
the reference rail for lane 2.
Note
Specify a value larger than the [Maximum panel width for lane 1] setting + 47 mm. In addition, the [Lane Pitch Value] setting + [Maximum panel
width for lane 2] setting must be 607 mm or less.

9.2.11 Function to prevent nozzle collisions from using the

feeder buttons
If the tape is indexed while the nozzle is picking up a part, the nozzle and tape may collide, leading to
possible nozzle drops and damage. This function disables buttons for feeders being used in production to
prevent this problem.
㹎㹕㹐㹃㹐㹐
01NST-1030
01NST-1031-E
• [Disable feeder buttons during production to prevent collisions with nozzles setting]: [Prevent
collision(H01/H02)] or [Prevent collision (All Head)]
Note
If [Prevent collision(H01/H02)] is specified, this function is enabled only for H01/H02 heads.
Also, this function is supported for the following feeder types and versions. If a feeder with a version earlier
than the versions indicated below is used, guidance to exchange the feeder is displayed on the operation
panel.
Feeder type Compatible software versions
W04b, W08b/W08c Feeder (W04b/W08b/W08c) V1.22 or higher
W04f, W08f Feeder (W04f/W08f) V4.39 or higher
W8, W12(c) to W104 Feeder V3.21 or higher

9.2.12 Check the remaining part quantities when changing

alternate feeders
This allows you to use the feeder with the least remaining parts when changing to an alternate feeder. This
allows you to reduce the quantity of partial reels when the same part is set in multiple feeders.
01SYS-1062-E
• [Check the remaining part quantities when changing alternate feeders]: [Use]

9.2.13 Specifying the setting for feeder exchange guidance for

giving the priority to cycle time
It is necessary to update the feeder firmware to the latest version (V4.54 or later) and exchange to a W04f
or W08f feeder when producing in productivity priority mode using an H24S,A head. If this setting is
specified, feeder exchange guidance is displayed when productivity priority mode is selected for H24S,A
heads.
Note
Refer to "Job builder" in the "NXT Series Programming Manual" for details about specifying settings for productivity priority mode.
1. To display guidance for feeder exchange, select [Guide] for [Provide guidance to set cycle time priority
feeders] in [Changeover guidance settings] in [Operation settings] in the machine configuration.
01SYS
• [Provide guidance to set cycle time priority feeders]: [Do not guide], [Guide]

9.2.14 Specifying whether to use nozzle length offset

By using nozzle length offset, the detection accuracy for functions such as the tombstone parts detection
function is improved on H24(G, S, A) heads.
To display guidance for exchange, select "Use" for [Nozzle length offset] in [Calibration] in the [Calibration
settings] category in the module configuration.
01SYS-1085E
9.2.15 Module buzzer setting

Use this setting to activate the buzzer when modules are being pulled in. This helps to draw the attention
of operators to avoid fingers or other body parts getting pinched or caught.
01SYS-1092-E
• [Ring buzzer when pulling in module]: "Use"
Note
This setting is enabled after specifying the setting.

9.2.16 One CycleStop Switch ON/OFF settings

This specifies whether the function to stop production after one panel is enabled. This helps prevent the
machine from stopping unintentionally because the button for stopping after production of one panel is
mistakenly pushed by the operator.
Specify the desired setting in [Use One CycleStop Switch ON/OFF settings] under the [Operation settings]
category in the machine configuration in Accessory Software.
01SYS-1112E
The button for stopping after production of one panel is

enabled.
Used
Note
This is the default value.
The button for stopping after production of one panel is

Not used
disabled.
When "Not used" is selected, the [One panel production] button cannot be used.
01SYS-1113J

9.3 Making module configuration settings

Any changes to the settings made for the modules are only valid for the selected modules.
1. Select the module(s) to change.
2. Click [Module Configuration] from [Menu]. Accessory Software connects to the module(s) and
receives the setting information. When completed, the settings page displays.
01SYS-0901E
3. Select the type of setting to change with the [Category] drop-down list. Selecting a category changes
the items that display.
Category Setting
Operation settings Premounted parts height settings
Parts reject operation
Nozzle defect detection
Nozzle Statistical error settings
Simple periodic nozzle changeover
Interval stop setting
Read condition settings for Fujitrax Profiler Panel IDs
Nozzle blow before thermal expansion measurement setting
Breakdown operation settings
Placement point check function
Auto recovery function
LCR checks
Periodic nozzle blow (cleaning) setting
Setting for investigating errors in the part usage quantity in the
production information
Rescue function when the recovery limit is reached setting
Use Auto Splicing Unit
DX Protector

Category Setting
Placement position correction through sprocket hole reading for
wide feeders
Part presence check
Parts camera vision processing monitor display options
Panel conveyance settings Panel stopping position correction (module)
Panel stop offset
Panel conveyance height setting
Tray unit settings Pickup push amount for tray unit-L, M, LT, LTC and stacked tray
feeder (down direction: minus value, default value: -1.000 mm)
Tray Feeder Unit L, M pickup pressure setting (Down direction:
Minus value, default: -0.5 mm)
Operation settings for the tray remover
Glue application control settings Glue temperature regulation settings
Glue control setting
Air removal setting
Jet nozzle cleaning interval settings
Optional unit settings Tape cutter/waste tape box unit/waste tape scraper settings
Auto backup pin settings
Dip settings
Flux unit settings
Pressure control setting with calibration unit
Vision processing board IP address setting
Ionizer function to remove static charge from cover tape setting
Monitor ionizer for removing static charge setting
Calibration settings Calibration
Thermal Expansion Measurement
Signal tower settings Use setting signal tower
4. Perform settings for each item as required. For details on the settings, refer to the explanation list
below the settings.
5. After all required settings have been specified, click [Send to Machine].
6. Once all changed settings have been sent to the machine, click [Close].

9.3.1 Nozzle statistical error settings

When using this function and the error rate for a nozzle exceeds a specified value then that nozzle is
skipped and not used in production.
01SYS-0902E
• [Change nozzles when statistical errors occur]: [Change nozzles]
• [Error count to decide statistical nozzle errors]: [Number of failed pickups before statistical error
occurs]
To enable this function, set spare nozzles in the nozzle station.
9.3.2 Breakdown operation settings

If a servo motor or other unit in a module is broken, this function allows you to use the conveyor only on the
module and continue production.
01SYS-0903E
• [Auto backup pins ON/OFF] : [Used]
• [Number of auto backup pins for a lane 1] : [1 to 20]
• [Number of auto backup pins for a lane 2] : [1 to 20]
Edit the job in advance. Feeders and sequences allocated to the non-functional module must be allocated
to other modules.

9.3.3 Hybrid calibration settings

Hybrid calibration is a function for measuring and correcting placing deviations using a dedicated stand and
jigs.
01SYS-0906E
• [Hybrid calibration]: [Used]
To enable this function, set the required special jig nozzles in the nozzle station before operation. Refer to
" 4.10 Replacing nozzles "for details regarding jig nozzles.
9.3.4 Interval stop setting

When using this function, the number of panels to be produced in one interval is specified before production
is started. After production is started, a cycle stop occurs automatically when the number of panels
produced reaches the specified number. This function is useful to ensure regular maintenance of equipment
such as the dip flux unit or GL head.
Note
1. The panel count that exists before specifying interval stop settings is cleared when the procedures above are performed.
2. When performing paired production, specify interval settings only for the first module in the pair. (The first module in the pair differs
depending on the direction of panel flow.)
01SYS-0907E
• [Panel Quantity setting]: "0" to "9999"
• [Stop message] : Use alpha-numeric characters when entering the stop message.
Note
The following characters can be used: A to Z, 0 to 9, "_" (Underscore), "." (Period), "-" (Hyphen). From 1 to 30 characters can be input for the
message.

9.3.5 Simple periodic nozzle changeover settings

This function automatically changes the nozzles being used after the number of panels being produced
reaches a value that was specified before starting production. The nozzles are exchanged automatically
during production with the same type of nozzles that were set in the nozzle station prior to starting
production.
The production and maintenance rate is improved because this function helps prevent the use of dirty
nozzles.
01SYS-0908E
• [Number of panels at which to perform changeover] : The possible range is from 0 to 99,999 panels.
To enable this function, set spare multiple sets of nozzles in the nozzle station.
Note
4 sets of nozzles can be set for the H08 head, 2 sets for the H12(S) / H12HS head, and 3 sets for the H24 (G, S, A) heads (based on the number
of pockets available in the respective nozzle stations).
9.3.6 Settings for using operation when IPS is broken

This allows production to be performed without using the IPS unit at modules with a V12 head. Use this to
continue production using a V12 head with a non-functioning IPS unit.
Operation when IPS is broken

IPS not used 01SYS-1043-E
• [Operation when IPS is broken]: "IPS not used"
When the repaired head is set in the machine and normal production is to be performed, it is necessary to
remeasure auto calibration.

9.3.7 Monitor ionizer for removing static charge setting

Error conditions at the ionizer for removing static charge are monitored and if an error occurs, production is
stopped. It is possible to prevent defective products due to electrostatic discharge damage by stopping
production before the machine causes a discharge.
01SYS-1061-E
• [Monitor ionizer for removing static charge]: [Use (error stop)] or [Use (error warning)]
Note
Note: If "Use (error warning)" is selected, when an error occurs an error warning will display however production will continue.
Select "Not used" for [Ionizer function to remove static charge] when there is no ionizer for removing static
charge attached to the machine.

9.3.8 LCR check settings

When using the LCR check function and production is started, before placing a new part, a part is checked
with an LCR meter and if the results of the measurement do not comply with the constraints specified in the
job, the part is not used. This can minimize the occurrences of faulty panels through the misplacement of
resistors (R), inductors (L), and condensers (C).
Specifying settings to perform LCR checks
Select the target parts for which LCR check is performed.
01SYS-1071-E
Setting Explanation
Check changed parts Perform LCR checks only for target parts changed during
changeover after a new job is transmitted.
Check all parts Perform LCR checks for all target parts after a new job is
transmitted.
Do not check any parts Do not perform LCR checks for any parts.
Caution
1. When [Do not check any parts] is specified, LCR checks are not performed even for jobs in which LCR checks are specified.
Normally, specify either "Check changed parts" or "Check all parts". When these are selected, whether or not an LCR check is
performed for a part is determined based on the part data setting.
2. Retransmit the job to the machine when settings are changed.
Specifying the number of times to perform recovery when LCR checks fail.
Parts are measured by the LCR meter and it is determined whether they pass or fail. When performing
recovery measurements for parts that fail, specify the following setting in the machine configuration from
Accessory Software.
01SYS-1072-E
• [Recovery count when LCR check fails]: "0 to 9"
Note
1. Recovery is not performed, if "0" is specified.
2. When this setting is changed, the new recovery count is applied from the next pickup.

9.3.9 Specifying nozzle defect detection

When using nozzle defect detection, an error code (8407) is displayed and an error stop occurs if a broken
nozzle is detected during production (if the nozzle length is shorter than the tolerance value). Pickup errors
caused by broken nozzles can be prevented by using this function.
To display guidance for exchange, specify a tolerance value for [Broken or stuck nozzle tolerance value] in
the [Operation settings] category in the module configuration settings. (Recommended value: -0.2 mm)
Note
This function is disabled when 0 mm is specified.
01SYS-1084E
Note
This setting is enabled only when using H24, H12HSQ, or V12 heads.

9.3.10 Part presence check

Use this setting to check the state of parts after pickup.
Caution
1. This is only enabled for V12 heads.

2. Specify "Not used" when performing production with parts for which parts presence checks cannot be properly performed with IPS
such as transparent parts.
01SYS-1091-E
• [Always check parts presence with IPS]: "Used"
Note
• "Not used": Determines whether to perform parts presence checks based on the job settings.
• "Used": Parts presence checks are performed no matter what the job settings specify.
• To use heads with the part side recognition function, it is necessary to specify job settings. Refer to the NXT series Programming Manual
for details on job settings.

9.4 Data acquisition

If a problem that cannot be resolved arises when using the machine, trace data and images that may be
useful in resolving problems can be acquired from the machine.
9.4.1 Acquiring trace data

Acquiring trace data is a two step process. The first step is to get the trace data from the module to the
server. The second step is to get the data from the server to the local computer.
For details on how to acquire trace data, refer to section "4. Acquiring machine trace data" in "Chapter 6
Machine Accessories" of the Accessory Software Operation Manual (online).
NXTAS0022bE
9.4.2 Acquiring images

If a vision problem is encountered during production, the image file of the part can be a great help in
troubleshooting.
When getting data from the machine, two modes are available. In one mode, only the images that resulted
in error are displayed. In the second mode, all images in the module are displayed. Downloaded images
can be viewed with the Viewer software.
For details on how to acquire images, refer to section "5. Troubleshooting vision processing errors" in
"Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" of the Accessory Software Operation Manual (online).
NXTAS0023aE

9.5 Calibration
The Calibration menu includes commands that are not normally used by users such as matrix
measurement.
9.5.1 Matrix measurement

This section explains about management of matrix measurement data and the direct loading of software
used for measurement.
Note
Under normal circumstances, users do not need to perform matrix measurement.
Managing module matrix measurement data

When performing items in this section, the modules must first have the Matrix software directly loaded and
be rebooted.
Performing the actual matrix measurement, cannot be done normally and requires a special jig.
Directly loading the matrix software

Performing the following steps is essential to be able to manage the matrix data. If these steps are not
performed, then none of the other items in this section can be performed.
1. Install the matrix measurement software on the computer running the Accessory Software Server.
2. Press the [Manual] button to display the manual command menu.
3. If nozzles are on the head, return the nozzles back to the nozzle station by following the substeps
below.
a. Use the arrow keys to select the unit exchange pictogram and then push OK.
b. Push the up arrow key once to select the eject nozzle pictogram.
c. Push START and the nozzles are ejected from the head.
d. When the guidance for removing the module displays, press the [Manual] button to return to the menu
screen. It is not necessary to pull forward the module.
4. Select the self-diagnostic command.
6. Check that the hour glass display on the operation panel changes to a computer.
7. Select the module on which matrix data is to be managed from Accessory Software in the Machine
Accessories section and click [Remote Operation].
8. Click [Direct Loading].

9. Select the option for [Matrix measurement software] and click [Start loading]. The software is loaded
onto the selected module and the module reboots automatically and enters matrix measurement
mode.
Updating matrix measurement data

Follow the procedures below to copy the backup of the matrix data for the module from the computer to the
module. The matrix measurement file serial number must match the serial number of the module in order
for this procedure to work.
1. Load the matrix software onto the module. For the procedures on performing this action see "Directly
Loading the Matrix Software" in this chapter.
2. Select the module to which to send the matrix measurement data, and then click [Calibration].
3. Click [Update Matrix Data].
4. Click [Browse] and use the dialog box that displays to specify the saved matrix data on the computer
that matches the selected module.
5. Once the data is selected, click [Open]. The location and file name displays in the text box.
NXTAS0024E
6. Click [Update] and the file is sent to the module.
7. After transmission is completed, click [Close] to return to the main menu.
Saving matrix measurement data

It is important that a backup of matrix measurement data for each module exists. Follow the procedures
below to save the current matrix data from a module onto the computer.
2. Select the module from which to save matrix measurement data, and then click [Calibration].

3. Click [Save Matrix Data].
NXTAS0025E
4. Click [Save] and a [File Download] dialog box displays.
5. Select the [Save this file to disk] option and then click [OK].
6. In the [Save As] dialog box that displays, specify the location to save the file.
Note
The module serial number is the file name by default.
7. Once a location has been specified, click [Save] and the file is copied to the specified location with the
specified name.
Registering matrix measurement data

Follow the procedures below to copy matrix data from the computer to the module.
When updating the matrix data, the matrix measurement file serial number must match the serial number
of the module. However, the serial number does not have to match when registering matrix data. This
procedure should not be used under normal circumstances since there is no check to ensure that the file
sent is the correct file for the module. Use the [Update Matrix Data] command instead. This command
should be used only under extraordinary circumstances.
2. Select the module to which to send matrix measurement data, and then click [Calibration].
3. Click [Register Matrix Data].
4. Click [Browse] and use the dialog box that displays to specify the saved matrix data on the computer
for the selected module.
5. Once the data is selected, click [Open]. The location and file name displays in the text box.
6. Click [Register] and the file is sent to the module.

9.6 Remote operation
9.6.1 Updating software on the machine

Select [Update software] from the [Remote operation] section of [Menu] to update the software for each unit
loaded on the machine.
Refer to " 11.2 Upgrading unit software "for details.
9.6.2 Updating machine control software

Select [Install machine application] from the [Remote operation] section of [Menu] to update the control
software for the machine.
Refer to " 11.1 Upgrading machine control software "for details.
9.6.3 Unclamping a module

Use the following command to unclamp a module.
With this command it is possible to override the safety function that limits the number of modules that can
be pulled out at the same time. Ensure that it is safe to unclamp the module before performing this
command.
WARNING
• There is a limit to the number of modules that can be pulled out safely at the same time. (Maximum:
Two M3 type modules on a 4M type base.) If the maximum is exceeded, the entire machine may fall
over to the front, possibly resulting in serious physical harm.
1. Select the module that is to be unclamped and click [Remote Operation].
2. Click [Unclamp module].
01SYS-0885E

3. Click [Start] and the remote command is sent to the machine.
CAUTION
• Do not insert fingers or other body parts into the gap between the machine side cover and base,
because they could be injured when the module is pulled out or unclamped.
4. When it is safe to unclamp the selected module, press the [Remove module] button to unclamp the
module.
9.6.4 Clamping a module

Use the following command to clamp a module.
Normally a module is clamped automatically when it is returned back to its position on the base. When the
module is not clamped without any errors, it is possible to use this command to force the clamping process.
Ensure that it is safe to clamp the module before performing this command.
WARNING
• When pushing a module onto the base, check that no one is behind the module, to prevent injuries.
• When pulling out or pushing in a module, do not insert hands or other body parts in between
modules. If caught between modules, fingers or other body parts could be cut or severed.
1. Select the module that is to be clamped and click [Remote Operation].
2. Click [Clamp module].
01SYS-0884E
3. When no one is near the module and it is safe to clamp the selected module, click [Start] and the
module is clamped.

9.6.5 Specifying a production mode

Four modes are available for the operation mode.
01SYS-0226E
Mode Description
Production mode Production is performed.
Pass mode Only panel conveyance is performed.
Idle mode (No vision processing, no Parts or marks on the board are not vision processed, and
feeder indexing) feeders do not index parts.
Idle mode (No panel conveyance, Parts are picked up and feeders index parts. All parts are
VT253) vision processed using vision type 253. In this mode, panels
are not loaded or unloaded between modules. Change the
part data in the job to match the vision type.
1. Select the module or modules that the operation mode is to be specified for and click [Remote
Operation].
2. Select the operation mode from the list.
3. Click [Operation Mode].
4. Click [Start] and the command is sent to the selected modules.
5. When transmission is completed, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

9.6.6 Conveyor calibration

The conveyor calibration function is used to restore the correct movement of the conveyor if one of the
following errors occurs.
Error code "****0701" "****0703" "****0704" "****0708"

"****071D" "****0752
Before using conveyor calibration, ensure that the main screen is displayed at the machine operation panel.
Also, check the following points.
• Safety relays are on.
• A feeder pallet or tray unit-LT is attached to the module for which conveyor calibration will be
performed.
• Safety doors are closed and EMERGENCY STOP is released at the module for which conveyor
calibration will be performed, as well as the adjacent modules.
• Adjacent modules are returned to the base and are turned on.
1. When using paired production, ensure that the main screen is displayed at both modules in the pair.
2. Select [Conveyor calibration].
3. Click [Start].
4. The dialog box shown below is displayed. Click [OK] to start conveyor calibration.
01SYS-0178E
5. A message is displayed indicating the conveyor calibration was correctly completed. When this
message is displayed, reboot the machine.
01SYS-0179E

9.6.7 Completing nozzle maintenance

Use the following command to change the status of nozzles in the nozzle station after they have been
cleaned so they can be used in production when using the simple periodic nozzle changeover function.
When this command is used, the current quantity of produced panels being tracked for the simple periodic
nozzle changeover function is changed to "0".
Refer to " 6.11 Simple periodic nozzle changeover function "for details.
01SYS-0209aE
9.6.8 Check backup pin position

This is used by the operator to check the positioning of backup pins. When this command is used, the
selected module changes to backup pin allocation check mode and it is possible for the operator to check
the positioning of the backup pins.
For details on this, refer to " 6.12 Backup pin allocation check function "in this manual.
01SYS-0224E

9.6.9 Forcibly clearing errors

When the machine stops due to problems such as nozzle changeover errors or picker upper limit errors, it
is usually necessary for the operator to pull forward the module and clear the error at the operation panel.
However, if for some reason it is difficult to pull forward the module, the error cannot be cleared at the
operation panel. In these cases errors can be cleared using remote operation.
Note
Forcibly clearing errors is an emergency procedure. Accordingly, it is recommended that access permission for remote operation in the Security
Tool Editor of Fuji Flexa be restricted to line administrators.
1. Select the module with the error and click [Remote operation].
2. Select [Forced error removal] from the list.
01SYS-0344E
3. Click [Start] to clear errors from the selected module.
4. After completing the forced error removal, click [Close] to return to the remote operation menu.

9.6.10 Clearing separated reject box information

The separated reject parts box has four boxes for holding different parts that have been rejected.
In order to prevent parts from becoming mixed, the machine records the information of where each part was
rejected.
During normal operation, this part information is cleared when parts are removed such as during
maintenance. However, it is possible to use this command to clear this information if necessary.
1. Select the module to clear the information for and then click [Remote operation].
2. Click [Clear separated reject box information] in the right frame.
01SYS-0511E
3. Click [Start] and the reject information for the separated reject parts box is cleared for the selected
module.
4. When clearing the information is complete, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

9.6.11 Specifying IPS brightness adjustment

There is a function in Accessory Software to set the IPS brightness to the value from when the machine was
shipped. This function can be used at modules with the following heads.
• H08MQ, H12HSQ, V12
Note
Firmware V2.01 or higher is required.
Use the [IPS brightness adjustment setting] function after performing head maintenance (such as cleaning
or replacing the fluorescent label, cleaning the lens/prism, or removing the head cover and adjusting the
brightness).
1. Select the module for which you wish to perform the function and click [Remote operation].
2. Click [IPS brightness adjustment setting].
01SYS-0941E
3. Click [Start] to adjust the IPS brightness for the head on the selected module.
4. When complete, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

9.6.12 Clearing the number of panels produced

This command clears the quantity of panels produced that is displayed on the operation panel.
It is also possible to clear the quantity of panels produced at individual modules by using manual
commands.
01SYS-0849
For this, use the following to clear the quantity as a batch for a machine.
1. Select the machine to clear the produced quantity for and then click [Remote operation].
2. Click [Clear the number of panels produced].
01SYS 1041 E
3. Click [Start] and the produced quantity displayed on the operation panel is cleared for the selected
machine.
4. When clearing the information is complete, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 10. Using software tools
10. Using software tools

There are extra tools that are available on the NXT system DVD to perform actions that Accessory Software
cannot perform.
Software Description
Image Viewer This software is used to display the images acquired from the
machine. In addition to being able to display the images, it can also
display the details from vision processing and any errors that
occurred. This software is installed from the DVD onto the client
computer and is found in the ViewerSoft folder in the base directory
of the DVD.
NetworkSetting This software is used to change the current network settings for a
base. In order to be able to change the network settings, the current
IP address of the base must be known. This software does not need
to be installed and is found in the NXT folder on the DVD.
VersionUp This software is used to change the current machine version on the
machine to the version on the DVD. In order to start the upgrade
process, the current IP address of the base to upgrade must be
known. This should be used only if the machine control software
cannot be upgraded through Accessory Software. This software
does not need to be installed and is found in the NXT folder on the
DVD.
AsciiToBinV382 This software converts an ASCII formatted file into a binary formatted
file. In most cases, this software will never need to be used. This
software does not need to be installed and is found in the NXT\Tool
folder on the DVD.
EmergencyInstaller This software is used to forcibly install the application if the machine
cannot start due to some problem. By doing this, the machine can be
recovered. This software does not need to be installed and is found
in the NXT folder on the DVD.
Motion Adjustment Tool This software is used to display the servo counter position and to
reset the origin positions. This software needs to be installed and is
found in the NXT\Tool\NXT3 folder on the DVD.
EquipmentCheck Can acquire information about each unit from the specified module,
check I/O states and single action operations. This is a tool to support
recovery when troubleshooting and performing maintenance.
MEdit This software is used to perform basic editing of job data. This is
capable of acquiring the job on the machine and after the data has
been edited, to send it back to the machine as well as save the
changes to the global directory.
Data Checker This software is used to perform a basic check of jobs edited in MEdit
and Fuji Flexa. This should be installed on all computers with Fuji
Flexa that are used to make jobs for machines. It is possible to
download the data checker installer from the download section of
Accessory Software.

10. Using software tools SYS-NXT3C-013E0
Software Description
IPS Viewer This software is used to display the images and results taken by the
IPS (Intelligent Parts Sensor) system on heads equipped with the
parts side view recognition function on computers. These images are
acquired from the module by Accessory Software. It is possible to
check things such as the nozzle condition and the parts pick up
condition in the images and check the parameters used for
determining the results.
cfRepair This software is used to recover the compact flash memory inserted
into the CPU box. Use this software when the machine is not
recovered by using EmergencyInstaller. This software does not need
to be installed and is found in the NXT folder on the DVD-ROM.

10.1 Image Viewer

This is the software used to display and check the vision process results of images acquired from machines.
10.1.1 Checking images with Image Viewer
1. Insert the media with the software in the drive.
2. A window about installing/upgrading is automatically displayed. If this window is not automatically

displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe on the media.
3. From the [For engineering panels] menu, select [Install support tool for engineering panels].
4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Viewer Soft] and then click
[Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when installation is complete, the
final step is displayed.
5. Click [Finish] and installation is complete.
10.1.2 Checking images with Image Viewer
1. Click [Start] and then point to [Programs] and then [Image Viewer] and then click [ImageViewer]. An
[ImageView] window opens.
2. Click [Open] from the [File] menu.
3. Locate the location to which the image file from the machine was downloaded.
4. Double-click the file to select that file and display it in the view.
Note
It is also possible to just double-click the downloaded image file to open that image in Image Viewer after installing the software.
5. Click [Display Result] from the [Image] menu. The display changes to display the vision processing
results and information.

6. Check any error messages and the condition of the part to help determine the appropriate
countermeasure.
7. When completed checking the data, click [Exit] from the [file] menu to close Image Viewer.
10.2 NetworkSetting
This software is used to change the current network settings for a base.
1. Insert the media with the software into the drive and open the drive through Explorer.
2. Double-click [NXT] to open that folder.
3. Double-click NetworkSetting.exe to start the software.
4. When requested, enter the IP address of the base for which to change the network settings and then
click [OK].
5. Specify the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway in the appropriate text boxes and click
[Next].
Note
Even if not changing any of these items, these values must be entered using the current values.
6. Specify the host name for the machine and then enter any domain information if a domain is used.
7. Click [Next].
8. Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate textboxes if these are used.
9. Once all settings have been completed, click [OK] and the new settings are sent to the machine.
10. Reboot the machine to enable the new network settings.

10.3 VersionUp
If the machine control software cannot be upgraded through Accessory Software then this software is used
to change the current machine version on the machine to the version on the media. The current IP address
of the base to upgrade must be known.
NXTST0003E
Refer to " 11.1.2 Using VersionUp from the NXT tools "for how to do use this software.

10.4 AsciiToBin
This software converts an ASCII formatted file into a binary formatted file for use as a final offset file for a
head.
NXTST0004-b
1. Insert the media with the software into the drive and open the drive through Explorer.
2. Double-click [NXT] and then [Tool].
3. Double-click AsciiToBin.exe to start the software.
4. Click [...] and use the dialog box that displays to locate and then double-click the final offset file for
PAM to select it. The path and name of the file displays in the text box.
5. Select the module type from the [Module NickName] drop-down list.
6. In the [Module Serial Number] text box, enter the serial number of the module.
7. Select the head type from the [Head NickName] drop-down list.
8. In the [Head Serial Number] text box, enter the serial number of the head.
9. Once all data has been specified, click [Make Bin File] to convert the file. A new file is generated in
the same folder as the original file with the name based on the head type, serial number, and stage.

10.5 EmergencyInstaller
EmergencyInstaller has the following 2 functions.
a. Installer
b. Tcp/IP Setting
01SYS-0933E
This software is used if the machine cannot start due to the following reason.
• Installation of the machine application software was interrupted due to a power outage or network
communication error.
In this case, CPU recovery must be performed. Connect the CPU box with the problem to a computer and
install the machine application software using this software.
Tcp/IP Setting is used to change the current network settings for a base.
CPU locations are shown below.
2M-3 4M-3 M3-3,M3-3S M6-3, M6-3L
01SYS-0966b
2M-3c 4M-3c M3-3c M6-3c
01SYS-0967

10.5.1 Preparing to use

Perform the following work first.
1. Prepare the DVD-ROM with the software. Use the media with the same version as that already
installed at the machine.
2. When recovering a CPU, module configuration settings in Accessory Software must be specified
again. Make a note of the settings beforehand if you wish to use the same settings.
3. Turn off the main switch and remove the covers to access the front of the CPU you wish to work on.
Refer to "Replacing the Module CPU Box" in "7. Replacing Parts" in the Mechanical Reference for
details.
4. Prepare a cross Ethernet cable. The cable must be long enough to connect the machine and
computer.
5. Connect the CPU box and computer using the cable.
6. Change the IP address for the computer to 169.254.0.200.
7. Move the toggle switch of the CPU to the left position. This means that the next time the CPU is turned
on, it will boot in emergency mode.
01SYS-0944
8. Turn on the main power switch for the base.

10.5.2 Recovering a CPU

This section explains the procedure for recovering a CPU and the actions after recovery.
Recovering a base CPU or module CPU

1. Insert the software DVD-ROM into the drive and open it though Explorer.
2. Start EmergencyInstaller.exe. This file is stored in the following folder.
• "NXT" - "TOOL"
3. Double-click [Installer].
01SYS-0930E
4. A dialog box for entering the IP address for the target is displayed. Enter the IP address of the CPU
and click [Start].
01SYS-0931
5. The IP address is displayed in the left pane and the right pane in the main window displays settings
for performing the emergency installation.
01SYS-0932E
6. Click [...] and use the dialog box that displays to locate the bin file for the CPU being updated. When
you select the file, the path and file name are displayed in the text box.

Item Bin file to select
Base 2M-3(c), 4M-3(c) NXT\FujiInst\Fuji\System3\Program\System\Base3.bin
Module M3-3(S, c), M6-3(c), NXT\FujiInst\Fuji\System3\Program\System\Module3.bin

M6-3L
Caution
• If the wrong bin file is selected and installed, it will no longer be possible to boot up the CPU for that
unit.
7. Click [Install]. The installation process begins.
8. When installation is complete, a message displays. Click [OK].
9. Turn the machine off at the main switch.
10. Change the toggle switch on the CPU box back to the right position.
11. Disconnect the cross cable you connected to the CPU and re-connect the original cable, if necessary.
12. Change the computer IP address back to the original value.

After recovering module CPUs

The following procedures are required.
a. Transmit jobs
b. Remeasure calibration data
c. Module configuration settings
Note
When the CPU box is replaced, it is necessary to also register matrix data and the feeder pallet levelness data. Refer to "6. Machine calibration
data" and "12. Feeder pallet level measurement" in "Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" in the online Accessory Software Operation Manual.
Before proceeding with these procedures, ensure that there are no nozzles on the placing head and no
panels in the modules. Once this has been confirmed, turn on the main switch for the machine and follow
the procedures below.
1. Check the serial number for the target module.
2. Specify the module configuration settings in Accessory Software that were noted before the
procedures in this section were performed.
3. Transmit the job to the machine. If another module in the machine is currently producing, then transmit
the job to the background and then change the background job to the foreground at the module.
4. Set the nozzle jigs in the nozzle station and then specify that the calibration data is to be remeasured.
Refer to "Remeasure Calibration Data" in the Accessory Software Online manual for details.
5. Push START on the operation panel to start calibration.
Note
Ensure that the main switch has been on and the module has been powered on for more than 30 minutes prior to performing this step. This
ensures that temperature for the parts camera is warm.

10.5.3 Specifying TCP/IP settings

Change network settings for a base when the base is started in emergency mode.
1. Start EmergencyInstaller.
2. Double-click [Tcp/IPSetting].
01SYS-0934E
3. Click [Refresh] in the displayed window to read the information on the connected machine.
01SYS-0935J
4. Enter information in the text boxes for each item and click [Apply] to send the new settings to the
machine.
01SYS-0936E
a. Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
b. Specify the host name for the machine and then enter any domain information if a domain is used.
c. Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate textboxes if these are used.

5. Click [EXIT] to quit the software.
6. Turn the machine off at the main switch.
7. Change the toggle switch on the CPU box back to the right position.
8. Disconnect the cross cable you connected to the CPU and re-connect the original cable, if necessary.
9. Change the computer IP address back to the original value.
10. Reboot the machine to enable the new network settings.

10.6 cfRepair
This software is used to recover the compact flash memory inserted into the CPU box in bases or modules.
Use this software when the machine is not recovered by attempting recovery using EmergencyInstaller.
10.6.1 Preparation procedures

Perform the following work first.
1. Prepare the machine application DVD. Use the media with the same version as that already installed
at the machine.
2. When recovering a CPU, module configuration settings in Accessory Software must be specified
again. Make a note of the settings beforehand if you wish to use the same settings.
3. Turn off the main switch and remove the front cover of the CPU box. Refer to "Replacing the Control
Box" and "Replacing the Module CPU Box" in "7. Replacing Parts" in the Mechanical Reference for
details.
4. Prepare a USB CF adapter to connect the compact flash memory to a computer.
10.6.2 Procedure
This section explains how to remove the compact flash memory and how to use CfRepair
1. Use a number 1 size Phillips head screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver to remove the connectors
from the CPU box.
Caution
Hold the harness connectors when disconnecting the connectors. Do not pull on the cables.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the cover from the CPU box.
01MEC-1416

3. Remove the four screws securing the CPU board.
4. Pull the lever and remove the CPU board.
01MEC-1417
5. Remove the compact flash from the CPU board. Loosen the screw for the card retainer and rotate.
01MEC-1545
6. Connect the compact flash memory to a computer using a USB CF adapter.
7. When the compact flash memory is connected to the computer, the AutoPlay dialog box may be
displayed. Close the dialog box in this case.
01NST-3010-E

8. Insert the installation disk for the NXT-3 into the DVD drive of the computer to which the compact flash
memory is connected.
9. Double-click cfRepair.exe. This file is stored in the following folder.
• "NXT" - "TOOL" - "NXT3"
10. Select the drive to which the compact flash memory is connected in [Disk] and select the machine type
in [Type]. Click [Write] when specifying settings is completed.
01NST-3011
11. A final confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click [OK] to start writing. Click [Cancel] to stop writhing.
01NST-3012
12. When writing is completed, the complete dialog box is displayed.
01NST-3013
13. Remove the compact flash memory from the computer.
14. Return the compact flash memory to the machine using the removal procedure in reverse.
After recovering the compact flash memory in bases

If the compact flash memory inserted into the CPU box in a base is recovered, install the machine
application to the applicable base using Accessory Software.
Refer to " 11.1 Upgrading machine control software "for the installation procedure.

1. If antivirus security software is installed, writing may fail. In this case, temporarily disable the security
software and perform the upgrade procedure.
2. If the machine does not start by running cfRepair.exe, exchange the compact flash memory.

10.7 Motion Adjustment Tool

This software is used to save trace data and display the servo counter position.
10.7.1 Installing Motion Adjustment Tool

Install this software on the computer first.
If an old version is installed on the computer, delete the old version beforehand and then perform this work.
If there is an old version still on the computer, the message shown below will display.
01SYS-1026-E
Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Runtime Libraries SP1 must be installed on the computer on which this software
is to be used. If it is not installed, run vcredist_x86.exe included in the package.
1. Insert the software DVD-ROM into the drive and open it though Explorer.
2. Start setup.exe. This file is stored in the following folder.
• "NXT" - "TOOL" - "NXT3"
3. Install the software with the wizard.
4. A shortcut for Mini Motion Tool is created on the desktop when installation is completed.
10.7.2 Starting Motion Adjustment Tool
1. Start Motion Adjustment Tool.
2. Select [Connect] from the [Communication] menu.
01SYS-0937

3. A dialog box displays. Enter the IP address and module number to which to connect and click [OK].
01SYS-0938
4. Once connected, information for the connected unit is displayed in the window.
01SYS-0939
5. The display of the functions for operating status viewing and adjusting can be changed by selecting
the appropriate tab.
01SYS-0940
a. Status view function list
Function Description
Save Trace Data Saves trace data.
Clear Trace Data Clears trace data.
Gathering Settings Used to specify gathering data collection parameters.
Stop Gathering / Restart Used to stop and restart gathering data.

Gathering
Save Gathering Data Saves collected gathering data to a file.
Save Controller Dump Outputs a controller dump file.

Alarm Information Displays current drive alarms.
Controller Errors Displays current controller errors.
Servo Network Information Displays servo network information.
Axis State Displays axis status, actual position, specified position, etc.
Motor Information Displays the electrical angle, load ratio, regenerative load ratio, etc.
Analog Monitor Settings Used to change analog monitor output settings and to start monitor
output.
Servo I/O status Displays servo I/O status.
b. Adjustment function list
MT Reset Performs an MT reset of axes which have an absolute rotary

encoder.
Origin setting Resets the origin of axes which have a linear scale encoder.
Detect Magnetic Pole Detects the magnetic pole of axes which have a linear scale encoder.
Axis Calibration Parameter Reads offsets values.

Settings
10.7.3 Operating status view functions

Start Adjustment Tool and connect to the module, then perform the following steps.
Saving trace data

1. Right-click the connected module (IP address and module number) displayed in the tree pane.
2. Select [Trace Data] - [Save Trace Data] from the displayed menu.
3. Specify the location and name to save the file and click [Save].
Saving controller dump data

1. Right-click [Controller 0] under the [Controller] tree displayed in the tree pane.
2. Select [Save Controller Dump] from the displayed menu.
3. Specify the location and name to save the file and click [Save].

Using gathering settings

1. Double-click [Gathering Settings] under the [Controller] tree displayed in the tree pane.
2. The gathering setting window is displayed in the right pane.
3. Use the [File] menu to read and save settings. Also, use the [Function] menu to collect, stop, or restart
parameters.
Displaying servo network information

1. Double-click either of the following under the [Servo Network] tree displayed in the tree pane.
• Network Information (current)
• Network Information (on wake)
• Network Information (on error)
2. Servo network information is displayed in the right pane.
Displaying controller error information

1. Double-click [Controller Error] under the [Motor] tree displayed in the tree pane.
2. Controller error information is displayed in the right pane.
Displaying servo IO status

1. Double-click [Controller] under the [Servo IO] tree displayed in the tree pane.
2. Servo IO status is displayed in the right pane.

10.7.4 Operating adjustment functions

Start Motion Adjustment Tool and connect to the module, then perform the following steps.
Performing a MT Reset
1. Double-click [MTReset] displayed in the tree pane.
2. The MT Reset window is displayed in the right pane.
Do not use this function unless directed by Fuji or a Fuji representative. This function clears the turn count
for the absolute encoder on the motor. Using this function may result in damage to the machine.
Using origin setting

1. Double-click [Zero Set] displayed in the tree pane.
2. The zero set window is displayed in the right pane.

10.8 Equipment Check

This can acquire information about each unit from the specified module, check I/O states and single action
operations. This is a tool to support recovery when troubleshooting and performing maintenance.
01SYS-0227E
10.8.1 Installing Equipment Check
1. Insert the media with the software into the drive.

displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe on the DVD.
3. Click [Select the required images and install] from the [Setup support tools for the engineering panel]
section.
4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Equipment Check] and
then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when installation is
complete, the final step is displayed.

10.8.2 Checking modules on a production line

Start Equipment Check on the computer being used to troubleshoot problems that have occurred at a
module on a production line to check the condition of the unit.
First, select the machine to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box. Also, in the [Select module]
pane of the [Equipment check] window, and follow the steps in " 10.8.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and
sensors "below to check the relevant items.
01SYS-0228E
Note
Before checking tray unit-LT, LTC units, ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be used in production in the magazine.
10.8.3 Checking modules not on a production line

The operation of modules not on a production line such as in a maintenance room that is not being managed
by Fuji Flexa can be checked. Start Equipment Check on a computer that is not on the line in order to check
the condition of the unit.
First, specify the base IP address of the unit to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box. Also,
select the module to work with in the [Select module] pane of the [Equipment check] window, and follow the
steps in " 10.8.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors "below to check the relevant items.
01SYS-0229E
Note
Before checking tray unit-LT, LTC units, ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be used in production in the magazine.
Note
Select the module position based on the position from the left because the actual module images cannot be displayed.

10.8.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors
<For conveyor>
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Conveyor sensor status] from the [Menu] pane.
2. In the [Selected lane] group box, select the check boxes for the lanes to check.
3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push START and
the unit checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to stop the machine.
4. Click [Start] and the condition of the sensors is displayed.
<For tray unit-LT or tray unit-LTC>

1. Select [Adjustment mode start] from the [Menu] pane.
Note
If the module is already in adjustment mode, then this command is not necessary.
01SYS-0614E
2. Select [I/O status check] for the tray unit-LT or tray unit-LTC from the [Menu] pane.
3. Click [Start] and the condition of the I/Os is displayed.
4. When you have completed checking the I/Os, click [Adjustment mode end] from the [Menu] pane and
the module returns to normal operation mode.

<For base, module>

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane.
2. I/O monitor displays.
01SYS-0346E
a. [Input signal]
• A green indicator means the input is on and a white indicator means the input is off.
b. [Output signal]
• A green indicator means the output is on and a white indicator means the output is off. If the [Output
signal] option is checked, the selected module item is locked and it is possible to change the output
signal status.
c. [Ring] settings
• [Ring] is used to enable a sound when an input is on. Select the item for which you want to enable
the sound and then click [Ring].
d. [ON/OFF]
• [ON/OFF] is used to change the status of an output. Select the output you wish to change and click
[ON/OFF] to change the output status.

10.8.5 Checking the operation of units
<Conveyor>
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Operation type] from the [Menu] pane and then select the operation
item.
2. In the [Selected lane] group box, select the check boxes for the lanes to check.
3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push START and
the unit checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to stop the machine.
4. Click [Start]. Refer to the section " 10.8.9 Conveyor command list "in this manual for details about the
actions.
<For tray unit-LT or tray unit-LTC>

Note
2. Select [Operation type] for the tray unit-LT or tray unit-LTC from the [Menu] pane and then select the
operation item you want to check.
01SYS-0615E
3. Click [Start]. Refer to the following sections for information about the different operations after starting.
• " 10.8.7 Tray unit-LT/LTC command list "
4. When you have completed checking the operation, click [Adjustment mode end] from the [Menu] pane
and the module returns to normal operation mode.

<For base, module>

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane and then select each item.
01SYS-0616E
2. Select the [Output signal] check box.
3. Select the output item from the list.
4. Click [ON/OFF].

10.8.6 Setting tray unit-LT/LTC calibration values
Note
2. Select [Calibration data] for the tray unit-LT/LTC from the [Menu] pane and then select the item you
want to set.
01SYS-0617E
3. Click [Start]. Refer to the following sections for information about the different operations after starting.
• " 10.8.7 Tray unit-LT/LTC command list "
4. When you have completed setting values, click [Adjustment mode end] from the [Menu] pane and the
module returns to normal operation mode.

10.8.7 Tray unit-LT/LTC command list
Command Name Description

(Acquire information)
Unit information Used to check the [Serial no.] and [Firmware version].
Servo counter Used to check the current servo counter value.(Not updated in real
time.)
I/O status check Used to check the current I/O status.(Not updated in real time.)
RFID reading results Displays the drawer ID (FIDL) for all subslots (Updated every 500
milliseconds.)
• In order to read RFIDs (FIDLs), it is necessary for both the machine
and tray unit-LT/LTC to support RFIDs (FIDLs).

(Operation check)
Retract position Stores the drawer in the magazine and moves the TZ-axes to the retract
positions.
• If there is no job that is using a tray unit-LT/LTC, operation is not
possible.
Reject parts conveyor Used to check the reject parts conveyor operation. Specify the distance
to move the conveyor (parts). (Range: 1 - 200 mm)
Specified slot pickup position Used to check the operation that pulls out the tray drawer for the
specified slot to the pickup position.
• A job using a tray unit-LT/LTC is required. Only slots used in the job
can be used..
• Perform after running the verify command.


(Operation check)
Single action positioning Used to check the following TZ- and TY-axis operations.
1. Advance the shuttle for the current slot position
2. Move the magazine to the specified slot position
3. Advance the shuttle for the current slot position
4. Storing the shuttle
5. Move shuttle continuously back and forward
6. Move magazines continuously up and down (includes linked

magazines)
• A job using a tray unit-LT/LTC is required for "Advance the shuttle for
the current slot position".
• Perform these checks after running the verify command.
Leveling adjustment position When adjusting levelness, moves magazine B to the position for the
movement sprit level.
Verify Used to perform verification and check the results.

can be used.

(Calibration data related)
Calibration data check Used to check the current calibration data.
TZ-axis origin setting Used to set the TZ-axis origin. (Currentry not supported.)
TY-axis origin setting Used to set the TY-axis origin. (Currentry not supported.)
Calibration data setting Used to set calibration data for the specified table number.
can be used.
Tray height check sensor Used to measure the attachment height of the tray height check sensor
measurement for the specified magazine. (Currentry not supported.)
• Special jigs are required to measure this setting.
Serial number setting Used to specify the serial number.
Note
Normally, users do not specify and measure calibration related items.

10.8.8 Tray unit operation check command list

This section provides explanations on the following commands used to check the operation of tray units.
1. Operations for replenishing and ejecting tray drawers
2. Single action positioning
Operations for replenishing and ejecting tray drawers

These are explanations on the commands used when checking the operation related to replenishing and
ejecting trays.
When checking the tray drawer replenishment operation
Operation Mode Name Description
Exchange tray drawer at [Preparation]

specified slot
Set the tray drawer being replenished on the lower supply area.
[Actions]
1. Advances the tray drawer for the specified slot to the pick-up
position.
2. Moves the tray drawer set in the lower supply area to slot 21.
3. Stores the tray drawer at the pick-up position in slot 0.
4. Measures the tray drawer in slot 21 (tray thickness, barcode

reading), and advances it to the pick-up position.
5. Ejects the tray drawer in slot 0 to the upper eject area.
6. Stores the tray drawer at the pick-up position in the specified slot.
• If there is no tray drawer in the specified slot when starting, steps 1, 3

and 5 above are not performed.

When checking ejection of the tray drawer to the lower supply area
Return tray drawer at [Actions]

specified slot to parts supply
drawer 1. Advances the tray drawer for the specified slot to the pick-up
position.
2. Stores the tray drawer at the pick-up position in slot 21.
3. Ejects the tray drawer in slot 21 to the lower supply area.
• If the tray drawer for the specified slot is not at the pick-up position
when starting, step 1 above is not performed.
• If the tray drawer for the specified slot is stored in slot 21 when starting,
steps 1 and 2 above are not performed.
When checking the lower supply area tray drawer collection operation
Measure height of supply tray [Preparation]

drawer
If a tray drawer exists in the specified slot, eject the tray drawer.
[Actions]
1. Moves the tray drawer in the tray supply area to slot 21.
2. Performs tray height measurement for the tray drawer in slot 21.
• The operation is complete when the tray drawer is stored in slot 21. If
returning the tray drawer to the lower supply area, execute the Return
tray drawer at specified slot to parts supply drawer" command.
When ejecting the slot 0 tray drawer to the upper removal area
Remove tray drawer at slot 0 [Actions]

to top area of tray unit
1. Ejects the tray drawer in slot 0 to the upper removal area.
2. Moves the TZ-axis to a position at which the tray removal area

door can be opened and closed.
• This operation is performed even if there is no tray drawer in slot 0.

Single-action positioning operations

These are explanations on the commands used when checking the operation related to positioning.
When checking the shuttle operation
Advance shuttle to current [Actions]

slot position
Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position for the current slot
position.
• The offset TY minus value is toward the operator.
• An error will occur if the shuttle is unable to move due to the positional
relationship with the TZ-axis.
Move TY-axis to retract [Actions]

position during tray removal
Moves the shuttle to the TY-axis retract position when performing tray
ejection for the current slot position.
Move shuttle continuously [Actions]

back and forward
Moves the shuttle continuously to and from the advance and retract
ends for the current slot position.
When checking the magazine operation
Move magazine to specified [Actions]

slot position
Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.
• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to the

positional relationship with the TY-axis.
Move magazine continuously [Actions]

up and down
Moves the magazine continuously to and from the upper and lower
ends.
• For tray unit-LT/LTCs, operation can be performed with magazines A

& B linked together.
• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to the

positional relationship with the TY-axis.

When simultaneously checking the shuttle and magazine operation
Advance shuttle to specified [Actions]

slot position
1. Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.
2. Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position.
When storing the advanced tray drawer in the magazine
Store shuttle [Actions]

Stores the advanced shuttle in the magazine.
• The slot that was pulled out is the slot the tray drawer is stored in.

10.8.9 Conveyor command list

(Status check)
Conveyor sensor status Used to check the status of the following conveyor sensors.
1. Conveyor panel pass check sensor L
2. Conveyor panel pass check sensor R
3. Panel unclamp check sensor
4. Conveyor back-up pin detection sensor
• A check cannot be performed if automatic operation has not been

commenced even once after booting up the machine. Clear all panels
by using the machine manual commands.

(Operation check)
Clamp Used to check the clamp operation for the specified lane.
• The clamp operation cannot be performed with the module pulled out.

Unclamp Used to check the unclamp operation for the specified lane.
• The unclamp operation cannot be performed with the module pulled
out.

Rail Used to check the specified rail movement. Specify the rail to be
checked and the movement distance.
• A check can be performed with the module pulled out.
Panel conveyance Used to check the panel conveyance operation for the specified lane.
Specify the lane to be checked and the movement distance.
• A check can be performed with the module pulled out.
Continuous clamp operation The clamp at the specified lane can be moved up and down repeatedly
between 1 and 1,000,000 times.
• Push EMERGENCY STOP at the machine if you want to stop the
continuous clamping operation.

Command Name (Adjusting) Description
Panel pass sensor sensitivity Used to adjust the sensitivity of the panel pass sensors.
adjustment
10.8.10 Checking unit configuration

[Equipment check] can be used during production to check items such as information about nozzles set on
modules, the serial number of each unit, and firmware versions.
Checking the nozzle station and condition of nozzles in modules

1. Select the applicable module from the [Machine Selection] dialog box.
01SYS-0347E
2. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Nozzle information] from the [Menu] pane.
3. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane. [Nozzle unit information] displays.
01SYS-0348E
a. The following information can be checked here.
• Nozzle station information: unit type, serial number
• Nozzle information: unit type (and serial number), usage condition for current job.
b. Nozzles not being used in the current job are colored gray.
c. For nozzles without registered specification data, only the serial number is displayed.

Checking items such as feeder pallet, feeder, and tray unit

versions
01SYS-0347E
2. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane.
3. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Device information] from the [Menu] pane. [Device unit information]
displays.
01SYS-0349E
• Feeder pallet information: version
• Feeder information: feeder ID, serial number, version
• Tray unit-LT information: serial number, version
• Tray unit-LTC information: serial number, version
• Tray unit-M information: serial number, version

Checking items such as module, head, and camera versions

01SYS-0347E
3. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Other unit information] from the [Menu] pane. [Another unit information]
displays.
01SYS-0350E
• Module information: unit type, serial number, version
• Head information: position, unit type, serial number, version
• Conveyor information: unit type, serial number, bank, I/F board version
• Camera information: unit type, serial number, version
• Pressure calibration unit information: version, correction value, filter frequency

Refreshing unit information

Use the following procedure to refresh the unit information being displayed.
2. Click [Refresh]. [Device information], [Nozzle information], and [Other unit information] for the selected
module are all refreshed.
01SYS-0351E
Exporting unit information to a text file

Unit information can be exported to a text file. Use the following procedure to do this.
2. Click [Export] and specify the directory where to save the file. All the information for the selected
module is saved to a text file.
01SYS-0352E

10.9 MEdit
This software is used to perform basic editing of job data and testing of panel/board skip marks. It is capable
of acquiring the job on the machine and sending the edited data back to the machine as well as saving the
changes to the global directory.
Note
If a job currently being used in production is edited in Fuji Flexa and sent to the machine using MEdit, be aware that problems such as incorrect
placements or missing parts may occur during production.
WARNING
• When using remote operation for machines, machines may start to move even though there are no
people around them.Do not insert hands or other body parts into machines that are in a state in
which it is possible to start operation.The machine may start to operate by remote operation and
hands or other body parts may get caught, resulting in serious injury.When working inside a
machine, be sure to push one of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons.
• Be sure to fully understand the contents in the "Safety Guidelines" when using remote operation.Be
sure to understand that Fuji accepts no responsibility for any accidents or issues that may occur due
to the use of remote operation.?

10.10 IPS Viewer

This software is used to display on computers the images and results taken by the IPS (Intelligent Parts
Sensor) system on heads equipped with the parts side view recognition function (such as the V12 head).
01NST-0430
10.10.1 Installing IPS Viewer

IPS Viewer is in the software DVD.
1. Insert the media with the software into the drive.

displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe on the DVD.
3. Click [Select the required images and install] from the [Setup support tools for the engineering panel]
section.
4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [IPS Viewer] and then click
[Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when installation is complete, the
final step is displayed.
01NST-0431

10.10.2 IPS Viewer window elements

The IPS Viewer window is comprised of elements like the one shown below.
Menu bar
Toolbar
IPS Image pane Properties pane
Menu bar: All operations, such as opening files and selecting the display area,
can be performed by using the menu bar.
Toolbar: Frequently used commands contained in the menu bar can be accessed
directly from the toolbar.
IPS image pane: Images captured by the IPS and the measurement results
display in this pane.
Properties pane: Items such as measurement results and parameters for
measurement timing display in this pane. 01NST-0432-E
10.10.3 Basic IPS Viewer operation

It is necessary to acquire the IPS image from the machine before using the software. Use one of the
following methods to acquire the IPS image file from the machine by using Accessory Software.
• Acquiring a file using the error image analysis function in Accessory Software. By specifying
acquisition of images by slot in advance, the IPS will determine the error type and automatically
send the image to Accessory Software.
• Acquire from the machine trace data. It is possible to acquire the last captured IPS image together
with the trace data.
Note
For details on these methods, refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual chapter 2, section "5. Vision processing error analysis" and
chapter 6, section "4. Acquiring machine trace data"

Opening an IPS file

Use one of the methods below to open an IPS file after starting IPS Viewer.
• Drag-and-drop the desired IPS file into the IPS Viewer window.
• Select [Open File] from the [File] menu the open file button on the toolbar, and specify the desired
IPS file in the [Open File] dialog box.
Displaying nozzle measurement results

There are three types of IPS images IPS1 to IPS3. The displayed contents for each image type differ.
IPS1 IPS2 IPS3
Image for a single nozzle Image for 2 nozzles Image for 4 nozzles
01NST-0433E
From these IPS images, select the desired area to display the measurement results for the applicable
nozzle. To select an area, select one of the area numbers from the toolbar.
Area number
Area
01NST-0434E

The images below illustrate the relationship between the area number and the position of the nozzle inside
the IPS image. IPS1 is fixed at area number 1.
IPS2 IPS3
Area number 3 2 2 3 4 1
Area
01NST-0435E
Enlarging and reducing IPS images

It is possible to enlarge or reduce the image displayed in the IPS image pane by using buttons on the toolbar
or commands from the menu bar.
Change the display size
When this command is active and the image is clicked, the

magnification of the image is increased. It is also possible to drag
Zoom In
the cursor to specify the area of the image that is to be magnified.
Right-click to reduce the magnification of the image.
When this command is active and the image is clicked, the

Zoom Out magnification of the image is reduced.
Right-click to increase the magnification of the image.
Select this command to resize the image to fit the size of the
Fit window.
When this is selected, the zoom in/out operation mode is cleared.
Normal Normal Click this to clear the zoom in/out operation mode.
01NST-0436E

10.10.4 Reading the displayed results

It is possible to check the results of the following items in IPS Viewer.
• Dropped part check
• Parts release check
• Tombstoned check
• Part height check
• Upside-down part check
• Nozzle check
• Nozzle position check
The result type contained in the IPS file can be identified in based on the information displayed in [Process
type] in the IPS Viewer properties pane.
Process type
Image acquisition time Before placement
Displays the timing of the measurement After placement
After nozzle changeover
Nozzle presence
After pickup
After dip
If other items display, refer to the IPS

Viewer instruction manual on the
system CD-ROM for details.
Check details Part presence

Displays the type of measurement Part height
Measure part height
Nozzle reference position
Nozzle position check (*1)
(*1) There are cases of settings like the following being displayed
for Part presence, Part height, Measure part height.
Part presence + Part height
When this is displayed, the results for these two types of
checks are being displayed at the same time.
01NST-0437E

Dropped part check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the dropped part check result is displayed.
a. Image acquisition time
• After pickup, After dip, Before placement
b. Check details
• Part presence
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, and part detection lines are displayed.
Example good result Example error result

(Part exists in measurement area) (No part exists in measurement area)
Measurement area
Nozzle position
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0438E
Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.
Generic
(*1)
Head number Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement was
performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle position
for which the measurement was performed.
(*1) Feeder ID Displays the slot from which the measured part was picked.
Measurement result
(*1) Threshold value Displays the threshold value for determining whether or not a
part is present.
Detection position Displays the numerical value for the part detection line.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there is an
error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.
Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0439E

Parts release check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the parts release check result is displayed.
a. Image acquisiton time
• After placement
b. Check details
• Part presence
Displayed items

(No part exists in measurement area) (Part exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle position
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0440E

Generic
(*1)
Head number Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement was
performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle position
for which the measurement was performed.
Measurement result
(*1) Threshold value Displays the threshold value for determining whether or not a
part is present.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there is an
error result, the related error code displays.
Version

Tombstoned check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the tombstoned part check result is displayed.
• After pickup, Before placement
b. Check deatils
• Part height
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, part detection, and tolerance lines are
displayed.

(Part exists within tolerance lines) (Part not within tolerance lines)
Measurement area
Nozzle position
Upper tolerance
line
Part detection line
(bottom of part)
Lower tolerance
line
01NST-0441E

Generic
Head number
(*1) Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement
was performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle
position for which the measurement was performed.
Measurement result
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there
is an error result, the related error code displays.
Tolerance
Upper Displays the numerical value for the upper tolerance line.
Lower Displays the numerical value for the lower tolerance line.
Version

Part height check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the part height check result is displayed.
• After pickup
b. Check details
• Measure part height
Displayed items

Measurement area
Nozzle position
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0438E

Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Version

Upside-down part check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the part height check result is displayed.
• After pickup
b. Check details
• Upper-down check
Displayed items

Measurement
area
Nozzle position
Lead detection
line
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0447E

Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Lead detection position Displays the numerical value for the detected position
for the lead ends.
Part and lead difference Displays the numerical value for the difference between
the part bottom surface and the lowest point for the lead ends.
Version

Nozzle check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the nozzle check result is displayed.
• After nozzle changeover
b. Check details
• Nozzle reference position
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area and nozzle position line are displayed.

(Nozzle exists in measurement area) (No nozzle exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle tip
position
01NST-0444E

Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Version

Nozzle position check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the nozzle position check result is displayed.
• Nozzle presence
b. Check details
• Nozzle position check
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area and nozzle position line are displayed.
Check for nozzle in upper position

(Nozzle exists in measurement area) (No nozzle exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle position
Check for nozzle in lower position

(No nozzle exists in measurement area) (Nozzle exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle position
01NST-0446E


The meaning of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.
Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Version

SYS-NXT3C-013E0 11. Upgrading software
11. Upgrading software

This section explains how to upgrade the machine control software as well as the software for the different
units.
11.1 Upgrading machine control software

When upgrading the machine control software, there are two methods.
a. Use Accessory Software to upgrade machines whenever possible. When Accessory Software is
used, all of the bases that make up a NXT-3/NXT-3c “machine” in Fuji Flexa are upgraded at the
same time and machine configuration settings are retained.
b. When using VersionUp to upgrade the machine control software, the upgrade process has to be
repeated for each individual base and the machine configuration settings are reset back to the default
settings.
11.1.1 Using accessory software

Before this function can be used, the machine control software must first be installed on the computer on
which Accessory Software is installed.
1. Ensure that all of the bases for the machine to be upgraded are turned on and that the modules are
not producing or performing any special processing.
2. Change to manual mode to perform software loading.
3. Select the [Diagnosis] command from the menu.
4. Push the START button. If nozzles are on the head, the nozzles on the heads are automatically
returned to the nozzle station.
01SYS-1070

11. Upgrading software SYS-NXT3C-013E0
5. Ensure that the following pictogram is displayed on the operation panel.
01SYS-1051
6. Start Accessory Software and display the Floor Monitor page.
Note
Refer to "8.2 Starting accessory software"for details.
7. From Floor Monitor, click the machine for which to upgrade. The Machine Accessories log on page is
displayed.
1;7$6(
9. Enter the user password and then click [Log on]. If the log on is successful, the machine accessories
page is displayed with the selected machine already selected.
10. Click [Remote operation]
11. Click [Machine Application Installation].
42SYS-0152-E
12. Select the new version and click [Start updating] to start the installation process.

13. After installation is completed, turn off the main switches for the bases.
Caution
Turn off the main switch to the base directly while the following screen is still displayed without placing the module in sleep mode or
any other such action.
01SYS-1051
14. Restart the machine. After restarting, upgrading the software is started.
Caution
Do not turn off the power to the machine while it is being upgraded.
15. After all of the modules have been upgraded, restart the machine.
Note
After upgrading, ensure that the specified machine and module configuration settings are correct.
11.1.2 Using VersionUp from the NXT tools

This software is used to change the current machine version on the base and attached modules to the
version on the DVD. The current IP address of the base to upgrade must be known. This can be performed
from any computer that can connect to the machine over the network and has a DVD drive.
Be sure to record any module configuration settings for the module before performing any of the steps below
because it is necessary to specify these settings again after upgrading.
below.
a. Select the [Exchange] command.
b. Select the [Nozzles] command.
d. When the guidance for removing the module displays, press the [Manual] button. It is not necessary
to pull forward the module.

01SYS-1050
01SYS-1051
7. Insert the NXT software DVD (CD-ROM disc1) into the disc drive and open the drive for the DVD (CD-
ROM disc1) through Explorer.
8. Double-click [NXT] to open that folder.
Note
Open the [NXT] folder beneath the [disc1] folder on the DVD, and the [NXT] folder directly beneath the drive on CD-ROM disc1.
9. Double-click VersionUp.exe to start the software.
10. In the [Operator] text box, enter some text.

11. Enter the IP address of the base for which to upgrade in the [Host name] text box and then click [OK].
12. If the target machine is found, a dialog box displays with the current version in the machine and the
new version. If the upgrade process should continue, click [OK]. A dialog box displays with the
upgrade progress.
13. Once all of the files have been copied, a message box displays. Click [OK] to close the message.
14. Turn off the main switches for bases on the machine.
Caution
Turn off the main switch to the base directly while the following screen is still displayed without placing the module in sleep mode or
any other such action.
01SYS-1051
15. Restart the machine. A confirmation messages asking if the module should be upgraded is displayed
on the operation panel at each module.
16. Press the perform command button. Upgrading the software is started.
01SYS-1052
Caution
Do not turn off the power to the machine while it is being upgraded.
17. After all of the modules have been upgraded, restart the machine.
18. Use Accessory Software to specify the appropriate settings for all of the machine and module
configuration settings.

11.1.3 When unable to upgrade

This section explains what to do if upgrading is not completed due to conditions such as machine power
was turned off while upgrading control software.
When upgrading the machine was not completed

Use the provided EmergencyInstaller software to recover the module CPU and base CPU.
Refer to "10.5 EmergencyInstaller" for details.
When upgrading the vision processing board was not completed

Normally, after control software update is completed, the process continues with upgrading the vision
processing board.
If upgrading the vision processing board fails for some reason, the following screen is displayed when
restarting the machine.
01SYS-1027
When this occurs, follow the procedures below to upgrade the vision processing board.
1. Turn off the main switch for the base on the machine.
2. Move the toggle switch on the vision processing board to the left position. Perform this work for all
applicable modules.
01SYS-1028

3. Turn on the main switch for the machine.
4. The machine is booted, and the upgrade restart screen is displayed on all the operation panels on
which the toggle switch was changed.
5. Press the perform command button. The upgrade process is restarted.
01SYS-1029
6. Upgrade all applicable modules, and then turn off the main switch for the base on the machine.
7. Move the toggle switch on the vision processing board back to the original position.
8. Turn on the main switch for the machine. This completes upgrading the vision processing board.
Note
Vision processing recovery upgrading is supported from NXT-3(c). NXT-2 machines cannot be recovered by performing this procedure.

11.2 Upgrading unit software

This command is used to upgrade the software for units such as heads, feeders, and feeder pallets. The
unit to be upgraded must be loaded on a module to perform the upgrade.
1. Install the software for the units on the computer that has the Accessory Software server installed.
below.
a. Select the [Exchange] command.
b. Select the [Nozzles] command.
d. When the guidance for removing the module displays, press the [Manual] button. It is not necessary
to pull forward the module.
01SYS-1050
01SYS-1051
8. Start Accessory Software and display the Floor Monitor page.
Note
Refer to "8.2 Starting accessory software"for details.

9. From Floor Monitor, click the machine for which to upgrade the unit software. The Machine
Accessories log on page is displayed.
NXTAS0019E
11. Enter the user password and then click [Log on]. If the log on is successful, the machine accessories
page is displayed with the selected machine already selected.
12. Select the modules to upgrade and then click [Remote operation].
13. Click [Update software].
14. Then click [Start updating]. Accessory Software copies the software and automatically reboots the
machine when completed.
15. After restarting, the unit selection screen displays. Select the unit to update.
Note
To update all units, select [Execute of All] and push OK.
16. Push START to begin the update.


SYS-NXT3C-013E0 12. Troubleshooting
12. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains basic procedures for troubleshooting the machine and a list of common issues
encountered. Use this chapter to identify and resolve minor problems to restore the machine to its proper
condition.
Contact your Fuji representative for serious problems or repairs that cannot be performed.
12.1 Troubleshooting points

Follow the points below to help speed up the troubleshooting process.
• Read the error messages.
Note
Write down any codes so if contacting your Fuji representative is required, the error message codes can be included.
• Use the instructions that display on the operation panel to help resolve most issues.
Note
Be sure to follow the on screen steps in order. There are some points that OK must be pushed. If OK is not pushed or pushed out of order
then the procedures on the operation panel may not advance, or show the wrong steps.
• Check the most basic items first.
• Start with the most plausible cause.
• Check step by step while eliminating possible causes.
12.2 Checking error codes

In Accessory Software, click the "Error Stop" text that displays in Floor Monitor for the applicable machine.
Information related to the error is displayed.
2 1 1
01SYS-0471Ea
IIn addition, it is possible to check the error information by conducting a search for the error codes displayed
in the operation panel by following the procedures below.
1. In Floor Monitor, click [Error Search] from [Menu] and the page changes to display the error code
search page.
2. Enter the error code that displays on the operation panel in the text box for [Error Code] and click
[Search]. The specified error code is searched for and if located, the page changes to display the
information.

12. Troubleshooting SYS-NXT3C-013E0
3. To conduct another search, enter the new error code in the text box and click [Search]. To view any
additional details about the error, click [Details] if it is available.
12.3 Troubleshooting common machine issues
12.3.1 Mark vision processing errors

Restart the reading process and change the operation panel to display the vision processing images by
pushing MONITOR. Check the following points when the mark with the error is displayed.
Point Description/Countermeasure
Is the mark present? If the mark is not present that can indicate that the mark position in the
job is incorrect or possibly that the panel was loaded incorrectly.
Remove the panel and ensure that it was loaded correctly.
Check the position of the mark and then check the position of the mark
in the job and correct if necessary.
If the panel is not stopping in the correct position, use the panel stopping
position correction function.
Is the mark clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the mark and that the mark is clearly
visible. Remove any items covering the mark. This is especially
common for marks read during calibration due to the retractable
reference conveyor tops.
If the mark is not clearly visible, check the lighting of the mark camera.
If out of focus, check to ensure the panel is clamped.
If the panel is clamped and the mark is still out of focus or too dark,
replace the mark camera and lighting and try again.
Is the mark within the outer This outer box represents the scan area. If the mark is outside of the
green box? scan area, it cannot be found even if it is perfectly clear.
The scan area should be at least 1.5 times larger than the entire mark.
If it is not, open the job and change the read area.
Does the shape of the mark The green outline indicates the shape of the mark in the job. If the mark
match the green outline? is a different shape than the one expected, the mark will not be found.
Change the shape for the mark data in the job.
Is the mark the same size as The green outline represents not only the shape but also the size
the green outline? expected. If the mark is larger or smaller than specified in the job, it
cannot be found.
Check the mark size on the panel and change the mark data size to be
appropriate in the job.

Is the mark very bright or very If the mark is too bright or too dark, the system cannot locate the mark.
dark? Change the fiducial mark read brightness setting in the machine
configuration.
Start the Accessory Software client, and then click the name of the
machine in floor monitor.
Log on and then select [Machine Configuration]. Select the [Fiducial
mark setting] from the category drop-down list.
Change the [Fiducial mark reading brightness setting]. If the mark is too
bright, select the [Less] option. If the mark is too dark, select the [More]
setting.
After making the setting, click [Send to machine] to enable the changes.
These points and countermeasures cover most of the common mark read error causes.

12.3.2 Part vision processing errors

If vision processing errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.
1. If the machine is still running, push MONITOR to display the vision monitor. Ensure that the part was
picked and displays on the monitor. Push MONITOR again to close the vision monitor.
2. Read the error message for the error code.
3. Stop the module.
4. Acquire the error image from the module though Accessory Software.
5. Open the image in Image Viewer and check the vision processing results. Check the following points
when the part with the error is displayed.
Is the part present? If the part is not present, that indicates a pick up error of some kind.
Check the condition of the feeder and ensure that parts are being
supplied. Ensure that the correct size of nozzle is used.
Is the part clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the part and that the part is clearly
visible. Remove any items that are possibly obscuring the view such as
parts on the glass covers for the frontlighting unit.
If the part is not clearly visible, check the lighting and ensure that the
correct type of frontlighting is used for the part.
If the part is out of focus or too dark with the correct lighting being used,
replace the part camera unit and try again.
Does the direction of the part The green outline indicates the orientation of the part based on the data
match the green outline? in the job.
If the part is rotated, then that indicates that the direction setting in the
part data does not match the packaging direction. Check the direction
that the part is being supplied in the packaging compared to the setting
in the part data.
If different, then correct the direction setting in the part data for the job.
Does the shape/size of the The green outline indicates the shape/size of the part. If the part is a
part match the green outline? different shape or size then that indicates that the wrong part is present
or that the part data is incorrect. Ensure that the part is correct.
If the part is correct, then edit the part data in the job for that part to
match the actual part.
Does the part match the There are several possible causes for this problem. Generally, the
green outline but the green problem is with the pickup tolerance, wrong vision type, or wrong
outline was not moved to p_pattern (usually coarse positioning cannot be performed for errors).
cover the part? Check the shape data in the job for the part and ensure that these
settings are correct.
Does the green outline cover First, ensure that the part is a good part (e.g., no bent/missing leads).
the part but errors still occur? Check the error message for details. Check the positioning of the
elements to ensure that they are specified correctly.
Check the tolerances in the shape data.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common part vision error causes.

12.3.3 Pickup errors

If pickup errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.
1. Stop the module.
2. Check the following points.
Is the cover tape being taken Check the condition of the cover tape take up. If the cover tape is not
up? taken up properly then it might cover the part thus preventing it from
being picked.
Ensure that the cover tape is being peeled back as the feeder advances.
Ensure that the cover tape take up path is correct and there is more then
10 cm of cover tape extending from the bottom of the feeder. If any
problems are found, then correct them and try pickup again.
Does the feeder advance Check the advancing of the feeder. When it is advancing, does the red
smoothly? error LED ever come on? If it does that indicates a problem with the
Are there any problems with advancing of the feeder. Ensure that the green power light comes on
the condition of the feeder? and that the feed pitch is correct.
Clean the sprocket area and ensure no parts are stuck under the tape
leaf area.
If there is a problem with the feeder, put the parts on another feeder and
perform maintenance on the current feeder to correct the problem.
Is the nozzle size being used Check the size of the nozzle being used for the part. Ensure that the
for the part good? nozzle is not too big or too small for the part.
Ensure that the part has a flat smooth surface in the area where the
nozzle picks at least the size of the nozzle.
If the nozzle size is good but the part still has trouble being picked by
that nozzle, try changing the soft pick speed in the shape data to pick up
the part slower.
If this does not work, try the procedures for the next item.
Is the pickup position good? Use the job test command from Manual Mode to check the pickup
position for the part. Is the pickup position at the center of the desired
pickup point (usually the center of the body)?
- If the packaging is the cause of the error (such as the cavity in the tape
is shifted), specify a device offset at the machine using manual mode
commands.
- If it is not correct, open the job in MEdit and change the pickup point
offset in the shape data for the part in question. Try pickup again after
resending the data to the machine.
Is the pickup height good? Check the pickup offset Z height for the part in question and then check
the actual pickup height for the part in the feeder.
Is the pickup offset Z good?
If it is not correct, open the job in MEdit and correct the pickup offset Z
(tray, if for tray parts) in the shape data (part data) for the part in
question. Try pickup again after resending the data to the machine.
If it is very close to the correct height, try changing this offset to just be
a little lower and then try again. (Do no lower too much or part/nozzle
damage may occur.)
If the pickup offset Z is good, check the levelness of the feeder pallet and
send any necessary adjustments to the module.

What is the condition of the Check the condition of the nozzle being used for the part.
nozzle? Is the nozzle broken?
Is the spring back motion for the nozzle smooth? If it is not, remove the
nozzle and check the nozzle and holder for problems and correct as
necessary.
Is the nozzle clogged? Clean the inside of the nozzle to remove any
items that might be blocking the vacuum.
Try using a different nozzle that is the same size if no problems are
found.
What is the condition of the Ensure that the vacuum is sufficient in the base and the module.
vacuum? Check the nozzle vacuum filter in the head for clogging for the nozzle in
question. If it is dirty, clean it and if it cannot be cleaned, replace it.
Ensure that there is no leak between the head and the XY-robot head
connection point.
If using a multiple holder head and all parts that are picked by holders
after the first few parts have pickup problems, then that might indicate a
vacuum leak problem between the holders and the vacuum pump.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common pickup error causes.

12.3.4 Poor placing accuracy

If poor placing accuracy occurs, check the points below.
Is the placing accuracy Use the simulation test command from MEdit to check the placement
problem just for one point on position for that sequence.
the panel (other parts with the If the placement position is not good, adjust the position in MEdit and
same part number have good transmit the changes back to the machine.
placements)?
Is the placing accuracy This could be due to a part data problem with this part number. Check
problem for all parts with the the following items.
same part number? Ensure that the nozzle size is appropriate for the specified transport
speed.
Ensure that the part height setting is correct. Incorrect settings can
mean that parts are being dropped or pushed in the panel, which will
cause placing problems.
Ensure that there are no placement offsets specified in the shape data.
If a offset is specified, the part is placed using that offset.
Check the vision type and element data settings to ensure that
misalignments are not due to data errors here or incorrect processing.
Check the panel thickness and pallet thickness settings to ensure that
they are correct.
If there is a problem with these settings, then usually multiple parts will
have problems. If no problems with the above data are located, try
slowing down the transport speed and the soft place speed.
Is the placing accuracy Is the nozzle size correct for these parts? If the nozzle size is correct,
problem for all parts using the replace the nozzle and check the old nozzle for the following points.
same nozzle? Ensure that the nozzle is not cracked/chipped.
Ensure that the nozzle is not clogged.
Ensure that the spring back motion for multiple holder nozzles is smooth.
Ensure that no items have adhered to the tip of the nozzle (such as
cover tape adhesive). If the problem still persists after nozzle
replacement, check the mechanical vacuum break action for the nozzle
in question for multiple nozzle heads. Check the solenoid for the H01
and H02 head.
Is the placing accuracy If board fiducials are not being used for each board, then this might
problem for all parts for a indicate a panel circuit production problem or that the board position in
board with all parts shifted the the job is incorrect.
same way but the placing Ensure that the board positioning in the job is correct. Change the job
accuracy for the other boards to use board fiducials to compensate for board misalignment if possible.
on the panel good? If not, alter the board positioning in the direction of the shift to improve
accuracy.
Is the placing accuracy This can indicate a problem with a module.

problem for all parts for all Check the positioning of the backup pins and ensure that when the panel
boards on the panel from a is clamped that it is flat (and there is no natural bowing of the panel).
module? Perform auto calibration on the module in question (jig nozzles are
required for this).
If the accuracy is still not good, then perform PAM on the module in
question.

Is the placing accuracy Check the positioning of the backup pins and ensure that when the panel
problem for all/most parts for is clamped that it is flat (and there is no natural bowing of the panel).
all boards on the panel for all If the parts are all shifted in the same direction and board fiducials are
modules? not being used, this can indicate a panel fiducial to board placement
misalignment. Check the positioning in the job compared to the actual
placements and fiducials.
they are correct.
If there is a problem with these settings, then usually multiple parts will
have problems.
Check the levelness of the machine.
Perform auto calibration on the modules (jig nozzles are required for
this). If the accuracy is still not good, then perform PAM on the module
in question.
How is the printing condition? Check the condition of the solder after the panel comes from the printing
machine before it enters the machine.
Is the printing good with sufficient solder?
Solder printing conditions or dryness can cause part deviations during
panel conveyance, or can affect the self-alignment during reflow.
Solder adhesion weakens when the solder dries. Therefore, the sooner
the placement occurs after printing, the better.
Is the part placement good at Check the reflow temperature profile. Improper reflow conditions can
the machine but poor after cause self-alignment problems and tombstoning. Provide a profile in
reflow? which the temperature is increased evenly over the entire panel. If the
solder melting speed differs from point to point, parts are pulled toward
the solder that melts first.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common poor placing accuracy causes.

12.3.5 Panel conveyance errors

If panel conveyance errors occur, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.
1. Read the error message for the error code.
2. Stop the module.
Is the error that a panel is Check the condition of the panel left and right sensors on the conveyor.
entering or exiting the module If there is no panel currently blocking one of these sensors but the
but it never moves even sensor amplifier mistakenly says there is a panel, that can be the cause
though the panel actually of the problem.
does move? Refer to Sensitivity Adjustment for the Conveyor Panel Pass Sensor in
Chapter 9 of the Mechanical Reference Manual for procedures on
adjusting these sensors.
Is the panel stopping in the If the panel is not stopping in the correct position, ensure that the
correct position? conveyor belts are clean and have no items such as grease on them.
Ensure that the panel is not slipping on the belts due to it being too
heavy or having some thing like grease on it.
If neither the belt nor the panel is dirty, check that [Timing pulley] is
specified for the [Conveyor pulley type] setting in [Module Configuration]
- [Conveyor pulley settings] of Accessory Software.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the panel conveyance error causes.

12.3.6 If there are missing parts

If there are missing parts on the panel, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.
1. Ensure that the parts are being used during production and that there are no pick errors.
2. Ensure that a skip setting for that part has not been specified in Fuji Flexa or in MEdit.
3. Check the condition of the part after the panel is completed in the module.
Is pickup attempted but the Use the pickup troubleshooting procedures to correct the pickup error
part is not being placed due to and do not manually unload panels and put them for production in the
pickup errors and the panel is next module.
manually being unloaded?
Is the part picked but remains Clean the nozzle and ensure that no foreign items have adhered to the
on the nozzle after nozzle to cause the part to remain on the nozzle after placement.
placement? Ensure that the spring back motion of the nozzle is smooth. If the nozzle
remains stuck in the up position, then placement might not occur
correctly.
Check for any placement height offsets in the part data and correct as
needed.
they are correct. If there is a problem with these settings, then usually
multiple parts will have problems.
Has the part been skipped in If the device skip function has been set in MEdit, production continuing
MEdit using the device skip without placing the part is normal. If this part must be placed, then do
function (no pickup and not use this function. If this function is not used, then production cannot
placement is attempted)? be continued until that part is supplied and placed (for example if parts
run out during production). Exercise caution when using this function.
Has the part been skipped in This setting must be manually set and should only be done when
Fuji Flexa? necessary.
If the part has been skipped in Fuji Flexa, then production is being
performed as specified.
If the part needs to be placed, then remove the skip setting in the job,
optimize (if necessary), wait until all current panels in the machine have
been unloaded and then send the modified job to the machine and
restart production.
Is the part being placed by the Check for interference between the part and machines after the placing
module but not on the panels module.
before the reflow oven? Ensure that the part is not too high for the heads following the placing
module (for example, if a placing head following the placing module is
an H08, then the max. height for parts placed before the H08 module is
6.5 mm).
These points and countermeasures cover some of the missing parts causes.

12.3.7 An error occurs that the XS-axis is in an unknown

position.
There are three sensors on the back of the XY-robot on M3-3 modules. These are the XS interlock sensors.
When performing action such as removing/returning a module, this error will occur if two (2) of these sensors
are not on. Push EMERGENCY STOP on that and neighboring modules and gently move the XS-axis slide
so that two of these sensors are activated.
Note
Do not use the handle on the head or the removable head to move the axis.
12.3.8 Panel detection error between modules
If a panel was detected between modules but there is no panel.

The right and left conveyor sensors also check to ensure that there are no panels between the modules
when they are unclamped. If there is no panel but this error still occurs, adjust the conveyor sensor that is
falsely activated. For procedures on adjusting these sensors, refer to the Mechanical Reference.

12.3.9 An encoder backup error occurs
If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on the module (not on a

head).
The individual batteries in the encoder lines for each axis maintain the encoder memory for that axis. If the
encoder cable is disconnected from the motor or the battery is disconnected when there is no power being
supplied to the encoder from the machine, the encoder memory is lost. If the encoder memory is lost for
some reason, an encoder backup error occurs. Perform the following steps if this occurs for an axis on the
module (not an axis on the head). Only perform the following steps if a Fuji representative has trained you
on how to perform them. If you have not been trained on how to perform the following steps, contact your
Fuji representative.
1. Check the battery for that axis. If it is already connected and the encoder cable for this axis was not
disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good or not, replace the battery
with a new one.
2. Move the axis gently by hand to the correct position for that axis to reset the origin positioning.
3. Perform an MT Reset.
4. Restart the machine and the error should be cleared and the machine can be used for production. If
it has not been cleared, check the encoder cable connection and ensure that the battery connection
is good.
If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on a head.

The battery in the head maintains the encoder memory for the axes on the head. If the encoder cable is
disconnected from a motor or the battery is disconnected when there is no power being supplied to the
encoder from the machine, the encoder memory is lost. If the encoder memory is lost for some reason, an
encoder backup error occurs. Perform the following steps if this occurs for an axis on a head. Only perform
the following steps if a Fuji representative has trained you on how to perform them. If you have not been
trained on how to perform the following steps, contact your Fuji representative.
1. Check the battery for the head. If it is already connected and the encoder cables for the axes were
not disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good or not, replace the battery
with a new one.
2. Move all of the axes on the head gently by hand to their correct positions for each axis to reset the
origin positioning.
3. Perform a MT Reset for all of the axes on the head.
4. Set nozzle jigs in the nozzle station and perform autocalibration. Refer to section "4.10.2 Removing
and attaching nozzles" for details on setting nozzle jigs in the module. Once autocalibration has been
completed, the machine can be used for production. If the error has not been cleared, check the
encoder cable connection and ensure that the battery connection is good.

12.3.10 If there is computer system trouble

The following are instructions for correcting trouble items that may occur within the computer system
(Fujitrax, Fuji Flexa, Fuji Accessory Software) for the Machine.
When the error "????2108" and/or "8D32????" occurs on the

machine.
Error conditions:
• This error may occur after the power for the machines or computers have been turned off for a long
period of time (for example, after a holiday) and the power is turned back on.
Were the computers and This occurs when communication cannot be performed because the
machines turned on in the order in which items are turned on is incorrect.
correct order? Turn on the power to the items in the following order.
The time for starting each item is different due to the differences in
computers and machines. Due to this, boot one item and then log on
and wait until that item is fully booted before proceeding to the next item.
1. Boot the computer for the Fujitrax Verifier database and then any
computers for the Profiler databases (if Profiler is being used).
2. Boot the computers with the Fuji Flexa User Server, Job Server, and
Line Server (in this order if on separate computers).
3. Boot the computers for the Fuji Central Server for the machine.
(Ensure that the Fuji Central Server service has started.)
4. Boot any computers with the Fuji Flexa Machine Communicate

Service for machines (if they are separate from the Fuji Flexa User
Server).
5. Turn on the machines. Production can be started once the job has
been downloaded.
Was the power for multiple If several machine lines exist, and the power for all of the lines is turned
machine lines turned on at on simultaneously, then job downloading for all of the machines is also
once? conducted simultaneously. When this happens, the Fuji Flexa server is
requested to send several jobs to several machines at once, and
according to the capability of the computer, a time up error may occur
during the job download process.
Turn on one line at a time and wait until the machine in that line has
finished downloading the job before turning on the machine line.
Is the network operating This error occurs when a network hub or network cables are not
correctly? functioning correctly and/or are disconnected.
Restart the power for the network hub or replace it and/or the network
cables.
When the error occurs only for the modules on a specific base, replace
the network cable that is connected to that base.
When the error occurs for modules on several different bases, replace
the network hub that is being used for those bases.

When the error "8D32????" occurs on the machine and/or the Fuji
Central Server (Fuji Profiler Central Server) stops because of an
error.
Error conditions:
• Operation cannot be started even if the order in which the computers are started is correct or the
central server is rebooted.
Is the correct data saved in It is possible that incorrect data is included in the data that is saved in
the central server? the Fuji Central Server.
Perform the follow procedure to clear the central server data.
1. Stop the Fuji Central Server service (also stop the Fuji Profiler
Central Server service if it is started).
2. Change the name of the "Resume" folder in the Fujitrax install

location.
<drive>:\Program Files\FUJI\Trx\Verifier\KitObj\Bin
3. Start the Fuji Central Server service (also the Fuji Profiler Central
Server if it is being used)
4. Transmit the job to the machine. If no error occurs, begin production.

If the error is not corrected, turn the machine off and then on.
Is the network operating This error occurs when a network hub or network cables are not
correctly? functioning correctly and/or are disconnected.
Restart the power for the network hub or replace it and/or the network
cables.
When the error occurs only for the modules on a specific base, replace
the network cable that is connected to that base.
When the error occurs for modules on several different bases, replace
the network hub that is being used for those bases.
When the error "8D32702A" occurs for the first module of a

machine that is in production.
Error condition:
• An error occurs at the first module in a line that is using Fujitrax Profiler (the panel ID is read using
an external panel ID reader and a FLP).
Is the panel unload sensor on This can be caused by the panel unload sensor (out side) for the
the conveyor with the panel conveyor before the machine (the conveyor installed with the panel ID
ID reading unit remaining on reading unit) remaining either ON or OFF.
or off?
Adjust the panel unload sensor (out side) on the conveyor unit so that it
is functioning properly.

Fujitrax Verifier has been started, but even if the feeders are set
correctly, a module does not verify that feeders are set correctly,
or the error "8D32702A" occurs when panel conveyance is started.
Error condition:
• This error occurs when using reverse panel flow or when the direction of panel conveyance has
been changed.
Is the setting correct in the Kit This error occurs when the settings in the Kit line configuration are
line configuration? incorrect.
In the Kit line configuration, it is necessary to specify settings for the
bases and modules in order from left to right (when looking at the front
of the machine). This left to right order must be followed regardless of
the panel flow direction.
When using Kit Line Configuration, specify settings for all bases and
modules in order from left to right (when looking at the machine from the
front).
Example
Panel flow direction
Base 2 Base 1
NXTOPE240-E
*Bases are specified using IP addresses. However, to make the

example here easier to understand, the bases are specified using the
names "Base 1" and "Base 2".

If the machine cannot download a job (the error "????2108"

occurs).
Has the job been renamed, If the job has been renamed, moved, or deleted, the machine will not be
moved, or deleted? able to locate the job and an error occurs.
Undo any changes that have been done to the previous job (such as a
new name) or delete the current job using Accessory Software and then
transmit the new job to the machine using Fuji Flexa.
Refer to the Accessory Software online manual for details on deleting

jobs from the machine.
Are the Fuji Flexa server When the Fuji Flexa (user server, job server, machine communication
computers (user server, job server) computer is turned off, is in sleep mode, or is not connected with
server, machine the network, the machine cannot receive jobs and this error will occur
communication server) when attempting to download jobs.
turned on and connected to
the network? Turn on the machine after ensuring that the Fuji Flexa server (user
server, job server, machine communication server) computers are
turned on and connected to the network.
Also, change the setting of the computers with Fuji Flexa servers so that
they will not enter sleep mode.
Change the settings for notebook computers so that the computer will
not enter sleep mode even when the cover is closed.

Production information for a line cannot be compiled or displayed

in Line Reporter or Line Monitor Client.
Error conditions:
• Production information for a line report cannot be compiled only for a specific line.
• In Line Monitor Client, the background of the machine name or the line name is black.
• If the machine operation history or other functions are opened in Line Monitor Client, no data is
displayed in the graphs.
Was a line change performed Production information is not totaled correctly when line settings from
successfully or are the line Fuji Flexa or line change notices are not performed correctly.
settings correct? The same error may occur when there are different machines with the
same IP address in the line settings.
Is there another machine with
the same IP address in the Follow the procedure below to report the changes.
line settings?
1. Push CYCLE STOP to stop production for the machine line for which
production data is not correctly totaled.
2. In Fuji Flexa, change the status of the line to a virtual line and send a
line change notice.
3. Next, change the status of the line to a real line and send a line
change notice.
Was a current line copied and One example of trouble that occurs is when a new line is added to the
then pasted in Fuji Flexa Line factory and line configuration data in Fuji Flexa is created. If the
Editor? configuration of a line that closely resembles the line that is being
created is copied and then pasted, then there is a temporary situation
where two lines with the same configuration (IP address) exist. This
may cause errors in the collection of production data.
Use the steps listed below when creating a new line by copying an
existing line.
1. Create the new line as a virtual line.
2. Copy the machine configurations that resemble the new line being
created and paste them into the virtual line that was created in step 1.
3. After changing the machine configuration (machine IP address,

machine communication service IP address) for the new line, change
the line to a real line and send a line change notice from Fuji Flexa.

There is a discrepancy in the production information for the

number of parts used and for the number of parts rejected.
Error condition:
• There is a significant discrepancy in the totaled production information for a specific line only.
Is production being Production information is not totaled correctly when production is

performed using different job performed using different job names in the same machine line.
names? A particular characteristic of this error is that no information is displayed
regarding parts or feeders, but information regarding machine errors is
displayed.
This error occurs when a job is transmitted to the background and job
changeover is performed at an individual module.
Make sure that the entire line is using the same job for production.

A line does not display in Floor Monitor in Accessory Software or

the module configuration is not correct.
Error condition:
• After upgrading the machine or setting up the line, the line is not displayed in Floor Monitor.
Is the data being used by the The settings in Fuji Realtime Workingrate Buffer Service (hereafter
Realtime Workingrate Buffer referred to as RWB) are not correct, or RWB is not operating properly.
service correct?
Follow the procedure below to correct this data.
1. Ensure that the computer names or IP addresses are correctly set in

the machine communicate server in Fuji Flexa for the line (bases) that
does not display in Floor Monitor.
The computer with the Machine Communicate Server is the computer
running the FNC Machine Communication Service.
2. Send a line change notice from Fuji Flexa.
3. Open the [Service] window (from the Windows control panel) on the
computer with the machine communicate server for the machine and
restart the Realtime Workingrate Buffer service.
4. Access the Accessory Software website and in the upper right section
of the Floor Monitor page, click [Service List] and the click [Check] in the
[Checking and restarting RWB services] section. Then click [Restart] for
the RWB service for the line with the problem. After RWB has restarted
(approximately 10 seconds), check to see if the line is displayed in Floor
Monitor.

12.4 Troubleshooting common Fuji Flexa and

Fujitrax related issues
12.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors
After transmitting jobs, the machine requires many items to be

changed such as heads.
This can indicate a configuration problem in the job.
Open the job and ensure that the module configuration matches that of the actual machine (for example,
module types, head types, nozzle station types). If an error is found, correct the error and optimize the job
for the machine again.
When I attempt to transmit a job, the machine has a red X over the
icon in the [Transmit Job] dialog box, but I know the job has the
correct machine.
The most likely cause for this problem is that the job being transmitted is in the local job directory.
Copy the job into the global job directory and attempt to transmit the same job from the global directory.
There should be no red X in the [Transmit Job] dialog box. Only jobs in the global directory can be
transmitted to machines.
12.4.2 Fujitrax related errors
The machine is registered and setup correctly in the line

configuration file for Fujitrax and the system has been restarted,
but the machine still does not use Fujitrax.
To change this setting, Accessory Software must be used. Refer to the procedures "Making Machine
Configuration Settings" in the Fuji Accessory Software chapter for how to change the Fujitrax setting.
I made IDs for the parts and feeders, but when I set the parts on the
machine, it will never accept the parts even though they and the
feeders are correct.
The most likely cause for this issue is that the Quickverify required mode is set to "ON" at the computer with
the Verifier Central Server for the machine.
When this setting is on, even if the parts are correct and IDs are created, the parts will not be accepted when
set on the machine until a quickverify is performed on those parts. Perform a quickverify for the parts and
if the machine then accepts the feeders, then that was the issue. Turn this setting off if this mode is not
desired.

After logging on to the Kit Handy, I cannot select the machine in

the device check mode. Nor do I see any parts out warnings or
machine errors.
The most likely cause for not being able to access the machine device check screen is that the User ID used
to log on is not registered for the machine in the Kit Handy Settings.
1. Start Kit Manager and have an administrator level user log on.
2. In the line display on the left side of the window, right-click the machine and select [Kit Handy Settings]
from the shortcut menu that displays.
Note
The dialog box for the [Kit Handy Setting] displays with a list of users that are responsible for that machine.
3. Add the user ID previously used to this list.
This setting affects which machines display in the Parts out list and Machine Errors list at Kit Handy as well
as the machines that a device check can be performed on. In addition, this setting also determines which
machines display under the [Operator] branch in Kit Manager for the user logged on.

12.5 Major machine issues

Many units on the machine can be replaced easily without any special measurements or skill required, refer
to the Mechanical Reference for procedures on replacing units. If a unit stops working or there is an
intermediate problem, replace the unit and check the condition of the new unit. If the new unit works
correctly, send the old unit to be serviced with a detailed description of the problem.
It is important to note that while units are easy to replace, items in units should not be changed or adjusted
except by qualified Fuji representatives. This point ensures that all units are the same and this is one of the
reasons for easy replacement and the lack of special measurements. Some examples of "units" are the
parts camera/lighting unit, head, module CPU, and the mark camera/lighting unit.
Note
If an item is not in the Mechanical Reference and the procedures for replacing that are unknown, then do not attempt to replace the item.
Contact your Fuji representative for guidance about the item.
If a major problem is encountered (such as, numerous OS errors) and it cannot be resolved, acquire the
trace data from all of the related items and send this data to your Fuji representative along with a detailed
explanation of the conditions in which the problem occurs, any steps taken to resolve the problem, and any
error codes displayed. If all of this data is sent to your Fuji representative, the troubleshooting process is
greatly aided and steps already taken mostly likely do not need to be repeated, thus saving time.

12.6 Acquiring trace data

Use the following procedures to acquire trace data from the machine when errors and software issues
occur.
There are two methods for generating trace data.
a. Acquiring data using the on-machine save function
b. After an OS error occurs, trace data is automatically generated.
12.6.1 Acquiring data using the on-machine save function

By using commands on the machine, it is possible to generate trace data. This allows trace data to be saved
temporarily in the machine if an error occurs during production.
Refer to "5.9 Saving trace data" for details.
Afterwards, acquire the trace data using Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire
Trace] from the machine accessories section when the machine is selected.
12.6.2 Acquiring after operating system errors

Use the following procedure if an operating system error or application error occurs.
The procedures below must be followed. If the main power switch for the machine is not turned on and then
off, trace data cannot be acquired using Accessory Software due to a communication error.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. When the module has started and entered sleep mode, acquire the trace data using Accessory
Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire Trace] from the machine accessories section when
the module is selected.


Fuji Technical Information Website
The Fuji Technical Information website aims at providing up-to-date

information to our customers in the most efficient manner. This site
provides the latest technical information and a range of services, from
manuals, upgrade reports, sample part data, to custom part support. Fuji
hopes that the vast wealth of information on this site will be used in
addition to the services provided by your Fuji representative.
Membership is required in order to access the Fuji Technical Information
website. Please contact your Fuji representative for membership details.
Any comments or opinions regarding this document can be sent to the
email address below.
Email address: intnetqst@fuji.co.jp
NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference
Management No. Date Notes
SYS-NXT3c-001E0 March 31, 2014 NXT V7.40

SYS-NXT3c-002E0 December 24, 2014 NXT V7.70
SYS-NXT3c-003E0 April 30, 2015 NXT V7.80
SYS-NXT3c-004E0 August 31, 2015 NXT V8.10
SYS-NXT3c-006E0 September 30, 2016 NXT V8.50
SYS-NXT3c-007E0 October 31, 2016 NXT V8.55
SYS-NXT3c-008E0 February 17, 2017 NXT V8.60
SYS-NXT3c-010E0 June 30, 2017 NXT V8.70
SYS-NXT3c-011E0 November 6, 2017 NXT V8.80
SYS-NXT3c-012E0 January 31, 2018 NXT V8.90
FUJI CORPORATION
19 Chausuyama, Yamamachi, Chiryu, Aichi Prefecture,
472-8686, Japan Tel: +81 (0)566 81-2111
 2018 FUJI CORPORATION All Rights Reserved.

Printed in Japan
This manual is printed on recycled paper.

LSR NXT3 C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LSR NXT3 C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Update Notice

The following manual has been revised.

Manual title: NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

The main changes are shown below.

Chapter, Section Details of change

Other minor changes and corrections have

E-mail address: intnetqst@fuji.co.jp

NXT III/NXT IIIc

SQL Server 2014 is trademarks of Oracle Corporation.

Warranty and liability

2. Machine components and functions.....................................................................47

NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference i

2.4.1 Operation panel buttons ...................................................................................... 54

3. Basic operation .................................................................................................... 65

4. Preparing production ........................................................................................... 79

ii NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

4.5.2 Removing and attaching feeders ........................................................................ 95

NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference iii

4.11.4 Moving the head to the exchange position........................................................ 164

iv NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

5.7.4 Using the SUPPLY button ................................................................................. 243

6. Machine operations ............................................................................................247

NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference v

6.11 Simple periodic nozzle changeover function ................................................................... 280

vi NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

6.20.3 Outputting panel height measurement results to a file...................................... 315

7. Using manual commands...................................................................................339

NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference vii

7.7.2 Nozzles command............................................................................................. 357

8. Accessory software............................................................................................ 375

viii NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

8.9.4 The machine during automatic trace acquisition............................................... 391

9. Settings and management .................................................................................393

NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference ix

9.6.2 Updating machine control software ................................................................... 434

10. Using software tools .......................................................................................... 443

x NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

10.8.9 Conveyor command list..................................................................................... 478

11. Upgrading software ............................................................................................497

NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference xi

xii NXT llI/NXT IIIc System Reference

• NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference

• NXT III Mechanical Reference

• NXT series Programming Manual for Nexim

• NXT series Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa

• NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference

• NXT IIIc Mechanical Reference

• NXT series Programming Manual for Nexim

• NXT series Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa

NXT III Setup Manual/NXT IIIc Setup Manual

NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference

NXT III Mechanical Reference/NXT IIIc Mechanical Reference

NXT series Programming Manual for Nexim

NXT series Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa

NXT III/NXT IIIc System Reference xiii

Formal name Names used in this manual

NXT III NXT-3

M3 III module M3-3 module

M3 IIIS module M3-3S module

M6 III module M6-3 module

M6 IIIL module M6-3L module

2M III base 2M-3 base

4M III base 4M-3 base